Apparatuses, systems and methods for three-dimensional printing.
Abstract
The present disclosure provides three-dimensional (3D) objects, 3D printing processes, as well as methods, apparatus, and systems for producing a 3D object. The methods, apparatus, and systems of the present disclosure can reduce or eliminate the need for auxiliary supports. The present disclosure provides three-dimensional (3D) objects printed using the printing processes, methods, apparatus, and systems described in the present disclosure.

Term
8.7 yearsleft in the term
Expires 19 June 2035.
- Priority
- Filed
- Granted
- Today
- Expires
26 claims: 1 independent, 25 dependent
- 1Un método para generar un obje! comprende:•que (a) dispensar una primera capa de material en polvo en un recinto, para proporcionar un lecho de polvo que tiene una primera superficie superior;(b) dirigir un haz de energía hacia la primera capa de material en polvo, para generar al menos una' porción del objeto tridimensional de al menos una porción de la primera capa;(c) dispensar una segunda capa de material en polvo en el recinto, en donde la segunda capa de material en polvo comprende una segunda superficie superior;(d) cizallar la segunda capa de material en polvo para formar una primera superficie plana, en donde el cizallado comprende una espátula o una cuchilla de aire, en donde la primera superficie plana se encuentra en o por debajo de un punto más bajo de la segunda superficie superior;y (e) remover substancialmente todo el material en polvo que está encima de una segunda superficie plana de la segunda capa del material en polvo, en donde la remoción comprende 462 IMP *>vl INSTITUTO MEXiCANC V*¿*< utilizar una succión al vacío, fuerza magneí&ffl^áuL ^aí¿r->a electrostática o flujo de gas, en 11 donoe —. superficie plana está ubicada debajo de la primera superficie plana, en donde la remoción ocurre sin contactar el lecho de polvo, y en donde, durante la remoción, la primera capa de material en polvo comprende material en polvo que puede fluir.
- 2El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el material en polvo comprende un metal elemental, una aleación de metal, cerámica o un alótropo de carbón elemental.
- 3El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la generación comprende transformar el material en polvo para generar un material transformado que subsiguientemente se endurece resultando en un material endurecido, en donde al menos una porción del material endurecido sobresale de la primera superficie superior, formando con ello una protuberancia. 4. El método de la reivindicación 3, en donde la protuberancia es al menos una porción del objeto tridimensional. protuberancia comprende el alabeo, combadura, jdoblado... o redondeo del material endurecido.
- 46. El método de la reivindicación 3, en donde la 5 protuberancia comprende un material endurecido que no es parte del objeto tridimensional.
- 57. El método de la reivindicación 3, en donde la protuberancia tiene una altura de aproximadamente 10 micrómetros a aproximadamente 500 micrómetros con respecto a 10 la primera superficie superior.
- 68. El método de la reivindicación 3, en donde la protuberancia sobresale de la segunda superficie plana.
- 79. El método de la reivindicación 3, en donde la protuberancia no sobresale ni de la primera superficie plana 15 ni de la segunda superficie superior.
- 810. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde una distancia vertical promedio de la primera superficie superior a la segunda superficie plana es aproximadamente de 5 micrómetros a aproximadamente 1000 micrómetros. 20
- 911. El método de la reivindicación 10, en donde una distancia vertical promedio de la primera superficie superior 464 a la primera superficie plana micrómetros a aproximadamente 500
- 1012. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la remoción comprende usar la succión al vacío.
- 1113. El método de la reivindicación 1, que además comprende reutilizar un exceso del material en polvo de la primera capa y/o segunda capa.
- 1214. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la segunda superficie plana está situado debajo de la primera superficie superior.
- 1315. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde, al cizallar la segunda capa de material en polvo para formar la primera superficie plana, la por lo menos una porción del objeto tridimensional se desplaza por aproximadamente 300 micrómetros o menos.
- 1416. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el dispensado comprende dispensar el material en polvo desde un dispensador de polvo que está separado de la segunda superficie superior por un espacio.
- 1517. El método de la reivindicación 16, en donde el espacio tiene una distancia de separación que es 465 aproximadamente de 10 milímetros. micrómetros
- 1618. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la remoción es sincronizada con el dispensado de la segunda capa 5 para formar una segunda superficie plana, uniformemente aplanada.
- 1719. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el dispensado comprende utilizar un dispensador de polvo que comprende un puerto de abertura de salida, y en donde al 10 menos una obstrucción está situada en el puerto de abertura de salida o entre el puerto de abertura de salida y una superficie superior del lecho de polvo.
- 1820. El método de la reivindicación 19, en donde la obstrucción comprende una superficie rugosa. 15
- 1921. El método de la reivindicación 19, en donde la obstrucción comprende una malla o un plano con agujeros.
- 2022. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la remoción comprende utilizar un elemento de remoción de polvo que comprende un puerto de entrada de polvo. 466 INSTITUTO MEXICANO
- 2123. El método de la reivindicación 2 2?, E ‘Λν^τ^οϊϊ^Βετ elemento de remoción de polvo comprende^uaa«--JaΛq^iii'l·aI.r.-<áe.·. vacio.
- 2224. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el lecho de polvo comprende partículas individuales formadas del material en polvo, y en donde el material en polvo es seleccionado del grupo que consiste en un metal elemental, aleación de metal, cerámica o alótropo de carbón elemental.
- 2325. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el flujo de gas es laminar.
- 2426. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el dispensado comprende utilizar un dispensador de polvo que está acoplado a por lo menos un sensor de altura •
- 2527. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el dispensado comprende utilizar un dispensador de polvo que proporciona el material en polvo, dicho dispensador de polvo siendo sometido a vibración.
- 2628. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde la segunda capa de material en polvo cubre al menos una porción de la primera capa del material en polvo. 467 29. cizallado 30. cizallado El método de la comprende utilizar reivindicación la espátula. El método de la reivindicación 1, en donde el comprende utilizar la cuchilla de aire.
Independent claims26
2,705 paragraphs in 97 sections, as filed
Expiration Date June 19, 2035
Issue Date: 18'deabrifdé 2Í> t§ <sup>1</sup><sub>zr</sub>
The patent of referencesMptórga with foundation eKTeráhí ^ los U 2 'frsicc ^ n V) 6 °<sub>F</sub>fraction M # S9¿iéWLaw of the
In accordance with the article Ley di la-Bí & pudágf Jndustnaf la f / reafertte MeffBAerfe4p »« «eetcia de veinW ^ Bsrtmprorrogables, counted from the date of filingoltft -d§LetfpflÍaclonal'Illictment Vieslaíi SSJtta pachospócnteMalener Tarifa.
Whoever subscribes to this title shall see it as the basis in fc> provided for "Article 6 '<a *" »on III and MtsM of the Industrial Property Law
-...... - 'k ----- f / Wflír, 26®2 / »W, i 1.7 ? §® / l999, 01/26/2004, 06/16/2005, articles 1, íyhSfccjjn Vinciso a), 4th and 12th fractions I and I
4JUICII SUovilUC Cl piCdClllC IIIUIU IU tlOWBv®l |; 1 | HlU <MlieiUU CU | U UISBUCSIU Wjr ^ U® ailICl (Official Gazette of the Federation) <* 7/06/1991, fctaanaea on 0 ^ / 0 $ / tS94
01/25/2006, 05/06/2009, 06/01/2010, 18/0 & a®108 / 06 «Wl (L 27 / frtffcSU of the Regulations of the Mexican Institute of
I (DOF
12/27/1999, amended 10/10/2002, 07/29/2004, L ....... .... „______
Deputy Generals, Coordinator, Divisional Directors,<sup>14</sup> Titula Departmentals and other subordinates of the Mexican Institute of the i 04/08/2004 and 13/09/2007).
«S'-df le» ,, Office 'ropedae ^ ndbstnal
ΟΤΙψ / 2002, 07/15/2004, 07/28/2004 and 09/07/2007),: uto1®lexican of Industrial Property (DOF YES® ítSLA Agreement that delegates powers to the National Directors, Divisional Deputy Directors, Coordinators (DOF 12/15/1999, amended on 02/04/2000, 07/29/2004,
This document is signed with an advanced electronic signature (FIEL), based on articles 7 BIS 2 of the Industrial Property Law; 3 of its Regulations, and 1 section III, 2 section V, 26 BIS and 26 TER of the Agreement establishing the guidelines for the use of the Payment and Electronic Services Portal (PASE) of the Mexican Institute of Industrial Property, in the procedures indicated.
THE DIVISIONAL DIRECTOR OF PATENTS
NAHANNY CANAL REYES
<img file="MX355451B_D0001.tif" />
Original string:
NAHANNY MARISOL CANAL REYES | 00001000000403252793 | Tax Administration Service | 1695 || MX / 2018/32411 | MX / a / 2016/016670 | PCT patent title | 1220 | RRGO | Page (s) 2 | 5o6X / ww7ePCaZMv3QyCJn
Digital stamp:
vsy6T0LsAMrtQmYDQWIRrwA9BLZfwlblQBMm8trMURxClqcrPrXVFcRgr1alAYnfQW2ECe4DmGqlnY6 / mUz37zOGZA
KKCRHau6AHKLr5HEtSJ / 9BJ + KfqAs / 11vEBXeUAeTI1bNASfEZDgO4OGNrwc1HZ mJrJEOTsdxCO + + + oHsJ8 SB7Hdl4 qGGPQVEBybdtLGqhugWMZYD / VeUu30x1oMJSnhRxATqMaLS1ug7HGCmoqc2Diu9Fb4MYohYThjaMANQBWUvBwCH31 mZ4zcH1ZK9tE47IKdzljiBeqnompVn + WSRtNdR / s1wDfLZrkLmEmfRKBVENP99qpo9ISfRSA == * Additional information on the back
Arenal No. 550. Floor 1, Pueblo Santa María Tepepan, Xochimilco, 16020. Mexico City.
(55) 53340700 www.gob.mx/impi
<img file="MX355451B_D0002.tif" />
MX / 2018/32411
C ntinuing the Symb I sd
Company
Company: CPC: B23K26 / 144; B23K26 / 342; B23K26 / 346; B23K26 / 702; B23K26 / 0853;
B28B1 / 001; B29C67 / 0077; B29C67 / 0085; B29C67 / 0088; B29C67 / 0092; B29C67 / 0096; B33Y10 / 00; B33Y30 / 00; B33Y40 / 00; B33Y50 / 02;
B33Y70 / 00; B33Y80 / 00; C04B35 / 522; C04B35 / 565; C04B35 / 5626; C22C38 / 00; C22C38 / 02; C22C38 / 44; C22C38 / 58; H05B6 / 68; H05B6 / 80; B22F2003 / 248; B22F2003 / 1054; B22F2003 / 1056; B22F2003 / 1057;
B22F2003 / 1058; B22F2003 / 1059; B22F2998 / 10; B23K2203 / 50;
B23K2203 / 52; B29K2105 / 251; C04B2235 / 6026; Y02P10 / 295
Country:
US
US
Wat
Continuation Priorities, \ Date »'· * March 2015 May 29, 2045.
' - > ·» ' ·.
'</,' ¿I C 2-1 '1 <sup>i</sup>'kf V-AV'k
Number:
62/136,378
62 / 168,699 '' Yes,% - 'i f
-...... > . ..........
# · „* \ '' Ry,, '. *»! , i, ·. 'i W', '
Ν · ' <sup>c</sup>>·- <sup>4</sup>-- '
Ά 1 Ϊ · {Vi V X '' * <▼ '' WtÚ • A
A '”', 4 $ F.
pf i
<img file="MX355451B_D0003.tif" />
CROSS REFERENCE
This application claims the priority of United States Provisional Patent Application No. Serial 62 / 015,230, filed June 20, 2014, United States Provisional Patent Application No. serial
62 / 028,760, filed July 24, 2014, United States Provisional Patent Application No. serial
62 / 063,867, filed October 14, 2014, United States Provisional Patent Application No. serial
62 / 136,378, filed March 20, 2015, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. serial
62 / 168,699, filed May 29, 2015, each of which is incorporated in its entirety herein by reference.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Three-dimensional (3D) printing (for example, additive manufacturing) is a process of making a three-dimensional object of any shape from a design. The design may be in the form of a data source such as an electronic data source, or it may be in the form of a hard copy. The
<img file="MX355451B_D0004.tif" />
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE <sub>jb</sub> .... .j hard copy can be a bidiffiétfljffiifflftri representation of 1 three-dimensional object. The Fountain of Hatog pugfo °<sub>Q</sub>r- nn.mnaaiA ...
Electronic 3D. 3D printing can be done by additive processes in which successive layers of material are placed one on top of the other. This process can be controlled (for example, by computer, manually, or both). A 3D printer can be an industrial robot.
3D printing can generate custom parts quickly and efficiently. A variety of materials can be used in a 3D printing process including polymeric material, metal, metal alloy, or ceramic. In an additive 3D printing process, a first layer of the material is formed and after that successive layers of material are added one by one, where each new layer of material is added on top of a previously formed layer of material, until materializes the entire designed three-dimensional structure (the 3D object).
3D models can be created with a computer-aided design package or by means of a 3D scanner. The manual modeling process of preparing geometric data for 3D computer graphics can be similar to fine arts, such as sculpting or animating. 3D scanning is the
<img file="MX355451B_D0005.tif" />
process of analyzing and collecting digi data
Cf & ritX- • .ώέ '/ ϊδΐ
OF THE PROPERTY - j '_c <sub>Ί</sub> . ,. „INDUSTRIAL form and appearance of a real object ·. Based on these data, three-dimensional models of the scanned object can be produced.
A large number of additive processes are currently available. These can differ in the way the layers are deposited to create the materialized structure.
These may vary in the material or materials used to materialize the designed structure. Some methods melt or soften the material to produce the layers. Examples of 3D printing methods include selective laser melting (SLM), selective laser sintering (SLS), direct laser metal sintering (DMLS), or fused deposition modeling (FDM). Other methods vulcanize liquid materials using different technologies such as stereolithography (SLA). In the laminated object manufacturing method (LOM), thin layers (made of paper, polymer, metal inter alia) are cut to the shape and bonded together.
Sometimes the 3D printed object can be bent, warped, curled, curled, or deformed in any other way during the 3D printing process. Auxiliary supports can be inserted to prevent such bending, warping, curling, crimping or other aids can be removed to produce a desired 3D product
Η i> - ·· / di __ _ _ q
INSTITUTO MEXICANO ~ de forma tion. of of the 3p object (for example, the 3D object).
SUMMARY
In one aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing (i) a first layer of the powder material in an enclosure at a first time (ti) and (ii) a second layer of the powder material in the enclosure. in a second instant (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of the material is provided adjacent the first layer of the powder material; (b) transforming at least a portion of the powder material in the second layer to form a transformed material, wherein the transformation is done with the help of an energy beam having a first energy per unit area (Si); and (c) extract the energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> until a third instant (t<sub>3</sub>), where the thermal energy is drawn along a direction other than from under the first layer of the powder material, where during the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, the energy is extracted at a second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) which is at least approximately 0.3 times if and where after
JY extract the energy, the material transformatíC ^ g ^ Exie ^ i ^ -f ^^^ g 'INDVSTCLAL to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object.
The method may further comprise repeating operations from (a) to (d). The energy beam can be an electromagnetic beam, a charged particle beam, or a non-charged particle beam. The energy beam can be an electromagnetic beam, an electron beam, or a plasma beam. The energy that is extracted can be thermal energy. S<sub>2</sub> it can be at least about 0.5 times Yes. S<sub>2</sub> it can be at least about 0.8 times Yes. In step (b), a remainder of the first layer can be a portion of the powder material that was not transformed to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object. The remainder can be heated to a maximum temperature that is below a material transformation temperature.
The remainder of the first layer can be a portion of the powder material that was not transformed to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object. The remainder can be supplied with an energy at a third energy per unit area S3 that is less than or equal to about 0.1 times
Yes. The method may further comprise cooling the remainder at substantially the same rate as the cooling rate of the transformed material. Operations (b) and
IM r 1 (
INSTITUTO MSXiCANO (c) can be done practically in a “? · · 'Í *>
, · '<x>
• 'L ·' X '\ ia —._ · Operation (b) can be carried out by means of pi ^ u- ^ Q dp ..im.-ha.7., Zio electromagnetic radiation. The electromagnetic radiation beam can be a laser light. Step (c) can be performed by using a beam of electromagnetic radiation. The electromagnetic radiation beam can comprise infrared light. In step (b) the layer portion of the material can be transformed at a first temperature (Ti) without transforming the rest. The remainder can be heated to a second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) which is less than approximately Ti. The remainder may lack a continuous layer spanning about 1 millimeter or more. The rest may lack a scaffold that encloses at least part of the three-dimensional object. The rest may lack a scaffold to enclose the three-dimensional object. The scaffold may comprise the transformed material.
Adjacent can be above. The material can comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. The material can comprise a powder material. Transforming may comprise fusing (eg, individual particles of the powder material).
Fusing may comprise melting, sintering or bonding (eg individual particles of the powder material). Join
IMPI <sub>z</sub> Mexican INSTITUTE may comprise chemically bonding. Joining quirRÍ ^^ ggfige to comprise union by covalent bond.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying the powder material from a powder dispensing member into a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the supplying powder material comprises supplying (i) a first layer of the powder material in an enclosure at a first instant (ti) and (ii) a second layer of the powder material in the enclosure at a second instant (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of the material is provided adjacent the first layer of the powder material; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object, wherein the energy beam has a first energy per unit area (Si); and (c) directing a cooling member to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> until a third instant (t<sub>3</sub>), where the thermal energy is drawn along a direction other than from under the first layer of the powder material, in
Plft '·; · where during the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> »^ C ^ iérgy se
INDUSTRIAL Sex draws a second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) which is at least about 0.3 times Si and where after extracting the energy, the transformed material solidifies to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing (i) a first layer of the material in an enclosure at a first time (ti) and (ii) a second layer of material in the enclosure at a second time. (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of material is provided adjacent to the first layer of material, wherein the first layer of powder material and the second layer of powder material form a powder bed, and; transforming at least a portion of the material into the second layer to form a transformed material; and (b) using a cooling member adjacent to the first layer or the second layer to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> up to a third instant (ίβ), where the thermal energy is extracted along an upward direction of the dust bed and where after removing the thermal energy, the transformed material solidifies to form at least a portion of the object three-dimensional.
iF 1 -y
During the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, 'pnlla'. ' ¿'
[NWÍfUAI. * Second layer can keep the average temperature less than or equal to about 250 ° C. During the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, the average temperature can be kept less than or equal to about 100 ° C.
The transformation can be done with the help of an energy beam that has a first energy per unit area (Si). In operation (c), in the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, thermal energy can be extracted at a second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) which can be at least about 0.3 times Si- The second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) can be at least about 0.5 times
Yes. Thermal energy can be extracted from one side of the first layer of the powder material or the second layer of the powder material. Thermal energy can be extracted from an upper surface of the powder bed. The transforming step may comprise fusing (eg, the individual particles of the powder material). Melting may comprise melting or sintering (eg, the individual particles). At the instant t<sub>3</sub>, a third layer of the powder material may be provided adjacent the second layer of the powder material. Transformation can
<img file="MX355451B_D0006.tif" />
MEXICAN PROPERTY INSTITUTE
INDUSTRIAL ___ understand directing a beam of energy towards at least a portion of the second layer.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that receives a first layer of the powder material at a first time (ti) and a second layer of the powder material at a second time (t2) that follows you to forming a powder bed, wherein the second layer of the powder material is adjacent to the first layer of the powder material and wherein the powder material comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; a cooling member adjacent to the first layer or the second layer, wherein the cooling member extracts thermal energy from the second layer; and a controller operatively coupled to the cooling member and programmed to (i) transform at least a portion of the powdered material in the second layer to form a transformed material and (ii) use the cooling member to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval from t2 to a third instant (t3), wherein the thermal energy is extracted along an upward direction of the dust bed and where after removing the thermal energy, the material
INSTITUTO MíXlC * wy, · 'DE LA MIC *'. Does the transformed L-rt.L '\ solidify to form at least uOTá<sup>ii</sup>^ é> rci'ÓTr of the three-dimensional object.
The cooling member can be disposed outside of the powder material (eg, not within the powder material). The system may further comprise a power source that provides a beam of power to at least a portion of the second layer. The controller can be operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to direct the power beam toward at least the portion of the second layer. The controller can be programmed to (1) transform at least a portion of the powder material in the second layer to form a transformed material by using an energy beam having a first energy per unit area (Si) and (2) use the cooling member to extract the heat energy during the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at t3 at a second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) which can be at least approximately 0.3 times Yes.
The second energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) can be at least about 0.5 times Yes. The controller can be programmed to use the cooling member to extract thermal energy from one side of the first layer of material or the second layer of material, where the side may be different from the exposed surface of the second layer or
IMPIfg »!
Κ / ΰτΐΎΑΓΓ / Λ iirv / * · i ·: ''. . ♦ · ·· ··.
IKSTÍTUTO mex: c \ ko. ,<sub>r</sub>,
OF THE PRCFri-OAD V. /.
it may be opposite the exposed surface of the '^ "' ^ egíTháa 'layer. The controller can be programmed for 5 us to r-6Ϊ1ηι emb r or 'cooling to extract thermal energy from an upper surface of the powder bed.
The controller can be programmed to control the average temperature of the second layer of the powder material. During the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, the controller can be programmed to keep the average temperature less than or equal to approximately 250 ° C at a point in the second layer. During the time interval of t<sub>2</sub> at<sub>3</sub>, the controller can be programmed to keep the average temperature less than or equal to approximately 100 ° C. The cooling member can move. The controller can be programmed to move the cooling member. The cooling member can be separated from the powder bed by a separation. The separation will be a distance less than or equal to approximately 50 millimeters. The gap can be at an adjustable distance between the cooling member and the powder bed. The controller can be programmed to regulate the adjustable gap. The cooling member can comprise a material with a thermal conductivity of at least about 20 Watts per meter per degree Kelvin (W / mK). The cooling member
<img file="MX355451B_D0007.tif" />
OXJ IIIVIV · _ may further comprise a dusty or residual material cleaning member of a surfacef ip-j ed<sup>p1</sup> cooling foot. The system may further comprise a collecting member that collects a remainder of the powder material or debris from the cooling member or powder bed.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder dispensing member comprises supplying (i) a first layer of the powder material in a enclosure at a first instant (ti) and (ii) a second layer of the powder material in the enclosure at a second instant (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of the material is provided adjacent the first layer of the powder material; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object; and (c) directing a cooling member adjacent the first layer or the second layer to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> up to ϊ ftí
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V < <sup>:</sup> V: third instant (t<sub>3</sub>), where the thermal energy ^ Bi · ^ ·· along an upward direction -and where after removing the thermal energy, the transformed material solidifies to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing (i) a first layer of the material in an enclosure at a first time (ti) and (ii) a second layer of material in the enclosure at a second time. (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of material is provided adjacent to the first layer of material; (b) transforming at least a portion of the material in the second layer to form a transformed material; and (c) extracting the thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> until a third instant (t<sub>3</sub>), where during a time interval from ti to t<sub>2</sub>, the average temperature at any point in the second layer is kept within a maximum of about 250 degrees
Celsius and where extracting the energy results in hardening of the transformed material to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object.
A third layer of the material can be provided at time t<sub>3</sub>. The average temperature at any point in the
INSTITUTO M EXICANO V, <· '- second layer can be kept within about 100 degrees Celsius. The temperature pr.Qroe.diQ. at any point in the second layer can be kept within a maximum of approximately 10 degrees
Celsius. The method may further comprise fusing a portion of the first layer prior to providing the second layer. Fusing may comprise melting or sintering. The method may further comprise cooling the portion before step (b).
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying powdered material from a powder dispensing member into a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the supplying of powdered material comprises supplying (i) a first layer of the material in an enclosure in a first instant (ti) and (ii) a second layer of the material in the enclosure at a second instant (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of material is provided adjacent to the first layer of material; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to
<img file="MX355451B_D0008.tif" />
produce the three-dimensional object; and (c) cooling adjacent to the first layer or a_ the second layer to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> until a third instant (t<sub>2</sub>), where during a time interval from ti to<sub>2</sub>, the average temperature at any point in the second layer is kept within a maximum of about 250 degrees
Celsius and where extracting the energy results in hardening of the transformed material to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that receives a first layer of material at a first time (ti) and a second layer of material at a second time (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of the material is adjacent to the first layer of the powder material; a cooling member adjacent to the first layer or the second layer, wherein the cooling member extracts thermal energy from the second layer; and a controller operatively coupled to the cooling member and programmed to (i) transform at least a portion of the material in the second layer to form a transformed material and (ii) use the cooling member to extract thermal energy from the
Mexican INSTITUTE. f Γ DE LA ΓΧΟΡΙΕΟΑΟ '> L-.
second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> ha ^ SF '& ft fS'rc ^ f' instant (t<sub>3</sub>), where during an interval Lt ^ ínp <5 "'a<sup>,</sup>e ”'t'Tá t<sub>2</sub>, the average temperature at any point in the second layer is kept within a maximum of about 250 degrees Celsius and wherein after removing the thermal energy, the transformed material solidifies to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing (i) a first layer of the material in an enclosure at a first time (ti) and (ii) a second layer of material in the enclosure at a second time. (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of material is provided adjacent to the first layer of material; (b) transforming at least a portion of the material in the second layer to form a transformed material; and (c) extracting the thermal energy from the second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> until a third instant (t<sub>3</sub>), wherein the maximum temperature of the transformed material is at least about 400 ° C or more and wherein a remainder of the powdered material that was not transformed to subsequently form a hardened material that is at least a portion of the three-dimensional object, does not exceeds a temperature of approximately 300 ° C and where to extract the
INSTITUTE; -i £ ¡:! CANO J, CE ΙΛ PC'ÚI'ÍEOAQ <sup>v 1</sup> energy results in hardening of i<sup>Tjii:</sup>^ Teri ^ Transformed to form at least one porrri'ÓTt- ^ idei '--- ebj-eto · · three-dimensional.
Hardened material may lack auxiliary supports.
The remainder does not exceed a temperature of approximately 200 ° C. The remainder does not exceed a temperature of approximately 150 ° C. The method may further comprise repeating operations from (a) to (c). Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out at a pressure that can be approximately 10 "<sup>6</sup> Torr or more. The method may further comprise removing the hardened material from the remainder of the powder material that did not fuse to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise cooling the portion and the remainder of the powder material that did not fuse to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object. The portion and the rest can be cooled at practically the same speed. The second temperature can be at most about 350 ° C or less. The method may further comprise separating the remainder of the powder material that was not fused to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object, from at least the only portion of the three-dimensional object.
IMPI'5 .....
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ..... ,
The material may comprise pol-material, it may comprise single metal, alloy mgtft] -i <-a common, or an allotropic variety of single carbon. Transform may comprise merge. Fusing may comprise melting or sintering. The hardened material can comprise solidified material.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to (a) supply powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the material supply powder comprises supplying (i) a first layer of the material in an enclosure at a first time (tx) and (ii) a second layer of material in the enclosure at a second time (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of material is provided adjacent to the first layer of material; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object; and (c) directing a cooling member adjacent the first layer or the second layer to extract thermal energy from the second layer in a
Tf «- * ·>
• · - · - LV · '·' · '·' ··· 5
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V .'_'.....- -f <'<. ·
DE L / .J'EOFJKpAD * time interval of t<sub>2</sub> up to a third instaneé- '<sup>SV:</sup>f'fr<sub>3</sub>) yXsTi · where the maximum temperature of the tsenafiyi-TTct material is at minus about 4 00 ° C or more and where a remainder of the powdered material that was not transformed to subsequently form a hardened material that is al minus a portion of the three-dimensional object, does not exceed a temperature of about 300 ° C and where extracting the energy results in hardening of the transformed material to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure that receives a first layer of the material in a first instant (tx) and a second layer of the material in a second instant (t<sub>2</sub>) which follows you, wherein the second layer of the material is adjacent to the first layer of the powder material; a cooling member adjacent to the first layer or the second layer, wherein the cooling member extracts thermal energy from the second layer; and a controller operatively coupled to the cooling member and programmed to (i) transform at least a portion of the material in the second layer to form a transformed material and (ii) use the cooling member to extract thermal energy from the
<img file="MX355451B_D0009.tif" />
second layer in a time interval of t<sub>2</sub> up to a third time (t3), where the maximum temperature of the transformed material is at least about 400 ° C or more and where a remainder of the powdered material that was not transformed to subsequently form a hardened material that is at least a part of the three-dimensional object, does not exceed a temperature of approximately 300 ° C and where after extracting the thermal energy, the transformed material solidifies to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a layer of the material in an enclosure having the average temperature (T<sub>or</sub>); (b) transforming at least a portion of the material in the second layer to form a transformed material, wherein the portion reaches a maximum temperature (T<sub>2</sub>), which is greater than T<sub>or</sub>; and (c) extracting the thermal energy of the layer so that it reaches the average temperature Τχ in a period of time that is at most approximately 240 seconds, to form from the transformed material a hardened material that is at least a part of the three-dimensional object. , where Τχ is greater than or equal to To and less than T<sub>2</sub>, where Τχ is not greater than T<sub>or</sub> by more than about 0.8 times (T<sub>2</sub> - T<sub>or</sub>) .
> T
MEXICAN INSTITUTE \ '_ <sub>Ί</sub> ,,,,,,, of the raonsDAD t,
The method may further comprise repeating the iN © pi®®iaciOi ¥ é «·· from (a) to (c), wherein a layer of the powdered material is provided over a layer of the powdered material. provided above. A first layer provided with the powder material can be provided on a base. The time period can be a maximum of approximately
120 seconds. The time period can be a maximum of approximately 60 seconds. The time period can be a maximum of approximately 30 seconds. Ti can be greater than T<sub>or</sub> by no more than about 0.5 times (T<sub>2</sub> - T<sub>or</sub>) .
Ti can be greater than To by no more than about 0.3 times (T<sub>2</sub> - T<sub>or</sub>). Ti can be greater than T<sub>or</sub> by no more than about 0.1 times (T<sub>2</sub> - T<sub>or</sub>) .
Hardening may comprise solidifying. Transform may comprise merge. Fusing may comprise melting or sintering. The energy can comprise a beam of energy. The energy beam can comprise an electromagnetic beam, an electron beam, or a plasma beam. The electromagnetic beam can comprise a laser beam or a microwave beam.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supply a layer of the powder material having the average temperature (T<sub>or</sub>) from a dispensing member
IMPI O ΐΝίπτντο Mexican Dt THE PROPERTY powder to an operationally coupled powder bed<sup>1Nl</sup>to<sup>í</sup>l<sup>na</sup>ffiiemt powder dispenser; (b) direct a beam of<sup>1</sup> and<sup>,</sup>héTgiá '”ae<sup>r</sup>A * source of energy to the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which subsequently hardens to produce the three-dimensional object, where the portion reaches a maximum temperature (T<sub>2</sub>), which is greater than T<sub>or</sub>; and (c) directing a cooling member adjacent the layer to extract thermal energy from the layer to reach the average temperature Ti in a period of time that is at most about 240 seconds, to form from the transformed material a material. hardened that is at least a part of the three-dimensional object, where Ti is greater than or equal to To and less than T<sub>2</sub>, where Ti is greater than To by no more than about 0.8 times (T<sub>2</sub> - To).
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure that receives a layer of the material that has an average base temperature (T<sub>or</sub>) ;
a cooling member adjacent to the layer, wherein the cooling member extracts thermal energy from the layer;
and a controller operatively coupled to the cooling member and programmed to (i) transform at least a portion of the material in the layer to form a material
pl "\ -tí Λ
I heard.'. · ·,. ·. rA ¡EDAO VV »i.
INSTITUTE V3 lE la pr <
transformed, where the transformed material wai'GÓnzff ^ tíííe '· maximum temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) and (ii) use. — member- · · 'decooling to extract the thermal energy so that after 240 seconds or less, the transformed material forms the hardened material which is at least a part of the three-dimensional object, where T<sub>x</sub> is greater than or equal to T<sub>or</sub> and less than T<sub>2</sub>, where Ti is greater than T<sub>or</sub> in no more than about 0.8 times (T<sub>2</sub> - T<sub>or</sub>) .
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. ; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object; and (c) directing a cooling member to extract energy from the powder bed, wherein the cooling member facilitates the removal of at least 30 percent of the
ΙΜΡΪ Γ> 5, Mexican institute and .-; ....._, ¡Ζί, of the rr.:.:-íf.dad energy in the upward direction of an exposed ± ¿rre · of the dust bed. —In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a bed of the material in an enclosure; (b) directing a beam of energy toward the material along a path to transform at least a portion of the material to form a transformed material, which transformed material hardens to form a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object; and (c) placing a heat sink adjacent to an exposed surface of the material bed to extract thermal energy from the material bed, wherein during removal of thermal energy from the material bed, the heat sink is separated from the surface exposed by a gap and wherein the exposed surface of the material bed is an upper surface of the powder bed.
The gap shall be a distance between the heat sink and the top surface that is less than or equal to approximately 50 millimeters. The trajectory can be generated according to a model of the three-dimensional object. The transformation may comprise fusing individual particles of the powder material. Fusing may comprise sintering, melting or bonding the individual particles.
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
UIUlUMCAÍLft.'ÍU Ví, ^ “ki. TO*
OF THE PROPERTY
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object, comprises a controller that I know<sup>L</sup>program 'to: (a) deliver a layer of the material from a material dispensing member to a material bed operatively coupled to the material dispensing member; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source into the bed of the material to transform at least a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object; and (c) directing a cooling member to extract energy from the material bed, wherein the cooling member is disposed adjacent to an exposed surface of the material bed, wherein during extraction of thermal energy from the material bed, the heat sink is separated from the exposed surface by a gap and wherein the exposed surface of the material bed is an upper surface of the powder bed.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure that houses a bed of the material; an energy source that provides an energy beam to the material in the material bed; a heat sink that extracts the thermal energy from the powder bed, where during the extraction of the thermal energy from the bed
7 'ΙΓ i; i
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V DI LA ΓΚΌΙ'ιΕ. '. ΆΟ V ···· from the material, the · heat sink is separated from the<sup>1</sup> exposed surface of the bed of the material peer-errrer ^ epattatrión '· *' and wherein the exposed surface of the bed of powder is an upper surface of the bed of powder; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and heat sink and is programmed to (i) direct the energy beam toward the material along a path to transform at least a portion of the material to form a material. turned, which transformed material hardens to form a hardened material as at least a part of the three-dimensional object and (ii) places the heat sink adjacent to the exposed surface of the powder bed to extract thermal energy from the powder bed.
The energy beam may comprise an electromagnetic beam, a charged particle beam, or a non-charged particle beam. The energy beam may comprise a laser beam.
The heat sink can be arranged within an energy beam path extending from the energy source to the powder material. The heat sink may comprise at least one aperture and during use the energy beam may be directed from the energy source towards the powder material through at least the single aperture. The heat sink can move. The, -b.tr. · - ·. * »>. '· *
I Λ ', kk Λ ik
INSTiiTUTO MEXICANO i - ·· .- - ·· controller can be programmed to move e Es> 'heat. The enclosure can be a vacuum enclosure chamber has a pressure of at least about 10 "<sup>6</sup> Torr. The heat sink can be thermally coupled to the powder material through separation. The separation may comprise a gas. The gap shall be a distance between the heat sink and the exposed surface that is less than or equal to approximately 50 millimeters. The gap will be an adjustable distance between the heat sink and the exposed surface. The controller can be programmed to regulate the distance. The controller can be programmed to regulate the distance by using an energy per unit area that is sufficient to transform at least the only portion of the material. The controller can be programmed to regulate at least one of the distance and the power source to provide an energy per unit area that is sufficient to form the three-dimensional object with a deviation from a model of the three-dimensional object that is less than or equal to approximately the sum of 25 microns and one thousandth of the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object. The heat sink can facilitate the transfer of thermal energy from the powder material by means of convection heat transfer. Heatsink
If You ZíDT-'sr,: ·. ' lvl r hee *. · >> · ;.<sub>:</sub> The heat may comprise a material with a thermal rating of at least about 20 watts per meter Q. torque degree Kelvin (W / mK). The heat sink may further comprise a cleaning member that removes dust or debris from a surface of the heat sink. The cleaning member may comprise a rotating brush. The cleaning mechanism may comprise a rotating brush that rotates when the heat sink is moved. The heat sink may comprise at least one surface that can be coated with a non-stick coating that decreases or prevents the absorption of dust or debris on at least the only surface. The system may further comprise a collecting member that collects a remainder of the powder material or debris from the heat sink or powder bed. The mechanism for collecting at least one of the remaining dust and debris may comprise a venturi-type sweep nozzle. The venturi sweep nozzle can be aligned with the power source such that an energy beam from the power source passes through an opening in the venturi sweep nozzle. The mechanism for collecting at least one of the remaining dust and debris may comprise one or more vacuum suction ports. The mechanism for collecting at least one of the 'i?
<Zi> A
M oi ii 11 Ivx i · - A \ γΎ. -X.
remaining dust and debris can flatteniamry · '<sup>1</sup>’^ ^ '
NYÁaTiW · · * »heat. The collecting member may comprise one or more negative pressure sources. The collector member can be operatively coupled to the heat sink. The system may further comprise a source of the material that supplies the material to the enclosure. The heat sink can facilitate energy extraction without substantially changing the position of at least part of the three-dimensional object. The heat sink can be close to at least the layer. The heat sink can be located between the power source and the layer.
The heat sink can be moved to a position that can be between or from the power source and the base. The heat sink can comprise at least one opening through which energy from the power source can be directed towards the layer portion. The system may further comprise an additional source of energy that provides energy to the remainder of the layer that was not transformed to subsequently form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The energy source can supply energy at one energy per unit area SI and the additional energy source can supply energy at a second energy per unit area S2, where S2 may be less than SI. S2 can be less than or equal to approximately
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V -tiA OE LA PSOPIEDAO 'i)
0.5 times YES. S2 can be less than or equal to approx'iittadaifteTrCe<sup>4</sup>*
0.2 times YES. S2 can be less than or equal to apr oximá'dáménC ^ 0.1 times IF. The system may further comprise a chamber containing the base. The chamber can be a vacuum chamber. The chamber may be at a pressure that is greater than about IO<sup>-6</sup> Torr. The chamber can provide an inert gaseous atmosphere. The separation may comprise a gas. The gap will be an adjustable distance between the layer and the heat sink. The heat sink can be integrated with a leveling mechanism that provides and / or moves the material adjacent to the base or a previously deposited layer of the material. The heat sink can be integrated with a removal mechanism that recycles and / or removes material adjacent to the base or a previously deposited layer of the powder material. The heat sink can facilitate the transfer of energy from the layer by means of convection heat transfer.
Transform may comprise merge. Fusing can comprise melting, sintering or joining. Bonding may comprise chemically bonding. Chemically bonding may comprise covalent bonding. The power source provides energy using an electromagnetic beam, laser beam, electron beam, plasma beam, or microwave beam.
IMPI 337
INSTITUTE MiXíGAÍ r 74
OF THE PRO'STiJAD>
iN D US'fíUAL
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to ':
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the material dispensing member; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that is suspended in the powder bed ; and (c) directing a leveling member to level an exposed surface of the material bed so that the three-dimensional object suspended in the material bed travels approximately 300 microns or less.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a bed of material comprises (a) dispensing a material into an enclosure to provide the bed of material; (b) generating the three-dimensional object from a portion of the material, wherein after generation, the three-dimensional object is suspended in the bed of the material; and (c) using a leveling member to level an exposed surface of the material bed so that the three-dimensional object suspended in the bed
IMPI®.
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Y DE LA PROPIEDAD the material travels approximately 300 m ^ & fóWetrírs- ^ or less.
Generating may comprise generating by addition. The bed of the material may lack a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. In step (c), the three-dimensional object can travel about 20 microns or less. The material can comprise a powder material. The material can comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. The powdered material may be devoid of at least two metals that are present in a proportion that forms a eutectic alloy. The powder material can comprise at most one metal which can be practically of a single simple metal composition. The powdered material may comprise a metal alloy which may be of a single metal alloy composition.
The three-dimensional object can be flat. The three-dimensional object can be a wire. The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary support elements. The three-dimensional object may comprise auxiliary support elements that are suspended in the powder bed.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a bed of material comprises:
-AÍ- I. ·, .R MEXICAN INSTITUTE V>
OF THE PROPERTY V _
INDUSTRIAL '' -¡-.¿-ί— an enclosure that houses the dust bed; an energy source that provides an energy beam to the material in the material bed; a leveling member that levels an exposed surface of the material bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and leveling member and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object, (ii) generate the three-dimensional object from a portion of the material in accordance with the instructions, where after generation, the three-dimensional object is suspended in the material bed and (iii) directing the leveling member to level the exposed surface of the material bed so that the three-dimensional object suspended in the material bed is displaced approximately 300 microns or less.
After the generation of the three-dimensional object, the material bed may lack a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. The material can comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. The material can comprise a powder material. The system may further comprise a powder dispenser that provides the powder material in the enclosure. The leveling mechanism can
<img file="MX355451B_D0010.tif" />
Mexican institute M attached to the powder dispenser. The dispená'á'd ^^^^ can be arranged adjacent to the powder bed. The trigger.
The powder dispenser may comprise an outlet opening which may be located at a different location than a lower portion of the powder dispenser that faces the powder bed.
The outlet opening can be located on one side of the powder dispenser. The side may be a portion of the powder dispenser that does not face the powder bed nor does it face a direction opposite the powder bed. The outlet opening may comprise a mesh. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispenser and is programmed to control an amount of the material that can be dispensed by the powder dispenser in the enclosure. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispenser and is programmed to control a position of the powder dispenser. The powder dispenser can move. The system may further comprise one or more mechanical members operatively coupled to the powder dispenser, wherein the single or more mechanical members subject the powder dispenser to vibration. The controller can be operatively coupled to the one or more mechanical members.
The controller can be programmed to control the single or more mechanical members to regulate the amount of material • INSTITUTO MEXICANO /...- *
Dh U PROPERTY \. '~<sub>Y</sub> powder that is dispensed by the dispensed ^ ,. of jS'Sfvío 'θγΓ'θΓ ”enclosure. The controller can be programmed jJSTS.coríErbTar 'a position of the leveling member, where the leveling member can move. The controller can be programmed to control a force or pressure exerted by the leveling member on the powder material. The system may further comprise a removal unit that removes excess material from the material bed. The removal unit may comprise a source of vacuum, magnetic force, electrical force, or electrostatic force. The removal unit may comprise a reservoir to accommodate excess powder material. The removal unit may comprise one or more sources of negative pressure in communication (e.g. continuous communication) with the powder bed, which one or more sources of negative pressure are used to remove excess powder material from the powder bed. . The controller can be programmed to direct the removal of excess powder material through the use of the removal unit. The leveling member may comprise a blade. The system may further comprise a cooling member. The cooling member can be close to the layer. The cooling member can be located between the power source and the layer. The object
ΙΜΡΙ &> *
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Jl
BS THREE-DIMENSIONAL PROPERTY may lack supports auíT ¥¥ ^ test' — The cooling member may move ha or 'ΐΤ' ^ ΰ'Ρ! to<sup>1</sup>year position<sup>1 </sup>from the same that can be between the power source and the powder material. The cooling member can facilitate the cooling of the fused portion of the layer and / or facilitate the cooling of the remainder of the layer that was not transformed to subsequently form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The cooling member can facilitate cooling of the portion and the remainder at practically the same rate. The cooling member can be separated from the layer and / or the base by a separation. The separation may comprise a gas. The gap has a cross section that can be a maximum of about 1 millimeter or less. The gap can be adjusted. The controller can be operatively coupled to the cooling member and can adjust the separation distance from the material bed. The cooling member can be adapted to be located between the base and the power source. The cooling member can control an energy that can be applied to the portion of the layer by the energy source. The controller can be operatively coupled to the cooling member and regulates the tracking of the cooling member.
IΛΊ Ρ Ί <Ν? Π7ν ”.Ό MSXiCANO \
Ε £ ÚA rrZ'HEDAD * _ cooling. The cooling member can cofft ^ f ^ Wde'ñ '-' at least an opening through which ptrSCt?<sup>i</sup>XttTTSfi'fsé 'the energy from the power source towards the layer portion. The cooling member can be substantially transparent. The cooling member can comprise one or more heat sinks. The energy source can direct energy to the layer portion by radiation heat transfer. The power source can be a laser. The system may further comprise an additional source of energy that provides energy to the remainder of the layer that did not fuse to subsequently form at least three-dimensional. The additional source of energy can be a laser or an infrared (IR) radiation source. The power source can provide power by means of an electromagnetic beam, laser beam, electron beam, plasma beam, or microwave beam. The system may further comprise a chamber comprising a base on top of which the bed of material can be arranged. The chamber can be a vacuum chamber. The chamber can provide an inert gaseous atmosphere. The system may further comprise an optical system that directs the energy from the energy source a part of the object towards a predetermined position on the layer. The system
XW ί.ί / '<.
> ·. Α hee. to \
B & rrrjTC i.i'XlCANO V r * - '· *. '· · / Optical may comprise a mirror (for e ^ empR ^ g ^ gej' · © 'te' ·, deflection or galvanometer mirror), a lenr.g<sub>Xll: i</sub>nna. „f.; inna. ·. a beam guide, a rotating polygon, or a prism. The controller can control the deflection and / or modulation of the energy beam (eg, an electromagnetic beam). The controller can control the optical path (eg, the vector) traveled by the energy beam (eg, by controlling the optical system). The controller can be programmed to control a path of the power source with the help of the optical system. The processor may be in communication with a central processing unit that supplies the instructions to the controller to generate the three-dimensional object. Communication can be network communication. The central processing unit can be a remote computer. The remote computer system may provide the instructions regarding a three-dimensional model to the controller and wherein the controller directs the power source to supply the power based on the instructions regarding the three-dimensional model. Design instructions can be provided by using a file having a Standard Tessellation Language file format. The controller can be programmed to optimize at least the
[ΜΡϊ
INSTiTUTC MEXICANO., ·;
amount, intensity or duration of energy suf ^^^ ®ta »edk ---<sup>:</sup>'p¿ ^' · '' the energy source. The controller can ... pEQ ^ branch - to optimize a path or path of the energy supplied from the energy source to at least the only portion of the layer. The controller can be programmed to optimize the extraction of energy from at least the single portion of the layer. The controller can be programmed to control a base temperature profile that can be separated from a layer temperature profile. The controller can be programmed to regulate the transformation of the portion of the layer without transforming the rest of the layer.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of
<img file="MX355451B_D0011.tif" />
Auxiliary support member indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member and wherein a given layer of the layered structure is devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object, comprises a controller that is programmed to: (a) deliver a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, in wherein the powder material comprises single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of approximately one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) or more and (iii) lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element
<img file="MX355451B_D0012.tif" />
vji. jj, JL ν; _ ..x \.
indicative of the presence or removal of the supporting eremenituos and where a given layer of the "ga- ~ en-layers" lacks at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object, comprises: an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or one. single carbon allotropic variety; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of approximately one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) or more and (iii) lacks an auxiliary support member or marking of the auxiliary support member indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member and wherein a given layer of the layered structure is devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
VII 'i?
INSTITUTO MEXICANO '557,1 ^ · ΐ is THE PROPERTY f »INCUITILAL nf *** M In another aspect, a three-dimensional object -formed by a t ·' * * three-dimensional printing process comprises a layered structure comprising successive accumulations of solidified the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of layer removal during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of approximately one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) or more and (iii) lacks an auxiliary support member or marking of the auxiliary support member indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member and wherein a given layer of the layered structure is devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
The surface area can be approximately two square centimeters (cm<sup>2</sup>) or more.
The auxiliary support element may comprise a linear structure. The auxiliary support element may comprise a non-linear structure. The auxiliary support element may comprise a boss, column, fin, pin, paddle or scaffold. The auxiliary support element
<img file="MX355451B_D0013.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0014.tif" />
ΤΓ hee I
INSTITUTO MEXICANO can comprise a powder scaffold sintered powder can be formed from the material, .La. The bit of the auxiliary support element may comprise a mark of a mold embedded in the three-dimensional object. The marking of the auxiliary support element may comprise a geometric deformation of one or more of the solidified successive accumulations of the melt, the deformation of which may be complementary to the auxiliary support element.
A given layer of the layered structure may comprise a plurality of solidified accumulations of the melt of the material.
The three-dimensional object may be devoid of surface elements indicative of the use of a trimming process during or after the formation of the three-dimensional object.
The trimming process can be an operation performed after the completion of the 3D printing process. The trimming process can be a different operation from the 3D printing process. Trimming may comprise cutting (for example, by using a jigsaw). The cutout may comprise grinding or polishing. Polishing may comprise solid polishing, gas polishing or liquid polishing. Solid polishing may comprise sand polishing. Gas polishing may comprise air polishing.
IMPI msrrruro Mexican
INSTITUTE
Liquid polishing may comprise polishing<sup>DS</sup>'^®<sub>s</sub><sup>I</sup>r ^ u polishing can comprise mechanical polishing, ta pgfrnrfnra an ...
Layers can be a substantially repeating layered structure. Each layer of the layered structure has an average layer thickness greater than or equal to about microns (pm). Each layer of the layered structure has an average layer thickness less than or equal to about 1,000 microns (pm). The layered structure may comprise individual layers of successive solidified accumulations of the melt. A given of the successive solidified accumulations of the melt may comprise a substantially repetitive material variation selected from the group consisting of the variation of grain orientation, variation of the density of the material, variation of the degree of segregation of compounds towards the limits of grains, variation of the degree of segregation of elements towards the limits of the grains, variation of the phase of the material, variation of the metallurgical phase, variation of the porosity of the material, variation of the phase of the crystals and variation of the crystalline structure. A given of the successive solidified accumulations of the melt may comprise a crystal. The crystal can comprise an HO? A ll, v. 7l .i J.<sup>!</sup>
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \> CE LA PROPIEDAD í only crystal. The layered structure can be bought<sup>1</sup> uñtr «-— * more indicative elements of the solidilitTaTd'ón - · - <sup>;</sup>Melt buildup during the 3D printing process. The layered structure may comprise an element indicative of the use of the three-dimensional printing process. The three-dimensional printing process can comprise selective laser melting (SLM), selective laser sintering (SLS), direct laser metal sintering (DMLS), or fused deposition modeling (FDM). The three-dimensional printing process may comprise selective laser melting. The fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object can be at least about
120 micrometers.
The allotropic variety of single carbon can be selected from the group consisting of amorphous carbon, graphite, graphene, fullerene, and diamond. Fullerene can be selected from the group consisting of spherical, elliptical, linear, and tubular.
Fullerene can be selected from the group consisting of buckyespheres and carbon nanotubes. The material can comprise a reinforcing fiber. The reinforcing fiber can comprise carbon fiber, Kevlar®, Twaron®, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, or fiberglass.
ri
INSTITUTO MÜÜCANO Vi '-.- -.'
In another aspect, an apparatus for generas® <sup>THE</sup>n ^ i ^^ £ olSt | 3 ^ i. '><sup>x</sup> three-dimensional, it comprises: an enclosure that when listening to a.1-e.cho .... of.
powder comprising the powder material comprising a single metal, metal alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks an auxiliary element of support or marking of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, (ii) lacks surface elements indicative of layer removal during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (iii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and wherein each layer of the layered structure of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single simple metal composition.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the
ΙΜΡϊ 55¾¾
INSTITUTO MEXICANO _ - y¡, powdered material comprises simple metal, alet§ϊΧλ. ^ Κ · '· ceramic or an allotropic variety of carbon =; i mp 1 ..ρ,;. Y. (, 0,), direct an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material that subsequently hardens to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) lacks of an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, (ii) lacks surface elements indicative of layer removal during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (iii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and wherein each layer of the layered structure of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single simple metal composition.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises: a layered structure comprising solidified successive accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, where the three-dimensional object (i) lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the
-Κ '45t
IMPIOúú
WSTinJTO. '/ LXíCAMO \ ·., ,, C £ LA PXOr¡ £ í5AI> \ ~' auxiliary support element indicative of the ^ S ^^ ncia ^ -'- or motion of the auxiliary support element? R *<sup>ra</sup>H ^ T<sup>ar</sup>'<sup>ii</sup>da-re'ce ·· * de '' <sup>:</sup> surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (iii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and wherein each layer of the layered structure of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single simple metal composition.
The surface area can be at least about two square centimeters (cm<sup>2</sup>). Each layer of the three-dimensional object may comprise at most a single metal alloy composition with a deviation of about 2% or less from a single metal alloy composition. Each layer of the three-dimensional object may comprise at most substantially a single metal alloy composition. It may substantially comprise a composition deviation of about 2% or less from a single metal alloy composition.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or a variety
ΪΜΡΙ simple carbon allotropic; and a font ^ '^^^ g ^^;
INDUSTRIAL provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm) and (m) lacks an auxiliary supporting element or marking of the auxiliary supporting element indicative of the presence or removal of the element auxiliary support and wherein a given layer of the layered structure has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. ; and (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source toward the
<img file="MX355451B_D0015.tif" />
ΙΜΡΠ
Ό MEXICAN.
<img file="MX355451B_D0016.tif" />
powder bed to transform at least powder material into a transformed material that hardens ... ,,, subsequently to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the process three-dimensional printing, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks an auxiliary support member or marking of the auxiliary support member indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member and wherein a given layer of the layered structure has a radius of curvature of at least approximately 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises: a layered structure comprising solidified successive accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one ιμρι and
INSTITUTE MSXICANG Λ ·. ./ »
DB LA ΓΟΑΟ square centimeter (cm) and (iii) lacks ufí '^^ íffeméTíttr *' auxiliary support or mark of the element a uxllΪ3í '-' d'S '*' 's'op6r £ g<sup>J</sup> indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member, wherein a given layer of the layered structure has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
The given layer can be a layer generated first. The radius of curvature can be at least about 100 centimeters (cm) as measured by light microscopy. A plurality of layers of the layered structure have radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters (cm) as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) lacks one or more of the elements
IMPIf;
Mexican oertmo. .
ü £ v. Í'iO ^ AGE Ϊ -. τ. ÍHEUSTSIAI “- · UiTl · auxiliary support elements or the marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the pressure * or '* ~ removal of the auxiliary support element.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to: (a) deliver a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises ceramic or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. surface indications of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises a layered structure comprising solidified successive accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety,
TO I X____ 1. d- »-'Z 'institute, / - ·. > ΒΪ LA? ”- A¡x '/ uí 11 -.'- l. 'hde ~~ eT three-dimensional object (i) lacks e 1 eme nfdS' 3 li'p'e rTTci a les indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises two auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of auxiliary support elements; where the layered structure has a stratification plane, where the two auxiliary support elements or marks of
ΙΜΡϊ,.,
ΙΝΓΓιΤυΤΟ MEXICAN PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL _ support are separated by at least approximately 40.5 millimeters or more and where the acute angle 'Tint the straight line connecting the two auxiliary support elements or support marks and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is approximately 45 degrees to about 90 degrees.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple; and (b) directing a beam of energy from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises two auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of auxiliary support elements, where the
M.PI O?
layered structure has a plane of stress where the two auxiliary support elements or support marks are separated by at least about 40.5 millimeters or more; and wherein the acute angle between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary support elements or support marks and the direction from normal to the layering plane is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises: a layered structure comprising solidified successive accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises two auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of auxiliary support elements, where the layered structure has a layering plane, where the two auxiliary support elements or support marks are separated by at least approximately 40.5 millimeters or more and where the
<img file="MX355451B_D0017.tif" />
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO straight line that supports or supports Hp poporte and the layer of stratification is of acute angle between the auxiliary elements of direction of the normal approximately 45 degrees to approximately 90 degrees. Any two of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary supports can be separated by at least about 45 millimeters or more.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the element auxiliary support, where the layered structure has a layering plane, where X is a point that lies on the surface of the three-dimensional object and Y is the element
IMPIOS auxiliary support or element mark /;
INDUSTRIAL closest to X, where Y is separated from X by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more; where the sphere of radius XY lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element and where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is approximately 45 degrees to approximately 90 degrees .
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple; and (b) directing a beam of energy from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary element of
<img file="MX355451B_D0018.tif" />
support indicative of the presence or removal of auxiliary support, where the layered structure has a stratification plane, where X is a point lying on the surface of the three-dimensional object and Y is the auxiliary support member or mark of the auxiliary support member closest to X, where Y is separated from X by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more; where the sphere of radius XY lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to the plane layering is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process, comprises a layered structure comprising successive solidified accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative iMPir>
MEXICAN WSEITVTO, · 'xiJ? A.iaiRop®a¿. help you,<sub>Ί</sub> . . ,,. . ireTITV UMtAiLW ΐζ '' from the presence or removal of the auxiliary element ^ j ^ op ^ »where the layered structure has a layering plane, where X is a point lying on the surface of the three-dimensional object and Y is the element auxiliary support or mark of auxiliary support element closest to X, where Y is separated from X by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more; where the sphere of radius XY lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element, where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is approximately 45 degrees to approximately 90 degrees and wherein the three-dimensional object comprises single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon. X can be separated from Y by at least about 10 millimeters or more.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the object
<img file="MX355451B_D0019.tif" />
Three-dimensional lacks surface elements from the removal of layers during or after d ^., 1 three-dimensional printing process, where N is a layering plane of the structure in layers, where X and Y are points lying on the surface of the three-dimensional object, where X is separated from Y by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more, where the sphere of radius XY with center in X lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to N is from about 45 degrees to about degrees.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and directing an energy beam from a power source toward the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material that
<img file="MX355451B_D0020.tif" />
It is subsequently hardened to three-dimensional that lacks e
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
<img file="MX355451B_D0021.tif" />
indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, where N is a layering plane of the layered structure, where X and Y are points that lie on the surface of the three-dimensional object, where X is separated from Y by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more, where the sphere of radius XY with center in X lacks an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to N is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises a layered structure comprising successive solidified accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, in where the three-dimensional object lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, where N is a stratification plane of
INSTITUTE t'.S'I-CANO 5 the layered structure, where X and Y are puruÉosv ^ ue-, lying on the surface of the three-dimensional object »& Í7- ~ ™ e® ^ .dondo. , .X, is separated from Y by at least approximately 10.5 millimeters or more, where the sphere of radius XY with center at X lacks an auxiliary supporting element or marking of the auxiliary supporting element indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary element of support and where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to N is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees. In some cases, B is separated from C by at least about millimeters or more.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple; and (b) directing a beam of energy from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. surface indications of layer removal during ^^ sl ^ p ^^^ fc ^ l · '' three-dimensional printing process, (ί ϊ) típrip. .. a..
surface of the exposed layer with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where neither of the two metals present within the layer are capable of to form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary supporting elements or
<img file="MX355451B_D0022.tif" />
and in marks of the auxiliary elements of support due to the presence or removal of the auxiliary element
<img file="MX355451B_D0023.tif" />
where neither of the two metals present within the layer are capable of forming a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process, comprises a layered structure comprising successive solidified accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where neither of the two metals present within the layer are capable of to form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object, comprises a controller that is programmed to: (a) deliver a layer of the powdered material from a
PI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \> Z ------ '· powder dispensing member to a bed of po ^ srophy cdpTad'o: - operatively to the dispensing member of ρ u 1 vo,.
powdered material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and (b) directing a beam of energy from an energy source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that (i) is element-free. surface indications of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and wherein each layer of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single metal simple.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises: an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that
<img file="MX355451B_D0024.tif" />
, INSTITUTO MEXICANO -L - <sup>:</sup> provides a beam of energy to the erP material<sup>THE</sup>g ^^^ powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process , (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and wherein each layer of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single metal simple.
In another aspect, a three-dimensional object formed by a three-dimensional printing process comprises a layered structure comprising successive solidified accumulations of the melt of a material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon, in where the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one vi ir A
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '/'<sup>s</sup>'\ ceLAfAc.jiüAr »„, -b.
INMJSfKIAL square centimeter (cm) and (iii) lacks One or more of the
UMTIlMiMÍCTV * · * ~ ia, Í. ' k auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and wherein each layer of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single simple metal.
The layered structure can comprise substantially repeating layers. The layers can have a maximum average layer size of about 500 pm or less. The layered structure can be indicative of layered deposition. The layered structure can be indicative of the solidification of melt accumulations formed during a three-dimensional printing process. The structure indicative of a three-dimensional printing process may comprise a substantially repeating variation comprising: variation of the grain orientation, variation of the density of the material, variation of the degree of segregation of compounds towards the limits of the grains, variation of the degree of segregation of elements towards the limits of the grains, variation of the phase of the material, variation of the metallurgical phase, variation of the porosity of the material, variation of the phase of the crystals or variation of the crystalline structure. The layered structure
MEXICAN INSTITUTE. . ,,, CE LA PKO '/ ISOAD V -LZ * may comprise substantially repeatable layers<sup>N</sup>,<sup>DUS</sup>'© W · of the layers have an average -atipa size of at about 5 pm or more. Melt build-ups are indicative of an additive manufacturing process comprising selective laser melting (SLM), selective laser sintering (SLS), direct laser metal sintering (DMLS), or fused deposition modeling (FDM). Melt build-ups may be indicative of an additive manufacturing process that involves selective laser melting. The melt pools may comprise crystals. The melt pools may comprise single crystals.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to deliver a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and directing a beam of energy from a power source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened into a hardened material to
M ΡI,, -,,. ,. , INSTITUTO MEXICANO 1, produce the three-dimensional object that is suspended ^ j ^ i ^ bed '
X rz · '' i of powder, where at least one layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy and where the bed of powder lacks a supporting scaffold that practically enclose the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form a hardened material that is at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object is suspended in the bed of dust, wherein at least one layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy and wherein the powder bed lacks a supporting scaffold that substantially encloses the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a bed of powder comprises: (a) providing the bed of powder in an enclosure, wherein the
ΙΜΡΙ57>
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Vú—- ''
OF THE PROPERTY Osa · *!
powder bed comprises a powder material qiJ ^<sup>Ui</sup>T54tenfe--<sup>;</sup>-uh<sup>:</sup> simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic — gr - a '"VSTT'Í ^ dád-<sup>1</sup> single carbon allotropic; (b) transforming at least a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, which three-dimensional object is suspended in the powder bed, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy and where the powder bed lacks a supporting scaffold that virtually encloses the three-dimensional object.
The supporting scaffold can be a sintered structure. At least the single layer of the hardened material can have a radius of curvature of one meter or more. The hardened material layer may be devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy. The hardened material layer may comprise at most one metal which may be of a single, simple metal composition. The hardened material layer may comprise a metal alloy which may be of a single metal alloy composition. The hardened material layer can be of a single material composition. The fundamental length scale of the object
INSTITUTO MEXICANO tridimensional can be about 12 or more. The three-dimensional object may no longer be supported by auxiliary support elements in the powder bed. The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary support elements. The three-dimensional object can comprise one or more auxiliary support elements that are suspended in the powder bed. The transform operation can be performed according to a model of the three-dimensional object and wherein the three-dimensional object deviates from the model by at most about 50 microns. The transforming step may comprise fusing individual particles of the powder material. Fusing may comprise sintering or melting the individual particles. Curing may comprise solidifying the transformed material.
The powder material can comprise a simple metal or metallic alloy. The powdered material can be provided adjacent to a base that can be located within the enclosure.
In some embodiments, after the formation of at least the single layer of the cured material, the three-dimensional object is not in contact with the base.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a bed of powder comprises: an enclosure that houses the bed of powder, wherein the bed of
<img file="MX355451B_D0025.tif" />
Μ νλ
<img file="MX355451B_D0026.tif" />
INSTITU '
EC
<img file="MX355451B_D0027.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0028.tif" />
powder comprises a powdery material having a simple metal alloy, ceramic, or a vart ^ JSW '^^ iit'rópTcá' 'of simple carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions for transforming at least a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, whose three-dimensional object is suspended in the powder bed, where at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy and where after the formation of at least the single layer of the hardened material, the powder bed lacks a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object.
The powdered material can be arranged adjacent to a base that can be located within the enclosure. In some cases, after hardening the material transformed into the object
ΕΝΓΓΓΤνΤΟ MEXICANO '' ce la rcoxepAo <sup>1</sup> three-dimensional, the three-dimensional object is not in contact * with the base. The three-dimensional object can<sup>-t</sup>care'cé'if<sup>1</sup>'~' give “auxiliary support elements. The supporting scaffold can span at least about one millimeter. The powder bed may lack a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. At least the single layer of the hardened material may be devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy. The energy beam may comprise an electromagnetic energy beam, a charged particle beam, or a non-charged particle beam. The energy beam may comprise an electromagnetic energy beam. The system may further comprise a heat sink for extracting heat from the powder bed and wherein the heat sink can be disposed within the enclosure. In some cases, after the formation of at least the single layer of the hardened material, at least about 30 percent of the heat removal occurs from the upper surface of the powder bed through the use of the heat sink. In some cases, after the formation of at least the single layer of the cured material, at least about 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%. 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% of the heat extraction occurs ιμρϊγ> λ
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V ~>, '4 from the upper surface of the bed of<sup>:</sup> polWtJ ^ O ^ n '^ j / li' use of heat sink. The ma i- priaiq, tj, .. pi i ed °. - - be arranged adjacent to the base and where the heat sink is not in contact with a base that can be located within the enclosure. The heat sink can be disposed adjacent to an exposed surface of the powder bed. The heat sink can be arranged along an energy beam path extending from the energy source towards the powder bed. The heat sink can be separated from the powder bed by a gap.
At least the single portion of the three-dimensional object deviates from the model by a maximum of 25 microns and 1 / 1,000 of the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object. Hardening may comprise allowing the transformed material to solidify. The transforming step may comprise selectively transforming the portion of the powder material by directing a beam of laser light towards the portion of the powder material. The system may further comprise heating a portion of the remainder of the powder material that was not fused to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object by directing the energy toward the portion of the remainder. Energy can be directed through the use of a laser beam. The material in
RNSTITUTC The powder may comprise individual particles smaller than or equal to about 50 nanometers (nm). Transform can be done according to a predetermined pattern that corresponds to a model of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to deliver a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object lacking the auxiliary support elements, in where the three-dimensional object has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a
ΙΝίΠτυτ * '' ι '- i ν', ·.
FROM THE A." ,, „Single metal, metal alloy, ceramic. or ufí & '<sup>M</sup>^ & rie'da'd simple carbon allotropic; and a f uenbS ^ Tt ^ '^ TTSTgia' "which provides a beam of energy to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object lacks the auxiliary support elements, wherein the three-dimensional object has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object lacking auxiliary support elements comprises: (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, alloy metallic, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form the three-dimensional object lacking the auxiliary support elements, wherein the three-dimensional object has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
The auxiliary support may comprise a support scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. Scaffolding
IMPI • MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF THE PROPERTY 'J of support can comprise a structure without ^^ íFáteda ^^ ET three-dimensional object has a radius ..... dé ............ UtlTva'L'lffa<sup>1</sup> 'from.......
about a meter or more. The three-dimensional object can be devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy. The three-dimensional object can comprise a metal that can be at most a single simple metal composition. The three-dimensional object can comprise a metal alloy that can be of a single metal alloy composition. The three-dimensional object can be of a single material composition. The fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object can be at least about 120 microns. The transformation may comprise fusing individual particles of the powder material. Fusing may comprise sintering or melting the individual particles. Hardening may comprise solidifying the transformed material. Transforming may comprise directing a beam of energy towards the portion of the powder material along a path that can be generated according to a model of the three-dimensional object.
The powdered material may be provided adjacent to a base within the enclosure and wherein after the material transformed into the three-dimensional object has hardened, the three-dimensional object may not be in contact with the base.
IMPw.
„„. . . · «ESÍ» »
In another respect, a system for a three-dimensional general structure that lacks elements such as "4i5 € H?"<sup>and</sup>a ^^ t) p'drte comprises: an enclosure housing the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a path in accordance with instructions to transform a portion of the powder material into a transformed material that hardens to form the three-dimensional object that lacks the auxiliary support elements and wherein the three-dimensional object has a radius of curvature of at minus about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
The powdered material can be arranged adjacent to a base within the enclosure and where the three-dimensional object may not be in contact with the base. The auxiliary support may comprise a support scaffold that substantially encloses the three-dimensional object. The supporting scaffold can be a; γίΛ
I heard
<img file="MX355451B_D0029.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DS LA PROPERTY
<img file="MX355451B_D0030.tif" />
sintered structure. The three-dimensional object<sup>NDUS</sup>Item '<sup><</sup>"'Uñ' 'radius of curvature of approximately one ^ th" ** o ~ TñSs ^' ΊΏ. ' Three-dimensional object can be devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy. The path can be generated from a model of the three-dimensional object. The system may further comprise a heat sink for extracting heat from the powder bed and where the heat sink can be disposed within the enclosure. In some embodiments, after the transformed material hardens into the three-dimensional object, at least about 30 percent of the heat removal occurs from the upper surface of the powder bed through the use of the heat sink. The powdered material can be arranged adjacent to a base and where the heat sink is not in contact with the base. The heat sink can be disposed adjacent to an exposed surface of the powder bed. The heat sink can be arranged along an energy beam path extending from the energy source towards the powder bed. The heat sink can be separated from the powder bed by a gap.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises: (a) providing a bed of powder in an enclosure, wherein the bed of powder comprises an if 1 6- '' '' ..
Π
INSTITUTO MEXICANO ízí, · - * J, powdered material that has a metal simpia ^ DusT ^ e & ish ';.' 'metallic, ceramic or an allotropic variety —- of — ca ^ tecao. ·.
simple; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy. and where, with X and Y being points on a surface of the three-dimensional object, (i) the surface of the three-dimensional object along a sphere of radius XY lacks auxiliary support elements and (ii) an acute angle between a straight line XY and a direction normal to an average bedding plane (N) of al Minus the single layer of the hardened material is about degrees to 90 degrees when X and Y are separated by at least about 2 millimeters.
The acute angle between the XY straight line and the N normal direction of at least the single layer of the cured material can be from about 45 degrees to 90 degrees when X and Y are separated by at least about 10.5 millimeters. The acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction normal to
N of at least the single layer of the hardened material may be
Ρ 101 ^ 51
INSTITUTO MEXICANO CE LA PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL - «te-JS .-- from approximately 45 degrees to 90 degrees when X and Y are separated by at least approximately 40.5 millimeters. The powder bed may lack a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. The supporting scaffold may comprise a sintered structure. At least the single layer of the cured material can have a radius of curvature of at least about one meter. At least the single layer of the hardened material may be devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy. At least the single layer of the hardened material can comprise at most one metal which can be of a single simple metal composition. At least the single layer of the hardened material may comprise a metal alloy which may be of a single metal alloy composition. At least the single layer of the cured material can be of a single material composition. The method may further comprise repeating from (a) to (c). The fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object can be about 120 microns or more. The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary support elements. The three-dimensional object may comprise auxiliary support elements that are suspended in the powder bed.
The acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the
<img file="MX355451B_D0031.tif" />
<sup>:</sup>hi-! Í «55, normal to N can
INSTITUTE '<: · XICANO j' TT ·; '·;
. . , - OE THE PROPERTY 'be about 60 about 90 degrees (for example, cuwH ^ o ^ -éé -.'- separated by at least about 2 millimeters). The transformation may comprise fusing individual particles of the powder material. Fusing may comprise sintering or melting the individual particles. Hardening may comprise solidifying the transformed material.
Transforming the powder material may comprise directing a beam of energy towards the portion of the powder material along a path that can be generated in accordance with a model of the three-dimensional object. Transform can be performed according to a model of the three-dimensional object and wherein the three-dimensional object deviates from the model by approximately 50 microns or less. The powdered material can be arranged adjacent to a base that can be located within the enclosure and where after the formation of at least the single layer of a hardened material, the three-dimensional object may not be in contact with the base. The method may further comprise repeating operations from (a) to (c), wherein a subsequent layer of the powder material can be provided over a layer of the powder material provided above. The rest of the powdered material that was not transformed to form at least a part of the ir I
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
PE THE PROPERTY VV. ·"*' 1
INDUSTRIAL three-dimensional object, it may lack a continuous structure spanning approximately 0.5 millimeters or more. The method may further comprise separating at least the only portion of the three-dimensional object from the rest of the powder material that was not transformed to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object and the rest can be removed from a base on which the powdered material can be arranged within the enclosure. Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out at a pressure of at least 10 "<sup>6</sup> Torr.
Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out at a maximum pressure of 10<sup>_1</sup> Torr or more. The powdered material may be devoid of two or more metals in a proportion that can form a eutectic alloy. The remainder of the powdered material that did not form at least the only part of the three-dimensional object, may lack a continuous structure spanning about 1 millimeter or more. The rest of the powder material that does not form at least the only part of the three-dimensional object, may lack a scaffold that encloses the three-dimensional object. The solidus temperature of the material can be less than or equal to about 400 ° C. The liquidus temperature of the material can be greater than or equal to about 300 ° C. In some examples, in the
<img file="MX355451B_D0032.tif" />
operation (b) the powder material that can<sup>OF |</sup>ó ^ ErauSoniMa3fei ^^ excludes sintering it. -.....
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a path in accordance with the instructions. to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that is hardened to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy and where, X and Y are points on a surface of the three-dimensional object, (i) the surface of the object three-dimensional along a sphere of radius XY lacks auxiliary support elements and (ii) an acute angle between il \ i 15 Τ IL .. v. - ---, 5¾ © »3 * rruTO msxjcako · - ^ T> s> Jn £ 2 LA PRQHFDAD * a straight line XY and a direction normal to a plane '^ romecfio of stratification (N) of at least the single" cap * '3βΊ “hardened material is approximately 45 degrees to 90 degrees when
X and Y are separated by about 2 millimeters or more.
In some embodiments, after the formation of at least the single layer of a cured material, the three-dimensional object can be suspended in the powder bed. In some embodiments, the powder material can be arranged adjacent to a base that can be located within the enclosure.
In some embodiments, after the formation of at least the single layer of a hardened material, the three-dimensional object may not be in contact with the base. In some embodiments, after the formation of at least the single layer of the cured material, the powder bed may lack a supporting scaffold that substantially encloses the three-dimensional object. The supporting scaffold may comprise a sintered structure. At least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of approximately one meter or more. The energy beam can comprise an electromagnetic beam, a charged electron beam, or an uncharged electron beam. The system may further comprise a heat sink to extract the heat from the powder bed. The trajectory can géñ '^ tffe<sup>J</sup>tse''á '<sup>J </sup>starting from a model of the three-dimensional object
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises: (a) providing a bed of powder in an enclosure, wherein the bed of powder comprises a powder material having a ceramic or allotropic variety of single carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process. and (ii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support members or auxiliary support member markings indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support member.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a
INSTITUTO MEXICANO PE ΙΛ PROPERTY
VA controller that is operatively coupled to the Mde- 'energy and is programmed to (i) receive in «tracreTCTTeB ·' generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the energy beam along a predetermined path of according to the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, where the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein upon
<img file="MX355451B_D0033.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE <sub>η</sub> ,. DBIAFBO .- 'ISQAÍ »minus the single layer of the hardened material has“ W ^ i ^ dio'-idé curvature of at least approximately 50 ceirb ^ nrertrrcrS' ^ '^ eg'iSn · is measured by optical microscopy, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises two auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, where the layered structure has a layering plane, wherein the two auxiliary supports or the marks on the auxiliary supports are separated by at least about 40.5 millimeters or more; and wherein the acute angle between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary supports or the marks on the auxiliary supports and the direction from normal to the bedding plane is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure housing the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the material in
INSTITUTE Μ ί? >> ·. '. '' · <. -¿
DELAPX *.> \ '·' Powder in the powder bed; and a qi3 & controller<sup>or</sup>'S' €? ' It will operatively engage the energy source and will (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the energy beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises two auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, where the layered structure has a layering plane, where the two auxiliary support elements or the two auxiliary support marks are separated by at least approximately 40.5 millimeters or more and where the acute angle between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary support elements or supports marks
VIPlí 'Ύ<sup>1</sup>'\> Y.' '' 'auxiliaries and the address of the norm<sup>ST</sup>M ^ E »iÍ ^^^ '. SJ ^ i Stratification is about 45 degrees a.
approximately 90 degrees.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy. , wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises an auxiliary support element or a mark of the auxiliary support indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element, where the layered structure has a layering plane, where X is a point that lies on the surface of the three-dimensional object and Y is the mark of the
Mexican INSTITUTE 7 '?; '\' Í J 'auxiliary support closest to X, where YS ^ J ^ épara' of X at least about 10.5 mi imptrng n more, · —-in- where the sphere of radius XY lacks the auxiliary element of support or auxiliary support mark, wherein the acute angle between the XY straight line and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees and where the three-dimensional object comprises simple metal, metal alloy, ceramic or a simple carbon allotropic variety.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a processed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the
I JML Ρ T <sup>;</sup>
INSTITírrOMVICA '->
of 'AncÚsISS three-dimensional object, where at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature ef ”of at least approximately 50 centimeters as measured by optical microscopy, where the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process and (ii) comprises an auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support indicative of the presence or removal of the element auxiliary support, where the layered structure has a layering plane, where X is a point lying on the surface of the three-dimensional object and Y is the mark on the auxiliary support closest to X, where Y is separated from X by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more; where the XY radius sphere lacks the auxiliary support element or auxiliary support mark, where the acute angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is from approximately 45 degrees to approximately 90 degrees and in where the three-dimensional object comprises simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a bed of powder.
<img file="MX355451B_D0034.tif" />
ί Μ Ρ1 ί
INSTI L ') ΙΪΟΧΛ.'. Ο &. <sup>1</sup> Umdustual 3i? -DAU in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy. , wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where neither of the two metals present within the layer are capable of to form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a material in
ΜΡΪΙΓΛΝΩ / X<sup>1</sup>·. ? t
ΠβΤΓΠΓΓΟ MEXICAN Λ <- - <sub>t</sub>. ,!} powder having a simple metal, metallic alloy ^^ S ^ feráiffifeeer ^ 'or an allotropic variety of carbon si mp 1 e; a _ .. f.ii-an-fa ^ -1-d ^ energy that provides a beam of energy to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least approximately 50 centimeters as measured by optical microscopy, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of removal of the layers during or after of the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and where none of the
Ό you Ν Ν ________ \ / Χ. <□ $
INSTITUTE ΜEXJCAUO \, <F ~<sup>τ</sup>^ ί <sup>;</sup>.: ¡¿R ¿ΕΐΑΡκοί ^ »α two metals present within the layer are capable of forming a eutectic alloy,
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form at least one layer of the hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein at least the single layer of the hardened material has a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy. , wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter (cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element and in
<img file="MX355451B_D0035.tif" />
where each layer of the three-dimensional object at most substantially a single simple metal.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein the three-dimensional object (i) lacks surface elements indicative of the removal of the layers during or after the three-dimensional printing process, (ii) has an exposed layer surface with a surface area of at least about one square centimeter ( cm<sup>2</sup>) and (iii) lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or marks of the elements
<img file="MX355451B_D0036.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0037.tif" />
support aids indicative of the presence or removal of the support aid and wherein each layer of the three-dimensional object comprises at most substantially a single simple metal.
At least the single layer of the cured material can have a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy. At least the single layer of the cured material can have a radius of curvature of at least about 50 centimeters as measured by light microscopy.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object lacking auxiliary support elements comprises (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy , ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; and (c) hardening the transformed material to form the three-dimensional object lacking the auxiliary support elements, wherein the three-dimensional object lacks at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
The solidified material can be formed within a deviation from the designed three-dimensional structure as
<img file="MX355451B_D0038.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
- · ·,, r-. , INDUSTRIAL-maximum approximately the sum of 25 microns and one thousandth of the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object. The solidified material can be formed within a deviation from the designed three-dimensional structure of at most about the sum of 25 microns and 1 / 2,500 of the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object. Steps (a) - (c) can be carried out at a pressure that may be greater than about 10 '<sup>6</sup> Torr. Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out at a pressure that can be greater than or equal to approximately 10<sup>_1</sup> Torr. The methods described in the present description may further comprise removing the solidified material from the powder material that did not fuse to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object that lacks auxiliary support elements comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material that has a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive
100
INSTITUTO MSXICANO Di LA MONEDAD instructions to generate the tridimend object ^ íWiWl
<img file="MX355451B_D0039.tif" />
direct the energy beam along my Lia ^ ecturia'ú'e according to the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form the three-dimensional object that lacks the auxiliary supporting elements and where the three-dimensional object lacks at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
The auxiliary support may comprise a scaffold that encloses the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object may comprise a single simple metal composition. The three-dimensional object may lack a simple metal. The powdered material may be devoid of more than one metal. The three-dimensional object may lack more than one metal. The powdered material may be devoid of two or more metals in a proportion that they form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object lacking auxiliary support elements comprises (a) providing a powder bed in an enclosure, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy , ceramic or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) heating a portion of the layer of the powder material to a
101
<img file="MX355451B_D0040.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0041.tif" />
powder material to form a molten material, wherein during heating, a portion of the remainder of the powder material that was not heated to at least a melting temperature, is at a temperature below a sintering temperature of the material in dust; and (c) solidifying the molten material to form at least part of the three-dimensional object lacking the auxiliary support elements, wherein the three-dimensional object lacks at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
The powdered material may be devoid of two or more metals that form a eutectic alloy. In some cases, a remainder of the powdered material that did not fuse or solidify to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object, may lack a continuous structure spanning about 1 millimeter or more. In some cases, a remainder of the powder material that did not fuse or solidify to form at least a part of the three-dimensional object, may lack a scaffold that encloses the three-dimensional structure. The method may further comprise providing an additional layer of the powder material adjacent to the layer after (c). The method may further comprise repeating the operations from (a) to
102 yV'VVyy (c). The method may further comprise enf: and the remainder of the powder material that did not melt or solidify to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The portion and the rest can be cooled at practically the same speed.
<td>The temperature of</td><td colspan="2">merged;</td><td colspan="2">n can</td><td>to be</td><td>at least</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 400</td><td>° C</td><td>or</td><td>more</td><td>Y</td><td>the</td><td>temperature</td><td>from</td>
<td>sintering can be</td><td colspan="2">What</td><td>maximum</td><td>from</td><td colspan="2">about 400</td><td>° C</td>
<td colspan="2">or less. Temperature</td><td>from</td><td>fusion</td><td colspan="2">can</td><td>be at least</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 400</td><td>° C</td><td>or</td><td>more</td><td>Y</td><td>the</td><td>temperature</td><td>from</td>
<td>sintering can be</td><td colspan="2">What</td><td>maximum</td><td>from</td><td colspan="2">about 300</td><td>° C</td>
or less. The method may further comprise separating the remainder of the layer that was neither fused nor solidified to form at least a portion of the three-dimensional object, from the portion. The method may further comprise delivering the three-dimensional object to a customer. The method may further comprise packaging the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object that lacks auxiliary support elements comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material that has a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a source of energy that
103 κΡΙ
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Y. <. - '*'.
provides a beam of energy to the material in ^ irpiS ^ é) ^ eiiiisíí · bed of dust; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object and (ii) direct the power beam along a path in accordance with the instructions for heating and melting. a portion of the powder material in a molten material that solidifies into the three-dimensional object that lacks the auxiliary support elements, wherein a portion of the remainder of the powdered material that was not heated to at least a melting temperature is at a temperature below a sintering temperature of the powdered material and wherein the three-dimensional object is devoid of at least two metals that form a eutectic alloy.
In another aspect, an apparatus for selectively melting powdered material comprises a controller configured to:
(a) controlling the provision of a layer of the powder material to a portion of the bed from a powder material deposition device, wherein the powder material comprises simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or simple carbon;
(b) controlling the provision of radiation to fuse at least a portion of the powder material of the layer; (c) control the provision of an additional layer of material in
104
<img file="MX355451B_D0042.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0043.tif" />
- -,, INSTITUTO MEXICANO powder that is superimposed on the previous layer particles, which includes the previously fused portion of material of the device for deposition of the particle material; (d) controlling the provision of radiation to fuse an additional portion of the material within the overlying additional layer and to fuse said additional portion with the previously fused portion of material in the previous layer; and (e) controlling the successive repetition of operations (c) and (d) to form a three-dimensional object, wherein the three-dimensional object is formed without auxiliary supports.
In another aspect, a method for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) receiving a request for the generation of a requested three-dimensional object from a customer, wherein the requested three-dimensional object comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) generating by addition a three-dimensional object generated according to a model of the three-dimensional object; and (c) deliver the generated three-dimensional object to the client, where the operations (b) - (c) are performed without the removal of the auxiliary elements, where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the requested three-dimensional object.
105
My me
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \% í'τ-rV?, 'J The three-dimensional object generated can deviate three-dimensional requested at most in ímadr'ltpnt<sup>P</sup>, Ld ......
sum of 25 microns and 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the requested three-dimensional object. The generated three-dimensional object can deviate from the requested three-dimensional object by at most approximately the sum of 25 microns and 1 / 2,500 times the fundamental length scale of the requested three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and directing an energy beam from a power source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that is delivered to a customer without the removal of the auxiliary elements, where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the three-dimensional object requested by the client.
106 f orí
INSTITUTE ΜΗΧ «Α. · ΊΟ
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating three-dimensional liviuEt comprises an enclosure that provides.
powder comprising the powder material comprising a single metal, metal alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; and an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object is delivered to a customer without the removal of the auxiliary elements, where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the three-dimensional object requested by the client.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate a desired three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer request and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path according to
107 • 'Λ, / ¾
INSTITUTO MEXICANO · you $ instructions to transform a portion <sup>FROM</sup>cÜ ^ ¿j. © ^ t powder into a transformed material that ondú race .para ..... f, Q.pmar.
at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the generated three-dimensional object, wherein the generated three-dimensional object is delivered to the customer without the removal of auxiliary elements, where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the requested three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) receiving a request for the generation of a requested three-dimensional object from a customer, wherein the requested three-dimensional object comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) generating by addition a three-dimensional object generated according to a model of the requested three-dimensional object; and (c) deliver the generated three-dimensional object to the client, where operation (b) is performed without the use of auxiliary elements; wherein the remainder of the powder material that does not form the three-dimensional object lacks a scaffold structure that encloses the generated three-dimensional object and where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the requested three-dimensional object.
108
MF ·.,. ' «
MLTICANO INSTITUTE. · '*>
, DE UUJU'.i-IEDAD Ú. ' ..}? '
The powdered material may be devoid of two or me ^ '^ taT & S ^ -in a proportion that can form at least ^ Tffref - ^' aie-eutectic aeion. The application may comprise the model of the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise generating the model of the three-dimensional object. The model can be generated from a representative physical model of the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise receiving an item of value from the customer in exchange for the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object can be additively generated with a maximum deviation of about 50 microns from the model of the three-dimensional object. The generated three-dimensional object can deviate from the requested three-dimensional object by at most approximately the sum of 25 microns and 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the requested three-dimensional object. The generated three-dimensional object can deviate from the requested three-dimensional object by at most approximately the sum of 25 microns and 1 / 2,500 times the fundamental length scale of the requested three-dimensional object. Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can be a maximum of approximately 2 days or less. Operations (a) - (c) can be performed in a period of time that can be as
109 maximum of about 1 day or less.
<img file="MX355451B_D0044.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0045.tif" />
(c) they can be carried out in a period of time that, .may be a maximum of about six hours or less. Addition generation may comprise successively depositing and melting the powdered material. The design may lack auxiliary elements. The method may comprise, - in addition, transforming the design into instructions usable by the processor to generate the three-dimensional object. Operation (b) can be performed without iterative or corrective printing. The request can be received from the customer.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate a desired three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer request and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path according to the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form
110 b (Va ί ι a \.
JL AVA A. JL f at least one layer of a hardened material or generated three-dimensional object, lacking auxiliary elements; wherein the remainder of the powdered material that did not form the three-dimensional object lacks a scaffold structure enclosing the generated three-dimensional object and where the generated three-dimensional object is substantially identical to the requested three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) receiving a request for the generation of a three-dimensional object from a customer, wherein the three-dimensional object comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple; (b) generating by addition the three-dimensional object according to a model of the three-dimensional object; and (c) deliver the three-dimensional object to the client, where operations (a) - (c) are performed in a period of time that is approximately 72 hours or less, and where the three-dimensional object is additively generated with a deviation of models at most approximately the sum of 50 microns plus 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object.
The request can be accompanied by the model of the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise generating lll
IMPI
DCTiTVTO MEXICANO '·, ·. ,
OF THE PROPERTY . Γ.
the model of the three-dimensional object. The trí <a'®sensidffe3 object<sup>F?</sup>It can be additively generated and deviates— ^ Sb'i ^ -m'model-e orno maximum by approximately the sum of 25 microns plus
1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object can be additively generated and deviates from the model by a maximum of about the sum of 25 microns plus 1 / 2,500 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object.
The three-dimensional object can be additively generated and deviates from the model by a maximum of about the sum of microns. The three-dimensional object can be additively generated and deviates from the model by a maximum of about the sum of 25 microns. The operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can be a maximum of about 48 hours or less. The operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can be a maximum of about 24 hours or less. The operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can be a maximum of about 12 hours or less. The operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can be a maximum of about 6 hours or less. Operations (a) - (c) can be carried out in a period of time that can
112
HVÍ M j.
,. ,. ,. , OCTITUTO MEXICANO 1 &
be a maximum of about 1 hour ^ ow ^^ ngs. L® generation by addition may comprise dqpg ^ ¿t, ar<sub>F</sub> and successively melt the powder. The method may further comprise transforming the design into instructions usable by the processor to additively generate the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise receiving an item of value from the customer in exchange for the three-dimensional object. Operation (b) can be performed without iterative or corrective printing. The request can be received from the customer.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple, where the powder bed is arranged within an enclosure, where the pressure in the enclosure is greater than about 10<sup>-6</sup> Torr; and (b) directing a beam of energy from a power source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to
113 ϋβπτυτο NSZTC / JiC V'ff'f 'V, i
DELA -? ¡SDíJ5 to produce the three-dimensional object that is generated<sup>m</sup>efé ¥ l%<sup>I</sup>ro '•• dé ·' · -uh period of time that is approximately 7ΤΠΤϋΤ ^ 5 ^ '© · ΊΐΓβΏθδ-, ·· - ^ η where the three-dimensional object is generated additively with a deviation of the models at most of approximately the sum of 50 microns plus 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or a simple carbon allotropic variety, wherein the pressure in the enclosure is greater than approximately 10 '<sup>6</sup> Torr; and (b) an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the three-dimensional object is generated within a period of time which is approximately 72 hours or less, wherein the three-dimensional object is additively generated with a maximum deviation of the models of approximately the sum of 50 microns plus 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the bed of
114
INSTITUTE / ν 410. - * í 7
DE LA PxOrlrDAD V ·.,; y-tí dust, where the dust bed comprises uh '^ mS't.eri'aT powder that has a ceramic or a single carbon path, where the pressure in the enclosure is greater than approximately 10<sup>6</sup> Torr; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer request and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path of according to the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein the three-dimensional object is generated within a time period that is approximately 72 hours or less, wherein the three-dimensional object is additively generated with a maximum deviation of the models of approximately the sum of 50 microns plus 1 / 1,000 times the fundamental length scale of the three-dimensional object.
In another aspect, a method for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) receiving a request for the generation of a three-dimensional object from a client, in ·, * Λ ν *
115 i ikk .r jí V / v ·, · ^ '· ^ iNSTcn t ?. Haunch »-'tV / iv
D2 u ίΐΟ'ίίΙΓλϊΠ V? . T- 'j. ', .- φ t. 'U.' <V .-. - 'where the three-dimensional object comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) generating by addition the three-dimensional object according to a model of the three-dimensional object; and (c) deliver the three-dimensional object to the customer, where operation (b) is performed in a period of time that is approximately 12 hours or less from receipt in operation (a), and where operation (b) performed at a pressure that is greater than approximately 10 ”<sup>6</sup>
Torr.
The request can be accompanied by the design of the model of the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise generating the model design of the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object can be additively generated and deviates from the model by a maximum of about 50 microns or less. The method may further comprise transforming the design into instructions usable by the processor to additively generate the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise receiving an item of value from the customer in exchange for the three-dimensional object. Operation (b) can be carried out in a period of time that can be less than or equal to about 6 hours. Operation (b) can be performed in
116
<img file="MX355451B_D0046.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Di LA PROPERTY
<img file="MX355451B_D0047.tif" />
a period of time that may be less <^<sup>DU</sup>5 ^ aÍ<sup><</sup>‘<sup>1</sup>- ^ you '' ''
<img file="MX355451B_D0048.tif" />
about 10 <sup>3</sup> Torr or more. The pressure can be at least about 1 Torr or more. The pressure can be at least about 750 Torr or more. Operation (b) can be performed without iterative or corrective printing. The request can be received from the customer.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer's request and (ii) within a maximum of about 12 hours, directing the energy beam along a predetermined path in accordance with the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object.
117
IMPIC X
INSTITUTO MEXICANG.
In another aspect, a method to print% 5 * ¿&<sup>c</sup>Does ™ ^ 'kTQ ^ éefeÓ' 'three-dimensional comprises (a) receiving ηna .. sol 1 cit ~ -? Τ-d ..., ρ ^ ra the generation of a three-dimensional object of a client, where the three-dimensional object comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of
<td>simple carbon</td><td colspan="2">; (b) generate</td><td>for</td><td>addition</td><td>the</td><td>object</td>
<td>three-dimensional</td><td>agree</td><td>with</td><td>a</td><td>model</td><td>of</td><td>object</td>
<td>three-dimensional</td><td>requested;</td><td>Y</td><td>(c)</td><td>deliver</td><td>the</td><td>object</td>
three-dimensional to the customer, wherein the three-dimensional object is generated without at least one iterative printing and corrective printing.
Operation (b) can be performed without iterative or corrective printing. Step (b) can be performed at a pressure that is at least about 10<sup>-6</sup> Torr or more. The three-dimensional object can be additively generated with a maximum pattern deviation of about 50 microns or less. The method may further comprise transforming the design into instructions usable by the processor to additively generate the three-dimensional object. The method may further comprise receiving an item of value from the customer in exchange for the three-dimensional object. In some cases, in operation (b), the formation of the three-dimensional object reaches its completion
118
<img file="MX355451B_D0049.tif" />
no iterative or corrective printing
INSTITUTC MEXICANO DE LA 1
<img file="MX355451B_D0050.tif" />
be received from the customer.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to:
(a) supplying a layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the powder material comprises a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon. simple; and (b) directing an energy beam from a power source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object that is generated without at least one iterative printing and corrective printing.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) an enclosure housing a bed of powder comprising the powder material comprising a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and (b) an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, the object
119
<img file="MX355451B_D0051.tif" />
Τ> -, 'Τ Ο Ίι i ivjí! it 3;
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Ζί<sup>1</sup>OF THE PRO. AGE \ - = three-dimensional is generated without at least one iterative "'Q ^' ^ mpr and corrective printing. ......
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or a single carbon allotropic variety; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer request and (ii) direct the power beam along a predetermined path according to the instructions for transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object, wherein the three-dimensional object is generated without at least one iterative printing and corrective printing.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) providing a layer of the powder material comprising a single metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of carbon.
120
MEXICAN INSTITUTE; '<sup>;</sup>-fA, and
DE IA PP.ú * il? A9 \ 'simple; (b) transform at least a portion of the powder in the layer to form a material 't rab ^ Tó ^ tñá ^ oT<sup>1</sup>'' '(' c) '' 'harden the transformed material to form a hardened material that is at least a portion of the three-dimensional object; (d) optionally, repeat operations (a) - (c); and (e) removing the generated three-dimensional object from the remainder of the powder material that did not form the three-dimensional object, in a period of time of 30 minutes or less after a last hardening operation.
In some cases, during the method the three-dimensional object may lack one or more auxiliary elements. The single or more auxiliary support elements may comprise a scaffold enclosing the three-dimensional object. The powdered material may be devoid of two or more metals that form a eutectic alloy. The remainder of the powdered material that did not form at least the only part of the three-dimensional object, may lack a continuous structure spanning about 1 millimeter or more. The handling temperature of the three-dimensional object can be at most about 100 ° C or less. The handling temperature can be a maximum of about 80 ° C or less.
121
<img file="MX355451B_D0052.tif" />
_,,. , MEXICAN INSTITUTE
In another aspect, a system for gene bbgezo
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
<img file="MX355451B_D0053.tif" />
three-dimensional comprises an enclosure that
<img file="MX355451B_D0054.tif" />
powder, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder material having a ceramic or an allotropic variety of single carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; an object removal mechanism that removes the three-dimensional object from the rest of the powdered material that did not form the three-dimensional object; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object in accordance with a customer request, (ii) directing the energy beam along a predetermined path according to the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that is hardened to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object and (iii) directing the object removal mechanism to remove the three-dimensional object from the rest within a maximum of about 30 minutes of the generation of the three-dimensional object.
The object removal system may comprise a blocking mesh. The object removal system can
122 understand a robotic arm. The '<3θ1 · ·' • industrial object system may comprise a conveyor belt. The object removal system may comprise a rotatable opening.
In another aspect, an apparatus for leveling an upper surface of the powder material of a powder bed comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed comprising the powder material; an energy source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object, wherein after formation, at least the portion of the three-dimensional object is suspended in the bed of dust; and a powder leveling member for leveling the upper surface of the powder bed, wherein the leveling member is arranged above the powder bed, wherein during use, the powder leveling member displaces at least a portion of the object. three-dimensional 300 microns or less.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a powder bed comprises (a) dispensing the powder material into an enclosure to provide the powder bed, wherein the powder material comprises a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; (b) generate the object
123
<img file="MX355451B_D0055.tif" />
three-dimensional from a portion of the maVS ^ j ^ gf ^ gg póá.vp '; H'
INDUSTRY 'where after generation, the three-dimensional object is suspended in the dust bed; and (c) using a leveling member to level an exposed surface of the powder bed so that the three-dimensional object suspended in the powder bed travels approximately 300 microns or less.
Generating may comprise generating by addition. The powder bed may lack a supporting scaffold that practically encloses the three-dimensional object. In some embodiments, in (c), the three-dimensional object can move about 20 microns or less. The powdered material may be devoid of at least two metals that are present in a proportion that forms a eutectic alloy. The powder material can comprise at most one metal which can be practically of a single simple metal composition. The powdered material may comprise a metal alloy which may be of a single metal alloy composition. The three-dimensional object can be flat. The three-dimensional object can be a wire. The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary support elements. The three-dimensional object can comprise auxiliary support elements that are suspended in the bed
124
IPWM,. <sub>τ</sub> -,,,,, MEXICAN WSTmiTC <sup>:</sup> ', of dust. The transformation can be carried out Ra © j? W <3gr <> or jgoj). a model that can be representative of the three-dimensional object. The leveling mechanism may comprise a roller. The leveling mechanism may comprise a rake. The leveling mechanism can be synchronized with a powder dispenser. The powder dispenser may comprise an air knife. The powder dispenser may comprise a curved tube with an opening through which the powder can be released. The powder dispenser may comprise an endless screw. The rake has a plurality of vanes with variable height. The rake has a plurality of vanes with varying contact angle on the additional layer of powder material. In some cases, at least a fraction of the dust in the dust layer can be removed from the substrate before (b). Sometimes at least a fraction of the dust in the dust layer can be collected by a dust recycling system. The fraction of dust collected by the dust recycling system can be recirculated and at least a fraction of dust collected by the dust recycling system can be dispensed in step (c). The leveling mechanism may comprise a plurality of needles distributed throughout the axis of the leveling mechanism. Needles can be arranged in the
125 Leveling mechanism plurality of needles touches a different place
<img file="MX355451B_D0056.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE *. / 'OF ETHICS / 0
L? T LA f JUrltUAU v that every ért<sup>1</sup>'
<img file="MX355451B_D0057.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0058.tif" />
The plurality of needles can level a dispensed powder from a top dispensing powder dispenser. The leveling mechanism may further comprise a roller adjacent to the plurality of needles. The needles can be distributed over the entire axis of the leveling mechanism. The leveling mechanism may comprise a paddle. The leveling mechanism may comprise a powder level sensor configured to determine a level of powder in front of the leveling mechanism. The dust level sensor can be an optical sensor. The powder level sensor may be in communication with a powder dispenser system configured to dispense powder when the powder level sensor detects a powder level below a predetermined threshold. The rake may comprise a set of blades each of which may be diagonal to a surface of the powder layer or the additional layer. The dispensing of the powder from the auger can be controlled by a valve. The rake may comprise a smooth blade. The roller can flatten the powder dispensed from a powder dispenser. The powder dispenser may comprise a dispensing powder dispenser
126 Superior MEXICAN tNSfíTUTO. One surface of the roller has a<sup>D £</sup>é ^^^^ Lá ^^<sub>M</sub>-4e static friction of at least about 0.5 or ..more, · ,. F.1 roller may comprise an active rotation mechanism configured to force rotation of the roller in a clockwise direction. The roller may comprise an active rotation mechanism configured to force the rotation of the roller in the counterclockwise direction. The roller may comprise an eccentric shape so that during rotation it leaves room for flattening at multiple heights. The paddle can level the dispensed powder from a top dispensing powder dispenser. The overhead dispensing mechanism may be comprised of a vibrating screen through which the powder is released into the powder bed. The vibration can be triggered by an ultrasonic transducer. The vibration can be activated by a piezoelectric device.
The vibration can be activated by a rotary motor with an eccentric cam.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a powder bed comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises the powder material having a simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or a allotropic variety
127 simple carbon; a leveling member ^^ í ^ ÍOTiS ^ e ^^ asBSO exposed surface of the powder bed; and., a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and leveling member and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object, (ii) generate the three-dimensional object from a portion of the powdered material according to the instructions, wherein after generation, the three-dimensional object is suspended in the powder bed and (iii) directing the leveling member to level the exposed surface of the powder bed so that the three-dimensional object suspended in the powder bed travels approximately 300 microns or less.
In some embodiments, after generation of the three-dimensional object, the powder bed may lack a supporting scaffold that substantially encloses the three-dimensional object.
The system may further comprise a powder dispenser that provides the powder material in the enclosure. The leveling mechanism can be attached to the powder dispenser. The powder dispenser may be disposed adjacent to the powder bed and wherein the powder dispenser has an outlet opening which may be located at a location other than a lower portion of the powder dispenser that faces the powder bed. The outlet opening can
128
<img file="MX355451B_D0059.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO located on one side of the powder dispenser. ΪΪτνηΙββγ »© be a portion of the powder dispenser quní> - towards the powder bed nor is it oriented in a direction opposite to the powder bed. The outlet opening may comprise a mesh. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispenser and programmed to control the amount of powder material that can be dispensed by the powder dispenser in the room. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispenser and is programmed to control a position of the powder dispenser. The powder dispenser can move.
The system may further comprise one or more mechanical members operatively coupled to the powder dispenser, wherein the single or more mechanical members subject the powder dispenser to vibration. The controller can be operatively coupled to the one or more mechanical members.
The controller can be programmed to control the one or more mechanical members to regulate the amount of powder material that can be dispensed by the powder dispenser in the room. The controller can be programmed to control a position of the leveling member, where the leveling member can move. The controller can be programmed to control a force or pressure exerted by the limb
129
<img file="MX355451B_D0060.tif" />
leveling on the powder material. >
Leveling may comprise a unit - which removes excess powder material from the powder bed. The removal unit may comprise a source of vacuum, magnetic force, electrical force, or electrostatic force.
The removal unit may comprise a reservoir to accommodate excess powder material. The removal unit may comprise one or more negative pressure sources to remove excess powder material from the powder bed. The controller can be programmed to direct the removal of excess powder material through the use of the removal unit. The leveling member may comprise a blade.
In another aspect, an apparatus for removing a generated three-dimensional object comprises (a) an enclosure that houses a powder bed comprising powder material having single metal, metal alloy, ceramic, or a single carbon allotropic variety, wherein during use, at least a portion of the powdered material is transformed into a transformed material which subsequently hardens to form the three-dimensional object; and (b) a base that is located within the enclosure, where during use the powder material is located adjacent to the base and where the base
130 that can work UNjTrew M3adf-Don't leave
OF THE INCUIUJAL PROH2ÜAD
<img file="MX355451B_D0061.tif" />
It comprises a locked and unlocked position mesh so that (i) when locked, the mesh does not allow either the powder material or the three-dimensional object to pass through the mesh and (ii) when unlocked, the mesh allows at least part of the powder material passes through the mesh and prevents the three-dimensional object from passing through the mesh.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure containing a powdered material comprising simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon; and a base arranged within the enclosure; wherein the powder material is arranged adjacent to the base, wherein the base comprises a blocking mesh that when unlocked, the mesh is of a type that allows at least part of the powder material to flow through it and at the same time prevents the three-dimensional object from passing through. In some embodiments, being unlocked may comprise modifying the position (eg, vertical or horizontal position) of the base. In some embodiments, being locked does not involve changing the position of the base.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of
131
<img file="MX355451B_D0062.tif" />
The powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a powder "material" comprising a single metal, metallic, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of single carbon; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; a base disposed adjacent to the powder bed, wherein the base comprises a blocking mesh that is alternately locked or unblocked, wherein (i) when the blocking mesh is blocked, the powder material does not flow through the mesh and (ii) when the blocking mesh is unlocked, at least part of the powder material flows through the mesh while the three-dimensional object is prevented from passing through the mesh; and a controller is operatively coupled to the power source and programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object, (ii) directing the energy beam along a path in accordance with the instructions to transform a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material that hardens to form at least one layer of a hardened material as part of the three-dimensional object and (iii) directing the mesh locking device to unlock the mesh. The locking mesh can be unlocked by modifying a position of the locking mesh.
132
IMPI
INíTITUTO MEXSCZÍh · »'~
OF THE PROPiiL'AD 'Í.V.tV /!
lock or a lockout device from the mall'§<sup>Du</sup>cl'b $ acente 'to the locking mesh. The device b Ιό that δ cTe the 'wrong! a 'can be a movable plane that alternates between a vertical or a horizontal position that locks the locking mesh and another vertical or horizontal position that unlocks the locking mesh. The base can alternate between a vertical or horizontal position that locks the locking mesh and another vertical or horizontal position that unlocks the locking mesh.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) dispensing a layer of the powder material adjacent to a base, wherein the base comprises a mesh that allows at least a portion of the powder to flow through when the base is released. mesh is unlocked; (b) transforming a portion of the powdered material into a transformed material; (c) hardening the transformed material to provide a hardened material that is at least a portion of the three-dimensional object; and (d) unblocking the mesh to recover the hardened material from the remainder of the powder material that does not form at least the portion of the three-dimensional object.
After recovering the hardened material, the hardened material can rest on a substrate that is arranged
133 to go
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \ under the base. After recovering<sup>of</sup>^ ustL hardened, the rest can be removed from the toril a · Ί.,, ρ, πγΙΜ-Γ. ^.? - j. ^<sup>0 </sup>Unlocking may comprise moving the mesh relative to the powder material. Unlocking may comprise moving the mesh relative to the base. A surface of the mesh can be moved relative to the powder material by pulling one or more posts connected to the surface. The single or more posts can be removed from one edge of the base by means of a threaded connection . In some embodiments, curing comprises directing cooling gas towards the transformed material to cool the transformed material and produce the hardened material.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object suspended in a bed of powder comprises (a)
<td>dispense the</td><td>material</td><td>powdered</td><td>on</td><td>a</td><td>enclosure</td><td>in order to</td>
<td>provide a</td><td>bed of</td><td>dust in</td><td>where</td><td>the</td><td>bed of</td><td>dust</td>
<td>comprises a</td><td>surface</td><td>higher;</td><td>(b)</td><td colspan="2">generate the</td><td>object</td>
three-dimensional from a portion of the powder material by transforming the powder material into a transformed material that subsequently forms a hardened material, wherein the hardened material protrudes from the upper surface of the powder bed, where the hardened material is mobile inside the powder bed; and (c) add
134 ) '] i' ν * ''
Item <sup>v</sup>'- <·' Λ INSTITUTO MEXICANO a layer of the powdered material on the surface of the powder bed, whereby the addition of the powdery material.
hardened about 300 microns or less, wherein the upper surface of the powder material layer is substantially flat.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object from a powder material comprises (a) dispensing the powder material into an enclosure to provide a powder bed, wherein the powder bed comprises a top surface; (b) using an energy beam from a power source, which transforms the powder material into a transformed material which subsequently forms a hardened material, wherein the hardened material protrudes from the upper surface of the powder bed and where the material hardened is mobile within the powder bed; and (c) dispensing a layer of the powder material onto the upper surface of the powder bed such that the hardened material travels approximately 300 microns or less, wherein at the time of dispensing the layer of powder material, the upper surface of the powder bed is substantially flat.
The hardened material can be at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. At least the portion of the object
135
<img file="MX355451B_D0063.tif" />
ί 'A
INSTITUI or MEXICAN
<img file="MX355451B_D0064.tif" />
three-dimensional may comprise warping, pan>
<img file="MX355451B_D0065.tif" />
It may further comprise using a powder dispensing member to deposit the layer of powder material on the upper surface of the powder bed. Dispensing in (c) may further comprise using a powder leveling member to level the upper surface of the powder bed by shearing off excess powder material.
Dispensing in (c) may further comprise using a dust removal member to remove excess powder material without touching the layer of powder material. The three-dimensional object can be suspended in the powder bed.
The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary support elements. The auxiliary support elements comprise a scaffold that substantially encloses the three-dimensional object. The three-dimensional object may comprise auxiliary support elements that are suspended in the powder bed. The powdered material may be devoid of at least two metals that are present in a proportion that forms a eutectic alloy. Leveling can be done after the powder dispensing mechanism completes dispensing a row of powder material into the enclosure. Leveling can be done after the mechanism
136 powder dispenser complete the
ID vi bt
INSTITUTE MSXXM-O dispensed from<sup>£</sup> a layer of the powder material on the reσίη · ί €> v -Leveling - can be performed after the powder dispensing mechanism completes dispensing a layer of the powder material into the enclosure. The powder dispensing mechanism can span at least part of the length of the enclosure. The powder dispensing mechanism can span the entire length of the enclosure. The powder dispensing mechanism can span at least part of the width of the enclosure. The powder dispensing mechanism can span the entire width of the enclosure.
The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a mesh through which the powder material can be dispensed out of the dispensing mechanism. The dispensing mechanism
<td>powder can</td><td>understand</td><td>a</td><td>position of</td><td>mesh</td><td>that prevents</td>
<td colspan="3">than powder material</td><td>contents</td><td>inside of the</td><td>mechanism</td>
<td>dispenser</td><td>of dust</td><td>I know</td><td>dispense</td><td>outside of</td><td>mechanism</td>
<td>dispenser</td><td>of dust</td><td colspan="2">through the</td><td>mesh. The</td><td>mechanism</td>
<td>dispenser</td><td>of dust</td><td>can</td><td>understand</td><td colspan="2">a position of the</td>
<td>mesh that</td><td>enables</td><td>what</td><td>the material</td><td>powdered</td><td>contents</td>
Inside the powder dispensing mechanism, the powder dispensing mechanism is dispensed through the mesh. The position of the screen can determine the amount of powder material dispensed from the powder dispensing mechanism to
137
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE i
OF THE PROPERTY !
INDUSTRIAL through the mesh. The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a first mesh position that prevents powder material contained within the powder dispensing mechanism from being dispensed out of the powder dispensing mechanism through the mesh and a second mesh position that enables the powder material contained within the powder dispensing mechanism is dispensed from the powder dispensing mechanism through the screen. The speed at which the powder dispensing mechanism alternates between the first and second positions can modify at least one dispensing parameter of the powder material. The dispensing parameter may comprise the homogeneity of the distribution of the powder in the enclosure. The dispensing parameter may comprise the amount of powder dispensed from the screen. The ratio of the amount of time the mesh can be in a first and a second position can determine the amount of powder material dispensed from the powder dispensing mechanism. The speed at which the mesh alternates between the first and second positions can determine the area covered by the powder material dispensed from the powder dispensing mechanism in the enclosure. The powder dispensing mechanism may further comprise a control mechanism coupled to the mechanism.
138 · »TT 57 -.-. -, · - · ..
|| íti ib'n h. y A ufsn? ·· - \<sub>Λ</sub>·. ·. · Λ.
dsl -; or ν, powder dispenser. The control mechanism can regulate the amount of powder dispensed. The med3ñí ^ Rtó<sup>=</sup>”“ Fl'é '' COhtról 'can control the position of the powder dispensing mechanism. Control can be automatic or manual. The control mechanism can control the position of the mesh. The control mechanism may comprise a sensor that detects the amount of powder material dispensed by the dispensing mechanism. The control mechanism may comprise a sensor that detects the amount of powder material accumulated in the enclosure. The control mechanism may comprise a sensor that detects the amount of powder material accumulated at a location in the enclosure. Leveling can be done by a leveling mechanism. The leveling mechanism may comprise a leveling accessory comprising a rolling cylinder, a rake, a brush, a blade or a spatula. The movement of the leveling attachment can comprise forward, backward, lateral or diagonal movements. The movement of the leveling accessory may comprise a lateral movement. The leveling mechanism can span at least part of the length of the enclosure. The leveling mechanism can span the entire length of the enclosure. The leveling mechanism can span at least part of the width of the
139 the entire enclosure. The leveling mechanism can
INSTITUTE MinCANO V;
Ai width of the enclosure. The mechanism of .. ·, - „Ώ, 1, νρ1 ^ οτΑΏ ... it may further comprise a control mechanism coupled to the leveling accessory. The control mechanism may comprise a sensor that detects the level of the powder material in the enclosure. The leveling accessory may comprise a rolling cylinder. The rolling mill roll can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise in a position perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the roll. The lamination cylinder can rotate with the direction of lateral movement of the leveling attachment or opposite to the lateral movement of the leveling attachment. Dispensing may comprise vibrating at least part of the powder material in the powder dispensing mechanism. Dispensing may comprise vibrating at least part of an opening through which powder material exits the powder dispensing mechanism. Leveling can move an object within or below the deposited layer of powder material by a maximum of 20 microns. The scroll can be a horizontal scroll. Leveling may comprise using a trowel. The leveling mechanism can level the layer of powder material while moving in a first direction.
140
ΙΜΡΪ) (33¾¾
INSTITUTO MEXICANO a
OF THE PROPERTY t. "UW *
INDUSTRIAL
Leveling may comprise moving the paddle in the first direction. Leveling may comprise moving the paddle in a direction opposite to the first direction.
In another aspect, the system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder comprising powder material, wherein the bed of powder comprises an upper surface; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; a layer dispensing mechanism that provides the powder material in the enclosure or on the upper surface of the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source and the layer dispensing mechanism and is programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object, (ii) in accordance with the instructions, use the energy beam to transform the powdered material into a transformed material which subsequently forms a hardened material, wherein the hardened material protrudes from the upper surface of the powder bed and where the hardened material is mobile within the powder bed and (iii) directing the layer dispensing mechanism to dispense a layer of the powder material onto the upper surface of the powder bed so that the hardened material is displaced
141
ΙΓ ZT ¿/ y. _____
L h *<sup>1</sup>'' i<sup>1</sup> >- *\<sup>ι</sup> . INSTITUTO UOSCANi »\ approximately 300 micrometers or less,<sup>FROM</sup>e ^ ¿y «^ nd, g,, upper surface of the dispensed layer dg / L powder material is substantially flat.
The hardened material can be at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a powder dispensing member that provides the powder material. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member and programmed to direct the powder dispensing member to dispense the layer of powder material onto the upper surface of the powder bed in the enclosure. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a powder leveling member that levels the upper surface of the powder bed without touching the upper surface of the powder bed. The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder leveling member and programmed to direct the powder leveling member to level the upper surface of the powder bed. The powder leveling member can shear excess powder material from the upper surface of the powder bed. The powder leveling member can level the upper surface of the powder bed without displacing the excess powder material to another position in the powder bed. Leveling member
142
<img file="MX355451B_D0066.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO '-' 'γ /. ·, Of powder may comprise a blade which ciS ^^ & rn & L' exideíS © ^ of powder material. The Aa · -layer arranging mechanism may comprise a dust removal member that removes excess powder material from the upper surface of the powder bed without touching the upper surface of the powder bed. The controller can be operatively coupled to the dust removal member and programmed to direct the dust removal member to remove excess dust from the top surface. The dust removal member may comprise a vacuum source, a magnetic force generator, an electrostatic force generator, an electric force generator, or a physical force generator. The dust leveling member can be attached to the dust removing member. The dust removal member can be coupled to a dust dispensing member. Excess powder material can be reused by the powder dispensing member. The powder dispensing member can be arranged adjacent the powder bed. The powder dispensing member may comprise an outlet opening which may be located at a location which may be different from the bottom of the powder dispensing member that faces the upper surface of the powder bed. Outlet opening
143
INSTITUTE msxícaho \
DE LA? AC '? 5 £ pA! L * can be located on a lateral portion of the powder dispenser. The side that can be used by the powder dispensing mechanism may be one that does not face the upper surface of the powder bed nor does it face in a direction opposite to the upper surface of the bed. of dust. The controller can regulate the amount of powder material that can be dispensed by the powder dispensing member. The system may further comprise one or more mechanical members operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member. The single or more mechanical members can subject the powder dispensing member to vibration. The controller can be operatively coupled to the one or more mechanical members. The controller can be programmed to control the one or more mechanical members to regulate the amount of powder material that can be dispensed by the powder dispensing member in the enclosure. The powder dispensing member can be located adjacent the upper surface of the powder bed and can be separated from the upper surface of the powder bed by a gap. The powder dispensing member may comprise a gaseous flow. The powder dispensing member may comprise an air flow. The powder dispensing member may comprise a vibrator. The controller can
144
<img file="MX355451B_D0067.tif" />
DBTrruTOMEXíCAKO ϊ. · <sup>;</sup>* t,.
be operatively coupled to the vibrator and regulates ^ n ^ n ^ OTsKtój ^ 'The controller can regulate the amp 1 it ucL.-de - ^^ vÁbr-ao-lón - - of 1 vibrator. The controller can regulate the vibration frequency of the vibrator. The controller can regulate the amount of material released by the powder dispensing member. The controller can regulate the proportion of powder dispensed by the powder dispensing member. The controller can regulate the speed of the powder dispensed by the powder dispensing member. The controller can regulate the position of the powder dispensing member. The position can be a vertical position. The position can be a horizontal position. The controller can regulate the position of the layer dispensing mechanism. The position can be a vertical position. The position can be a horizontal position. The controller can regulate the height of the powder layer formed by the layer dispensing mechanism. The leveling member may further comprise a paddle. The controller can be operatively coupled to the paddle and can regulate the speed of movement of the paddle. The controller can be operatively coupled to the paddle and can regulate the position of the paddle. The position can be a vertical position. The position can be a horizontal position.
145
Ε ιβ Lfiu knwi
<img file="MX355451B_D0068.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0069.tif" />
In another aspect, an apparatus for top of the powder material of a powder bed level comprises an enclosure that houses the powder bed comprising the powder material; an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the powder material in the powder bed to form at least a portion of a three-dimensional object that is mobile in the powder bed; and a layer dispensing mechanism for dispensing a layer of the powder material that is substantially flat, wherein during use, the layer dispensing mechanism displaces at least a portion of the three-dimensional object 300 microns or less.
In another aspect, an apparatus for leveling a powder material for formation of the three-dimensional object comprises (a) a powder leveling member that shears excess powder material in a bed of powder in which the three-dimensional object is generated; and (b) a dust removal member that removes excess powder material, wherein the dust removal member is coupled to the dust leveling member; wherein the leveling mechanism can move the three-dimensional object 300 microns maximum.
The three-dimensional object can be suspended in the powder material. Powdered material may lack structure
146
<img file="MX355451B_D0070.tif" />
Powdered material may lack a scaffold to enclose the three-dimensional object. The powdered material may be devoid of two or more metals to a degree that can form at least one eutectic alloy. The leveling mechanism can move an object that can be suspended in the powder material by a maximum of 20 microns. The apparatus may further comprise a movable member (eg, a movable member) coupled to at least one of the dust leveling member and the dust removing member. The translation member can translate the powder dispenser along a horizontal path that may comprise at least a portion of the horizontal cross-section of the powder bed. The leveling mechanism can be connected to a powder dispensing member that dispenses the powder material into an enclosure. The three-dimensional object may lack auxiliary supports. The object may comprise auxiliary supports.
In another aspect, an apparatus for dispensing a powder material for forming the three-dimensional object comprises (a) a powder reservoir that houses a powder material; (b) an outlet opening through which the powder material can exit the apparatus into the powder bed, in
147
<img file="MX355451B_D0071.tif" />
ΤΓ where the apparatus facilitates the fall 1 ib r ^ '^ ® ^<sub>AND</sub>lt ^ ¿e \ r.íá3íí-reh
SAY THE PROPERTY, <sup>l</sup> ,, tNDUSTSLU. '' Or. '' powder by gravitational force, wherein the apparatus is suspended above the powder bed and separated from the exposed surface of the powder bed by a gap where the outlet opening is located on a face of the apparatus that is different from the bottom of the appliance;
(c) a translation member coupled to the reservoir, wherein the translation member moves the powder dispenser along a horizontal and / or vertical path, wherein the horizontal path comprises a path within a horizontal cross section of the bed powder, wherein the vertical path comprises a path within the gap; and (d) an obstruction located within the outlet opening, wherein the obstruction regulates the amount of powder dispensed through the outlet opening.
The outlet opening can be located on one side of the appliance.
The apparatus may be of a different shape than a sphere. The shape of the apparatus may be different from an ellipsoid. The bottom of the apparatus may comprise a first sloping lower plane of the apparatus that faces the substrate. The first inclined lower plane forms an acute first angle with a plane parallel to the average surface
148 of the substrate in a first direction
<img file="MX355451B_D0072.tif" />
modalities, any lower plane
<img file="MX355451B_D0073.tif" />
The apparatus can form a second acute angle with a plane parallel to the average surface of the substrate, in the first direction. The first inclined lower plane may form a first acute angle with a plane parallel to the average surface of the substrate, in a first direction. In some embodiments, any additional optional inclined lower plane of the apparatus forms a second acute angle with a plane parallel to the average surface of the substrate, in a direction opposite to the first direction. The further inclined lower plane can be separated from the outlet opening by a gap. The separation can be a vertical separation. The parting can be a horizontal parting.
The separation can be both a vertical and a horizontal separation. The obstruction may comprise a mesh. The mesh may comprise a hole that enables powdered material within the apparatus to exit the apparatus. The hole in the mesh can have the fundamental length scale of at least about fifty (50) microns to about one (1) millimeter at most.
The powdered material may comprise scale particles of average fundamental length of at least about 25
149 micrometers to about 4 5 micrometer ^ SeÍSftSnséi ^ ix'ifnOv ”L'a 'K-jusraiAi · · tr obstruction may comprise a vane. The obstruction can comprise both a paddle and a mesh. The paddle can be a doctor blade. The apparatus may comprise a vibrator. The apparatus may comprise a set of vibrators. The set of vibrators can be arranged in a linear pattern.
The set of vibrators can be arranged along a line. The set of vibrators can be arranged along the opening. The vibrator may comprise a motor. Powdered material may leak out of the apparatus during vibrator operation. The vibrator can generate vibrations with a frequency of at least approximately
200 Hertz. The vibrator can generate vibrations with an amplitude of at least about 7 times the gravitational force (G). The apparatus can move in a horizontal direction from one side of the powder bed to the other side of the powder bed. The apparatus may further comprise a leveling member. The apparatus can be connected to the leveling member. The leveling member may comprise a paddle. The vane can comprise a concave surface. The paddle may comprise a bottom surface finished with a sharp edge. Sharp-ended bottom surface forms an acute angle with top surface
150
MEXICAN , . ,,. π, - · INSTITUTO MEXICANO average of the powder material. The pallet.can · ®! · * ™ ^ flexible support. The flexible support enables the * · * - ^ Ιι · ΙΜί »ΜίΙΙ ·· ΙΙ · υ4ΑΑ.ί.«; - νΤ-ΛΑν,. · - · Ti., Paddle to move vertically. The flexible stand enables the paddle to move vertically when against an object. The flexible support enables the paddle to move vertically when it is against at least part of the three-dimensional object. The concave surface can be used to level a layer of the powder material deposited adjacent to the substrate. The concave surface can be oriented towards the substrate. The concave surface may be sloping. The vertical position of the appliance can be adjusted. The vertical position of the paddle can be adjusted. The apparatus may further comprise a bulk reservoir which may contain the powdered material.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) dispensing a layer of the powder material to provide a powder bed by use of a powder dispensing mechanism comprising: (i) a powder reservoir that houses a powder material; (ii) an outlet opening through which the powder material can exit the apparatus into the powder bed, where the apparatus facilitates the free fall of the powder material by means of gravitational force, where the apparatus is
151 suspended above the bed of dust. and
OF THE PROPERTY \
[NDUSTaiAL --------- exposed surface of the powder bed £ or a separation in - ,,, τ-g-CTLIII ll I »- rr.-TT ····.
wherein the outlet opening is located on a face of the apparatus that is different from the bottom of the apparatus;
(iii) a translation member coupled to the reservoir, wherein the translation member moves the powder dispenser along a horizontal and / or vertical path, wherein the horizontal path comprises a path within a horizontal cross section of the bed powder, wherein the vertical path comprises a path within the gap; and (iv) an obstruction located within the outlet opening, wherein the obstruction regulates the amount of powder dispensed through the outlet opening; (b) leveling the exposed surface of the powder bed; and (c) generating at least a portion of the three-dimensional object from at least a portion of the powdered material.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder; (a) an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the powdered material and thereby transforms the powdered material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to form a hardened material, wherein
152
<img file="MX355451B_D0074.tif" />
I JV'IO MEXICANO ϊ <OF THE V INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY, the hardened material can form at least a parti
<img file="MX355451B_D0075.tif" />
three-dimensional object; a powder dispensing member which dispenses the powder material into the powder bed, comprising: (i) a powder reservoir that houses a powder material; (ii) an outlet opening through which the powder material can exit the apparatus into the powder bed, where the apparatus facilitates the free fall of the powder material by means of gravitational force, where the apparatus is suspended above the powder bed and separated from the exposed surface of the powder bed by a gap wherein the outlet opening is located on a face of the apparatus that is different from the bottom of the apparatus; (iii) a translation member coupled to the reservoir, wherein the translation member moves the powder dispenser along a horizontal and / or vertical path, wherein the horizontal path comprises a path within a horizontal cross section of the bed powder, wherein the vertical path comprises a path within the gap; and (iv) an obstruction located within the outlet opening, wherein the obstruction regulates the amount of powder dispensed through the outlet opening; (b) a powder leveling member that levels an exposed surface of the powder bed;
153 fl and (c) a controller operatively coupled to ΐFreight · power, the dust dispensing member, —v-de · dust leveling and the dust removal member and which is programmed to: (i) directing the powder dispenser to dispense a first layer of the powder material having a first upper surface on the powder bed, (ii) receive instructions to generate at least part of the three-dimensional object, (iii) generate at least the part of the three-dimensional object from a portion of the powder material according to the instructions, (iv) directing the powder dispenser to dispense a second layer of the powder material having a second upper surface adjacent to the first upper surface and (v) directing the powder leveling member to level the second upper surface with a first flat surface that is at or below the lowest point of the second upper surface.
In another aspect, a method of generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) dispensing a first layer of the powder material into an enclosure to provide a bed of powder having a first upper surface; (b) directing a beam of energy towards the first layer of the powder material to generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object a
154
IMPT
For you. V<sub>ν</sub>Λ >> · '·
ÍKSTrPJTC · Mrx-CAMO '·, L'¿ LA Γ'ίύ?; ΚΒζ \ Ο' C'n- '' '' ¡.
starting from at least a portion of the first P ^^ á ^ a; after generating at least the ροηϋΐ ^ ϊΤ<sup>ι</sup>~<sup>ϊί</sup>? 1δ1 ^ '' '<sup>;</sup>· © 1θ3 «1ο three-dimensional, dispensing a second layer of the powder material into the enclosure, wherein the second layer of the powder material comprises a second upper surface; (d) shearing the second layer of the powder material to form a first flat surface, wherein the first flat surface is at or below the lowest point of the second top surface; and (e) removing substantially all of the powder material that is on top of a second flat surface from the second layer of the powder material, wherein the second flat surface is located below the first flat surface and where the removal occurs in no contact with the powder bed.
The generation may comprise transforming the powdered material to generate a transformed material which subsequently hardens to form a hardened material, wherein at least a portion of the hardened material protrudes from the first upper surface, and thus forms a shoulder. The projection can be at least a portion of the three-dimensional object. The protrusion may comprise warping, bending, warping, rolling, crimping, or rounding the hardened material. The protrusion may comprise a material
155 , ββπτυτο MEXICAN V <> ί hardened that may not be a part®<sup>1</sup>^^^^ three-dimensional. The overhang may have. .<sub>r</sub> mg.,. ,, ». saturates .of. about 10 microns to about 500 microns relative to the first top surface. In some embodiments, an average vertical distance from the first top surface to the second flat surface can be from about 5 microns to about
1,000 microns. The average vertical distance from the first top surface to the first flat surface can be from about 10 microns to about
500 micrometers. Removal may comprise using vacuum suction, magnetic force, electrostatic force, electrical force, or physical force. In some examples, the removal may comprise vacuum suction. The method may further comprise reusing an excess powder material from the first layer and / or the second layer. The second flat surface can be located on top of the first top surface. The first layer of the powder material can be dispensed through the use of gravitational force.
The first layer of the powder material can be dispensed through the use of gas flow that displaces the powder material. The airflow is moving at a velocity that has a Mach number from about 0.001 to about 1.
156
IMP ί £ f.,> ·
In some embodiments, at the moment of shear of the powder material layer to form the first flat surface, at least the portion of the three-dimensional object can be displaced by about 300 microns or less.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a powder bed comprising powder material; a power source that provides an energy beam to the powder material in the powder bed; a powder dispensing member that dispenses the powder material into the enclosure to provide the powder bed; a powder leveling member that levels an upper surface of the powder bed; a dust removal member that removes powdered material from the upper surface of the powder bed without touching the upper surface; and a controller operatively coupled to the power source, the powder dispensing member, the powder leveling member, and the dust removal member, wherein the controller is programmed to:
(i) directing the powder dispensing member to dispense a first layer of the powder material into the enclosure to provide the powder bed having a first upper surface, (ii) directing the energy beam from the power source toward the first layer of powder material
157 ►4 rM.-K * .t.VLÍ so that it generates at least one pore-ren-k · -Méí 'obge-td ir jt Mexican Institute i
OF THE PRCVIBDAO V · ..i
[NPV5TÍUAL .'I-three-dimensional starting from a portion 'of the first layer, (iii) directing the powder dispensing member to dispense a second layer of the powder material into the enclosure, wherein the second layer of the powder material comprises a second upper surface, (iv) directing the powder leveling member to shear the second layer of powder material to form a first flat surface, wherein the first flat surface is at or below the second top surface and (v) directing the dust removal member to remove substantially all of the powder material that is on top of a second flat surface of the second layer of the powder material, wherein the second flat surface is located below the first flat surface.
The power source can provide a beam of energy to the powdered material and thereby transform the powdered material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to form a hardened material, wherein the hardened material can form at least a part of the object. three-dimensional. The second flat surface can be arranged on top of the first upper surface. In some modalities, at the moment when the member of
158
<img file="MX355451B_D0076.tif" />
••on.
Powder leveling shears the second powder to form the first flat surface, at least the portion of the three-dimensional object is displaced about 300 microns or less. The powder dispensing member can be separated from the exposed surface of the powder bed by a gap. The gap can have a gap distance (eg, vertical gap distance) that can be from about 10 microns to about 50 millimeters. In some embodiments, when the powder material exits the powder dispensing member into a room environment and moves in the direction of the powder bed, it encounters at least one obstruction. In some examples, during operation, the powder dispensing member may be in communication (eg, fluid) with the powder bed along a path that includes at least one obstruction. The obstruction may comprise a rough surface. The obstruction may comprise an inclined surface that forms an angle with the upper surface of the powder bed. The dust removal member can be integrated with the dust dispensing member as a dust dispensing and removing member. The powder dispensing and removal member may comprise one or more powder outlet ports
159 (A- ·· '-and one or more vacuum inlet ports, of ElROPomie wrpde' powder dispensing and removal may comprise one or more powder outlets and one or more vacuum inlets. The powder dispensing and removal member it may comprise one or more powder outlet ports and one or more vacuum inlet ports that are alternately arranged. The powder dispensing and removal member may comprise one or more powder outlet ports and one or more vacuum inlet ports operating sequentially. The powder dispensing and removal member may comprise one or more powder outlets and one or more vacuum inlets operating sequentially. The dust removal member may comprise a vacuum nozzle.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to (a) deliver a first layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing member to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the first layer comprises a first upper surface; (b) directing a beam of energy from a power source into the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce at least a portion of the object
160
<img file="MX355451B_D0077.tif" />
three-dimensional; (c) after producing by SiÓfi '
INDUSTRIAL of the three-dimensional object, supplying a second layer of the powder material from the powder dispensing member to the powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the second layer of the powder material comprises a second upper surface; (d) directing a dust removal member operatively coupled to the dust leveling member to remove substantially all of the powder material that is on top of a second flat surface of the second layer of powder material, wherein the second flat surface is located below the first flat surface and where removal occurs in the absence of contact with the powder bed.
In another aspect, an apparatus for generating a three-dimensional object comprises (a) a powder bed comprising powder material; (b) a powder dispenser that dispenses a predetermined amount of powder material at a position in the powder bed, wherein the powder dispenser is disposed on top of the powder bed and is separated from the powder bed by a gap; and (c) a leveling mechanism configured to level the powder material in the powder bed without relocating the excess amount of powder material to a different position in the powder bed.
161
<img file="MX355451B_D0078.tif" />
powder, where the leveling mechanism is located from the powder bed and laterally adjacent to the powder.
The leveling mechanism may comprise a blade. The leveling mechanism may comprise a blade that executes the shear. The leveling mechanism may comprise a suction device that sucks up excess powder material. The leveling mechanism may comprise a device for collecting excess powder material. The leveling mechanism may comprise a device for removing excess powder material from the powder bed.
In another aspect, an apparatus for forming a three-dimensional object comprises a controller that is programmed to (a) deliver a first layer of the powder material from a powder dispensing mechanism to a powder bed operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member; (b) directing an energy beam from an energy source towards the powder bed to transform at least a portion of the powder material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to produce the three-dimensional object; (c) supplying a second layer of the powder material from the powder dispensing member to the powder bed, wherein the
162
Μ ρ I zS / SWá rtTOTC MEXICAN l - 'i
TO
UermnO Mc.'IICANO and. _ second layer is arranged adjacent to the first directing a dg leveling mechanism. .ροΐ3Γχ ^ «- ^. <= ιαρ-1 · to do operatively to the powder dispensing member to level
<td>the</td><td>exposed surface</td><td>of</td><td>bed of</td><td>dust,</td><td>on</td><td>where the</td>
<td colspan="3">leveling comprises removing</td><td>the excess</td><td colspan="2">of the material</td><td>powdered</td>
<td>without</td><td>relocate quantity</td><td>on</td><td>excess of</td><td>material</td><td>on</td><td>powder in</td>
<td>a</td><td>different position in</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">dust bed.</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>On</td><td>another aspect, a</td><td colspan="2">method for</td><td>generate</td><td colspan="2">an object</td>
<td colspan="2">three-dimensional comprises</td><td>(to)</td><td colspan="2">provide a</td><td colspan="2">first layer</td>
of the powdered material in an enclosure to provide a bed of powder; (b) generating at least a portion of the three-dimensional object from at least a portion of the powdered material; (c) dispensing a second layer of the powder material into the powder bed, wherein the second layer of the powder material comprises an exposed surface; and (d) leveling the exposed surface, wherein the leveling comprises removing the excess powder material without relocating the excess amount of powder material to a different position in the powder bed.
In another aspect, a system for generating a three-dimensional object comprises an enclosure that houses a bed of powder; an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the powdered material and thereby transforms the
163 TNÍTITUTO MEXICANO 'powdered material into a material transformed that later to form a final material, ....... qn ••. -where · - the hardened material can form at least a part of the three-dimensional object; a powder dispensing member that dispenses the powder material into the powder bed; a powder leveling member that levels an exposed surface of the powder bed without relocating the excess amount of powder material to a different position in the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source, the powder dispensing member, the powder leveling member, and the dust removal member and is programmed to: (i) directing the powder dispenser to dispense a first layer of the powder material into the powder bed, (ii) receive instructions to generate at least part of the three-dimensional object, (iii) generate at least the part of the three-dimensional object a start from a portion of the powdered material according to the instructions, (iv) directing the powder dispenser to dispense a second layer of the powder material having an exposed surface 20 and (v) directing the powder leveling member to level the exposed surface.
Additional aspects and advantages of the present disclosure will be apparent to those skilled in the art as
164
PI | wyrri'iπτι μι · a) ···, · · - *** - · * · * *. » from the following description detajllaadPI ^ Jgj ^^ ofti ^, .. á, e. only illustrative modalities of the present disclosure are shown and described. As will be understood, the present disclosure may be practiced in other different embodiments and modifications may be made to its various details in various apparent respects, all without departing from the disclosure. Accordingly, the drawings and description are to be considered illustrative and not restrictive in nature.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
All publications, patents and patent applications mentioned in this description are incorporated herein by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application had been indicated to be incorporated individually and specifically by reference.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention will be obtained by consulting the following
165
ΙΜΡΪ
MEXICAN BOTITITC 'ι / ·' ·
OF THE PROPERTY AND -. ..
detailed description that sets out illusft'ff ^ FE ^ asV- ^ r '' modalities which use the principles of the accompanying drawings or figures (also Figure in the present description), of which:
Figure 1 illustrates a schematic of a three-dimensional (3D) printing system and its components;
Figure 2 illustrates a schematic of the cooling member provided in the 3D printing system;
Figure 3 illustrates a detailed view of the formation of a single solidified layer in the 3D printing process;
Figure 4 shows a graph of a temperature history over time of a dust layer or a group of dust layers;
Figure 5 schematically illustrates the volume of the powder bed heated by the primary and supplemental sources of energy;
Figure 6 illustrates a timeline of the 3D printing process for a single layer;
Figure 7 illustrates a flow chart describing a 3D printing process;
Figure 8 schematically illustrates a computer control system that is programmed or configured in any other way to facilitate 3D object formation;
166
<img file="MX355451B_D0079.tif" />
Figure 9 represents a schematic of selected components of a three-dimensional (3D) printing system which can be used to maintain flat uniformity of a powder layer;
Figure 10A schematically represents an air knife for depositing powder on a substrate; Figure 10B schematically represents a curved tube for depositing powder on the substrate;
Figure 11 depicts a rake for pushing, spreading and / or leveling powder along a substrate without destabilizing a 3D object in the powder;
Figures 12A-12F schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for spreading and / or leveling the powder material;
Figures 13A-13D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for dispensing the powder material;
Figures 14A-14D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for spreading and leveling the powder material;
Figure 15 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of a leveling mechanism and a powder dispenser;
167
IMPI
<img file="MX355451B_D0080.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE _ _ ___, ·. OF THE PROPERTY
Figures 16A-16D represent vertical lateral cross-sectional burns of dtverwa me. eaniumee »» * to dispense the powder material;
Figure 17 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for dispensing powder material;
Figures 18A-18D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for dispensing the powder material;
Figures 19A-19D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for dispensing the powder material;
Figure 20 schematically represents vertical lateral cross-sections of a blade having a sharp-edged bottom;
Figure 21A depicts the exposed metal planes within a powder material layer prior to leveling of the powder material layer; Figure 21B depicts the metal planes exposed within a layer of powder material after leveling of the layer of powder material that was deposited on the planes in Figure 21A, using a leveling mechanism described in Figure 21A. present description;
168
I ίνί Ρ ϊ iNSTrruTc mf-licano / rir i, rrr.rtrr.in M * 5 .. ~ i ~ 3 Ííl,
OF THE PROPERTY
Figure 22 schematically represents a<sup>!</sup>S<sup>YOU</sup>and<sup>Í</sup>ecc<sup>i</sup>5cn-e's vertical lateral cross-sections of an aerial view of the present description;
Figure 23 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of a dust removal system (eg a suction device) described in the present description;
Figure 24 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of a mechanism for spreading, leveling and stirring the powder material;
Figures 25A-25C schematically represent bottom views of various mechanisms for removing powdered material;
Figures 26A-26D schematically represent successive stages of a method for dispensing and leveling a layer of the powder material;
Figures 27A-27D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various powder dispensing members described in the present disclosure;
Y
Figure 28 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of a powder dispensing member described in the present disclosure.
169
<img file="MX355451B_D0081.tif" />
Figures scale. The present and the components in them p; iPÍSeu ^ ffl®Aoe ^ fe¿ ± '' 'e [
INDUSTRIAL various components described in the figures in description may not be to scale.
DESCRIPTION
DETAILED
While various embodiments of the invention have been shown and described in the present description, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, changes, and substitutions may come to the mind of those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described in the present description can be used.
Three-dimensional printing (also 3D printing) generally refers to a process for generating a 3D object. For example, 3D printing can refer to successively adding layers of the material or joining layers of the material or parts of layers of the material to form a 3D structure, in a controlled manner (eg, under automatic control). In the 3D printing process, the deposited material can be fused, sintered, melted, bonded, or connected in any other way to form at least a part of the 3D object. Fusion, sinter, melt,
170
ItlVi «srrrurombgcaw V: · ·. ' , -. · DE LA PROVÍSSAI) V 'join or connect in any other way !, the present description is called collecti ^ amsnter ^ fcTans-f ossarel material (for example, powder material). Fusing the material may include melting or sintering the material. Bonding may comprise chemically bonding. Chemically binding may comprise covalent bonding. Examples of 3D printing include additive printing (eg, layer-by-layer printing or additive manufacturing). The impression
3D can also include subtractive printing.
The material can comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. The allotropic variety of single carbon can comprise amorphous carbon, graphite, graphene, diamond, or fullerene. The fullerene can be selected from the group consisting of a spherical, elliptical, linear and tubular fullerene. The fullerene can comprise buckyespheres or carbon nanotubes. In some embodiments, the material can comprise an organic material, for example a polymer or a resin. The material can comprise a solid or a liquid. The solid material can comprise powdered material. The powder material can be coated with a coating (eg organic coating such as organic material (eg plastic coating)). Powdered material can
171
ÍMPP
OF THE PROPERTY comprise sand. Liquid material can coffl ^ Wii into reactors, bags, or droplets. The material 1 '~ cofllpcrrtrwR® »feado,<sub>;</sub> it can be compartmentalized into one or more layers. The material can comprise at least two materials. The second material can be a reinforcing material (for example, which forms a fiber). The reinforcing material can comprise a carbon fiber, Kevlar®, Twaron®, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, or fiberglass. The material can comprise powder (eg granular material) or wires.
3D printing methodologies can comprise printing
3D by extrusion, wire, granular, laminated, photopolymerization or energy bed and ink jet head. Extrusion 3D printing can comprise robotic casting, fused deposition modeling (FDM), or fused filament fabrication (FFF). Wireframe 3D printing may comprise electron beam fabrication (EBF3). Granular 3D printing can comprise direct laser metal sintering (DMLS), electron beam melting (EBM), selective laser melting (SLM), selective heat sintering (SHS), or selective laser sintering (SLS). Inkjet head and energy bed 3D printing may comprise gypsum (PP) -based 3D printing. Lamination 3D printing can comprise the
172
Λ. Λ. .1
... ÍNsrrruromexicano · · <
manufacture of laminated objects (LOM). · 3¾ $ £> £ light curing may comprise thisj & ftaXiJiQg.j ^ ajja_ (SLA), digital light processing (DLP), or laminated object fabrication (LOM).
Three-dimensional printing methodologies can differ from methods traditionally used in semiconductor device fabrication (eg, vapor deposition, etching, annealing, masking, or molecular beam epitaxy). In some cases, printing
3D may further comprise one or more printing methodologies that are traditionally used in the manufacture of semiconductor devices. Printing methodologies
3D can be distinguished from vapor deposition methods such as chemical vapor deposition, physical vapor deposition, or electrochemical deposition. In some cases, 3D printing may also include vapor deposition methods.
The fundamental length scale of the 3D printed object (for example, the diameter, equivalent spherical diameter, diameter
<td>of</td><td>circle</td><td>circumscribed or</td><td>the</td><td>greater than</td><td>the height, the</td><td>wide and</td>
<td>the</td><td colspan="2">length) can be</td><td>to the</td><td colspan="3">less than about 50</td>
<td colspan="2">micrometers</td><td>(pm), 8 0 pm,</td><td> 100</td><td>pm, 120</td><td>pm, 150 pm,</td><td>170 pm,</td>
<td> 200</td><td>pm, 230</td><td>pm, 250 pm,</td><td> 270</td><td>pm, 300</td><td>pm, 4 00 pm,</td><td>500 pm,</td>
173 ίΐί ΡϊΟ> ξΐ «CTmiTnucvirík:» ·. '........ ·· »*.<sup>J</sup>
<td> 600</td><td>μπι, 7 00 μπι,</td><td> 800</td><td>μτη,</td><td> 1</td><td>MEXICAN INSTITUTE i ' £ - * e LA PROrlECAi) '7 <sup>1</sup> - ι · ΐ * / * 3 / millimeter (mm), 1mn \ 5</td>
<td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>mm,</td><td>1 centimeter</td><td>(cm)</td><td>, i.</td><td> 5</td><td>cm, 2 cm, 10 cm, 20 cm, 30 cm, 40</td>
<td>cm,</td><td>50 cm, 60 cm,</td><td> 70</td><td>cm,</td><td> 80</td><td>cm, 90 cm, 1 m, 2 m, 3 m, 4 m, 5</td>
<td>m,</td><td>10 m, 50 m,</td><td> 80</td><td>m</td><td>or</td><td>100 m. The length scale</td>
fundamental of 3D printed object can be maximum about 1,000m, 500m, 100m, 80m, 50m, 10m, 5m, 3m, 2m, 1m, 90cm, 80cm, 60 cm, 50 cm, 40 cm, 30 cm, cm, 10 cm or 5 cm. In some cases, the fundamental length scale of the 3D printed object may be between any of the fundamental length scales mentioned above. For example, the fundamental length scale of the object
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>μπι a</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 120</td><td>μπι a</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 120</td><td>μπι</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 200</td><td>μιη</td>
<td>3D printed can</td><td>to be</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 1,000</td><td>m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 1,000</td><td>m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 10</td><td>m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>i about 1</td><td>m,</td><td>from</td>
approximately 150 μπι at approximately 10 m.
The term powder, as used in the present description, generally refers to a solid that has fine particles. The powder can also be called particulate material. Powders can be granular materials. In some examples, powders are particles that have a
174
-X *.
Ό ΊΓ / Τ '.;
mean fundamental length scale® * diameter, equivalent spherical diameter, diameter of the circumscribed circle or the greater of the height, width and length) of at least about 5 nanometers (nm), 10 nm, 20 nm, 40 nm , 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm, 400 nm, 500 nm, pm, 5, 10 pm, 15 pm, 20 pm, 35 pm, 30 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm, pm, 55 pm, 60 pm, 65 pm, 70 pm, 75 pm, 80 pm or 100 pm.
The particles comprised in the powder may have a maximum average fundamental length scale of about 100 pm, 80 pm, 75 pm, 70 pm, 65 pm, 60 pm,
<td>55 pm,</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 45</td><td>pm, 4 0</td><td>pm, 35</td><td>pm, 30 pm, 25</td><td>pm, 20 pm, 15</td>
<td>pm, 10</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 5</td><td>p.m,</td><td>1 pm,</td><td>500 nm,</td><td colspan="2">400nm, 300nm, 200nm, 100</td>
<td>nm, 50</td><td>nm,</td><td> 40</td><td>nm,</td><td>30 nm</td><td>, 20 nm</td><td>, 10 nm or 5</td><td>nm. In some</td>
<td>cases,</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">dust</td><td>can</td><td>to have</td><td>a scale</td><td>of length</td>
average fundamental between any of the values of the
<td colspan="2">length scale</td><td colspan="2">fundamental of the particle</td><td colspan="2">average</td>
<td colspan="4">mentioned above. For example, the scale of</td><td colspan="2">length</td>
<td colspan="2">average fundamental</td><td>of the particles</td><td>can</td><td>to be</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 5</td><td>nm at approximately</td><td> 100</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>pm at approximately</td><td> 100</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>pm at approximately</td><td> 45</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 5</td><td>pm at approximately</td><td> 80</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
175 about 20? 'ηι Γ * -f'
Ivjl. <. L J. \
INSTITUTO AíViCANO Vf '· -ÜZ DE LA FKOPIEDAD \
Hm at about 500 nm at about * 5U μπι.
Dust can be made up of individual particles. The particles can be spherical, oval, prismatic, cubic, or irregular in shape. Particles can have the fundamental length scale. The powder can be composed of a mixture of particles of homogeneous shapes so that all the particles have practically the same shape and magnitude of the fundamental length scale within a maximum of 1%, 5%, 8%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%,%, 50%, 60%, or 70% of the fundamental length scale distribution. In some cases, the powder may be a heterogeneous mixture such that the particles have variable shape and / or magnitude of the fundamental length scale.
The term base as used in the present description, generally refers to any workpiece on which a material used to form a 3D object is placed. The 3D object can be formed directly on the base, directly from the base or adjacent to the base. The object
3D can be formed on top of the base. In some cases, the 3D object is not in contact with the base. The 3D object can be suspended adjacent to the base (for example, above
176 her). Sometimes the base can be arranged 'J ^^ gu ^ fe-raíLp * .. ¾
INDUSTRIAL '' ·.
C7 '·'
Trra't
V ,. <sup>;</sup>· On the lower part of an enclosure. The substrate can be arranged in an enclosure (eg, a chamber). The enclosure can have one or more walls formed from various types of materials, such as simple metal, metallic alloy (eg, stainless steel), ceramic, or an allotropic variety of simple carbon. The enclosure can have shapes of various cross sections, such as circular, triangular, square, rectangular or partial shapes or combinations thereof. The enclosure can be thermally insulated. The enclosure may comprise thermal insulation. The enclosure may comprise a sealing lip (eg, a flexible sealing lip). The sealing lip can provide thermal insulation. The sealing lip can provide environmental (eg, gaseous) insulation. The enclosure may comprise an open top. The enclosure may comprise an open side or an open bottom. The base can comprise a single metal, metal alloy, ceramic, allotropic variety of carbon, or polymer. The base can comprise stone, zeolite, clay or glass. The simple metal can include iron, molybdenum, tungsten, copper, aluminum, gold, silver, or titanium. A metallic alloy can include steel
177
INSTITUTE ΜEXICAiΙΟ ΐ .. · <
OE LA PROPULSAD \ ·. ......
(for example, stainless steel). A matter<sup>l</sup>'P<sup>G</sup>-'efé<sup>L</sup> oé-f-ámica may include alumina. The base can- ^ rrrcitftf 'silicon, germanium, silica, sapphire, zinc oxide, carbon (for example, graphite, graphene, diamond, amorphous carbon, carbon fiber, carbon nanotubes or fullerene), SiC, A1N, GaN, spinel, coated silicon, silicon on oxide, silicon carbide on oxide, gallium nitride, indium nitride, titanium dioxide, aluminum nitride. In some cases, the base comprises a susceptor (that is, a material that can absorb electromagnetic energy and convert it into heat). The base, the substrate and / or the enclosure can be fixed or mobile.
In some examples the powder material, the base, or both the powder and the base comprise a material in which its constituents (for example, atoms) easily lose their outer electronic shell, resulting in a free-flowing electron cloud within your otherwise solid disposition. In some examples the powder, the base, or both the powder and the base comprise a material characterized in that it has high electrical conductivity, low electrical resistivity, high thermal conductivity, or high density. High electrical conductivity can be at least about l * 10<sup>5</sup> Siemens per meter (S / m), 5 * 10<sup>5</sup> S / m, l * 10<sup>6</sup> S / m, 5 * 10<sup>6</sup> S / m, l * 10<sup>7</sup> S / m, 5 * 10<sup>7</sup> S / mol * 10<sup>8</sup> Ye. The
178 η ΡI X, X. symbol * designates the mathematical operation ttsepaa
IND'USTdlAI »
High electrical conductivity can be about l * 10<sup>5</sup> S / m about 1 * 10® S / m. Low electrical resistivity can be at most about l * 10<sup>-5</sup> ohm meter (Q * m), 5 * 10<sup>-6</sup> Q * m, l * 10<sup>-6</sup> O * m, 5 * 10<sup>-7</sup> Q * m, l * 10 '<sup>7</sup> ü * m,
5*10“<sup>8</sup> ol * 10 ~<sup>8</sup> Q * m. Low electrical resistivity can be about l * 10 '<sup>5</sup> O * m about l * 10 '<sup>8</sup> Q * m. High thermal conductivity can be at least about 20 Watts per meter Kelvin (W / mK), 50
W / mK, 100 W / mK, 150 W / mK, 200 W / mK, 205 W / mK, 300 W / mK, 350
W / mK, 400 W / mK, 450 W / mK, 500 W / mK, 550 W / mK, 600 W / mK, 700
W / mK, 800 W / mK, 900 W / mK, or 1,000 W / mK. The high thermal conductivity can be from about 20 W / mK to about 1,000 W / mK. The high density can be at least about 1.5 grams per cubic centimeter (g / cm<sup>3</sup>), 2 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 3 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 4 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 5 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 6 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 7 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 8 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 9 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 10 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 11 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 12 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 13 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 14 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 15 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 16 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 17 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 18 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 19 g / cm<sup>3</sup>, 20 g / cm<sup>3</sup> or 25 g / cm<sup>3</sup>. The high density can be about 1.g / cm<sup>3</sup> at about 1000 25 g / cm<sup>3</sup>.
The layers of a powder material can be provided additively or sequentially. At least parts of the layers can be transformed to form at least a fraction (in the
179 «ΝΓΠΤΙ'ΤΟ XTOHCaNC V present description also uses a porcico ^^ rRub '' hutía part) of a hardened 3D object"<sup>1</sup>· (P <¡> £ ·· - ^^ sniplo, solidified). Sometimes a transformed powder layer can comprise a cross section of a 3D object (eg a horizontal cross section). A layer can be at least about 0.1 microns thick.
<td>(μπι), 0.5 μπι, 1.0 μπι, 10</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 50</td><td>μπι, 100 μπι, 150</td><td>μπι, 2 00 μπι,</td>
<td>300 μιη, 4 00 μιη, 500 μπι,</td><td> 600</td><td>μπι,</td><td colspan="2">7 00 μπι, 8 00 μπι, 900 μπι ο</td>
<td colspan="3">1,000 μιη. A cape may have</td><td>a thickness like</td><td>ι maximum of</td>
<td>10 about 1,000 μιη,</td><td> 900</td><td>μπι,</td><td>800 μπι, 700μπι,</td><td>600 μπι, 500</td>
<td>μιη, 4 50 μιη, 4 00 μπι, 350</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 300</td><td>μπι, 250 μιη, 200</td><td>μπι, 150 μπι,</td>
<td>100 μπι, 7 5 μπι, 50 μπι, 4 0</td><td>μπι,</td><td colspan="2">30 μπι, 2 0 μπι, 10 μπι,</td><td>5 μπι, 1 μπι</td>
or 0.5 μπι. or less. A layer can have any value from the above-mentioned values of layer thickness. For example, the layer can be approximately
<td>1,000 μπι a</td><td>about 0</td><td> . 1</td><td>μη, 800</td><td>μη</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>1 μπι, from 600 μιη to</td><td colspan="2">about 20</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td>
<td colspan="2">300 μπι to approximately 30</td><td>μη</td><td>or 1,000</td><td>μη</td><td>to</td>
approximately 10 μιη. The material composition of at least one layer may differ from the material composition within at least one other layer in the powder bed. Materials of at least one layer can differ in their
180
Ϊ you.
tNSTnvTC MFJ3CAW0 crystal structure of the '·' structure (of the material within at least one other layer in the ^ XeuJacx-.de ·. powder.
The materials of at least one layer may differ in their grain structure from the grain structure of the material within at least one other layer in the powder bed.
Materials in at least one layer may differ on the fundamental length scale of their powder material from the fundamental length scale of the material within at least one other layer in the powder bed. A layer can comprise two or more types of materials in any combination. For example, two or more simple metals, two or more metallic alloys, two or more ceramics, two or more allotropic varieties of single carbon. For example, a simple metal and a metallic alloy, a simple metal and a ceramic, a simple metal and an allotropic variety of simple carbon, a metallic alloy and a ceramic, a metallic alloy and an allotropic variety of simple carbon, a ceramic and an allotropic variety of simple carbon. All layers deposited during the 3D printing process can be of the same material composition. In some cases, a metallic alloy is formed on site during the process of transforming the material into powder. In some cases, layers of different compositions can
181
<img file="MX355451B_D0082.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V ...
be deposited in a predetermined pattern: PoiPíMf ^ ggj ^ oyj-caiia layer can have a composition that increases or decreases in a certain element or in a certain type of material.
In some examples, each even layer can have one composition and each odd layer can have another composition.
The various compositions of the layers can follow an algorithm of a mathematical series. In some cases, at least one area within a layer has a different material composition than another area within that layer.
A metallic material (eg, a simple metal or a metallic alloy) can comprise small amounts of non-metallic materials, such as, for example, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen. In some cases, the metallic material may comprise the non-metallic materials in trace amounts. A trace amount can be a maximum of approximately 100,000 parts per million (ppm), 10,000 ppm,
1,000 ppm, 500 ppm, 400 ppm, 200 ppm, 100 ppm, 50 ppm, 10 ppm, 5 ppm, or 1 ppm (based on weight, m / m) of the non-metallic material. A trace amount can comprise at least about 10 ppt, 100 ppt, 1 ppb, 5 ppb, 10 ppb, 50 ppb, 100 ppb, 200 ppb, 400 ppb, 500 ppb, 1,000 ppb, 1 ppm, 10 ppm, 100 ppm. , 500 ppm, 1,000 ppm or 10,000 ppm (based on weight, m / m) of the non-metallic material. A trace amount
182 it can be any value among those mentioned above. For example, it can be about 10 parts<sup>r</sup>Jt il ii. i INMHUTO MEXICANO I. ' ·.
'cant. /'4'
-tra-zá
U.de., trace per trillion (ppt) to
<td>approximately</td><td> 100,000</td><td>ppm,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>ppb a</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 100,000</td><td>ppm,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>ppm to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 10,000</td><td>ppm or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>ppb a</td>
about 1,000 ppm.
In some cases, adjacent components are separated from each other by one or more intermediate layers. In one example, a first layer is adjacent to a second layer when the first layer is in direct contact with the second layer. In another example, a first layer is adjacent to a second layer when the first layer is separated from the second layer by at least one layer (eg, a third layer). The intermediate layer can be of any layer size described in the present description.
The term auxiliary elements, as used in the present description, generally refers to elements that are part of a 3D printed object, but are not part of the desired, intended, designed, ordered or final 3D object. Auxiliary elements (eg, auxiliary supports) can provide structural support during and / or after 3D object formation. Auxiliary elements
183
JLXVIif j; ¡
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ''
D6 THE PROPERTY, they can make possible the extraction of the energy of T<sup>, s1</sup>3<sup>l</sup>Éfje that is formed. The examples of elements auxTTTaTe ^^ dm ^ Téhdéh thermal fins, anchors, handles, supports, pillars, columns, frame, feet, scaffold, flanges, projections, projections, molds or other stabilization elements. In some cases, the auxiliary support is a scaffold that encloses the 3D object or part of it. The scaffold may comprise lightly sintered or lightly fused powder material.
The present description provides systems, apparatus and methods for 3D printing an object from a material (eg, powder material). The object can be pre-designed or designed in real time (i.e. during the 3D printing process). Printing method
3D can be an additive method in which a first layer is printed and after that a volume of a material is added to the first layer as separate successive layers. Each additional successive layer can be added to the previous layer by transforming (eg, fusing, melting) a fraction of the powder material.
Reference will now be made to the figures, where like numbers refer to like parts all the way through. I know
184
7) π
V / Z * Λ '
INSTITUTO MEXICANO and you will appreciate that the figures and elements <sup>:</sup> draw to scale necessarily. .............. ......... .................
An example of a system that can be used to generate an object using a 3D printing process is shown in
Figure 1. The system may comprise a powder bed 101 on a base 102. In some cases, the base 102 can be used during the forming process. In some situations, the incipient object or object formed during the 3D printing process, floats on the powder bed 101 without touching the base 102. The base 102 can support at least one, two, three, four, five, six, seven , eight, nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen or fifteen layers of dust. The base can be heated or cooled to a predetermined temperature or according to a temperature gradient.
The temperature gradient can be defined for a predetermined amount of time. The default temperature can be at least about 10
<td>Celsius degrees</td><td>(° C), 20</td><td>° C,</td><td> 25</td><td>° c,</td><td>30 ° C, 40 ° C, 50 ° C, 60 ° C,</td>
<td>70 ° C, 80 ° C, 90</td><td>° C, 100</td><td>° c,</td><td> 150</td><td>° c,</td><td>200 ° C, 250 ° C, 300 ° C, 350</td>
<td>° C, 400 ° C, 450</td><td>° C, 500</td><td>° c,</td><td> 550</td><td>° c,</td><td>600 ° C, 650 ° C, 700 ° C, 750</td>
<td colspan="2">° C, 800 ° C, 850 ° C,</td><td> 900</td><td>° C</td><td>or</td><td>1,000 ° C. Temperature</td>
The default can be a maximum of about 1,000 ° C, 900 ° C, 800 ° C, 700 ° C, 600 ° C, 650 ° C, 600 ° C, 550 ° C, 500 ° C,
185
<img file="MX355451B_D0083.tif" />
-F, íik ·.
450 ° C, 400 ° C, 350 ° C, 300 ° C, 250 ° C, 200 ° C, ° C or 10 ° C. The predetermined temperature can be, between any of the mentioned temperature values
<td>previously.</td><td>For</td><td>example</td><td colspan="2">, approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>° C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td colspan="2">1,000 ° C,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 100</td><td>° C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 600</td><td>° c,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 200</td><td>° C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 500</td><td>° C or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>° C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 450</td><td>° C. The</td><td>base</td><td colspan="3">it can be heat stable.</td><td>The</td>
<td>base 102 can</td><td>to have</td><td>walls</td><td>. The</td><td colspan="2">base that has walls</td><td colspan="2">can</td>
referred to as a container that houses a bed of powder.
The base (eg, the walls of the base) may comprise temperature sensors (eg, one or more thermocouples). Temperature sensors can be operatively coupled to a controller. The controller may comprise a processor (eg, a computer). In some cases, measurements of the temperature of the powder bed 101 and / or the base 102 can be made optically, for example, through the use of an infrared (IR) temperature sensor. Temperature sensors can monitor the temperature at the edges of the powder bed, at one or more random locations on the powder bed, in the center of the powder bed, at the bottom, or in any combination of these. Temperature sensors can monitor
186
<img file="MX355451B_D0084.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF THE PRC-PIJaTY V
INDUSTRIAL in instants the temperature in random predetermined instants or in arbitrarily determined instants. In some cases, the base walls can be insulated. The base (eg, the base walls) can be continuously or sporadically heated or cooled to maintain a desired powder bed temperature. The powder bed may have an exposed top surface, a covered top surface, or a partially exposed and partially covered top surface. The powder bed can be at least about 1mm, 10mm, 25mm, 50mm, 100mm, 200mm, 300mm, 400mm, or 500mm wide. The powder bed can be at least about 1mm, 10mm, 25mm, 50mm, 100mm, 200mm, 300mm, 400mm, or 500mm deep. The powder bed can be at least about 1mm, 10mm, 25mm, 50mm, 100mm, 200mm,
300 mm, 400mm or 500mm long. The powder bed 101 on the base 102 may be adjacent to a powder reservoir (eg, 103). The powder reservoir can be arranged in a container (eg 104). The container can be fixed or mobile. The powder bed 101 can be kept in thermal equilibrium throughout the printing process or near equilibrium. Average dust bed temperature can fluctuate thermally by at least 0.1 ° C, 0.2 ° C, 0.3 ° C, 0.4
187
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V, ° C, 0.5 ° C, 0.6 ° C, 0.7 ° C, 0.8 ° C, 0.9 ° C, 1 ° C, <sup>D</sup>S<sup>you</sup>gte<sup>or</sup>C ^ | ¿Sír 5 ° C, 6 ° C, 7 ° C, 8 ° C, 9 ° C, 10 ° C, 15 ° C, 20 Χ ^ 3ίΐ5 £ ^ .4: 0.5θ..θ- 50 ° C or less during the printing process. The average temperature of the powder bed can thermally fluctuate a maximum of approximately 50 ° C, 40 ° C, 30 ° C, 20 ° C, 10 ° C or 5 ° C during the printing process. Average powder bed temperature can thermally fluctuate between any of the above-mentioned temperature fluctuation values. For example, the average temperature of the powder bed can fluctuate in a temperature range of 50 ° C to 5 ° C or 30 ° C to 5 ° C.
During the printing process, the powder in the powder bin (eg 103) can be moved from the bin to the base (eg 102) to provide fresh powder, recycled powder, cold powder, or any combination of them to the bed. powder (eg 101) on the foundation. The powder can be moved from the powder reservoir to the powder bed by a layer dispensing mechanism (also in the present disclosure mechanism eg 105. Also in the present description layer addition mechanism). The layer dispensing mechanism may be a transfer mechanism (eg, transfer device), which may include one or more
188
IMPIAS
MEXICAN INSTITUTE. i, '4 Τ'
Say THE PROPERTY Cü, '«Aa.
industrial moving parts. The coating dispensing mechanism may be a device that can move the powder, deposit the powder, level the powder, remove the powder, or any of their combinations.
The dispensing mechanism of the layer can translate practically horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The layer dispensing mechanism can be laterally translated. In some examples, the base, substrate, enclosure, or powder bed can be relocated. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise springs. The base, the substrate, the enclosure or the powder bed can be translated practically horizontal (for example, from right to left and vice versa), practically vertical (for example, from top to bottom and vice versa) or diagonal. At least one of the enclosure, the substrate and the base may comprise a platform that can be lowered (eg, a lift). The elevator can move the powder bed (or the powder container) to a first position. The powder can be deposited on the powder bed (or in the powder container) in the first position. The powder bed can subsequently be moved to a second position. In some examples, the second position is lower than the first position. In the second position the powder bed
<img file="MX355451B_D0085.tif" />
189
IMPI may be vertically further away from the layer dispensing mechanism, compared to the first position. In some examples, the powder bed or powder container may be fixed. In some examples, the second position is higher than the first position (for example, via the elevator). In some examples, the layer dispensing mechanism can be moved to the second position. The side of the layer dispensing mechanism that is closest to the exposed surface of the powder bed is referred to herein as the bottom of the layer dispensing mechanism. When the powder bed (or the powder container) is in the second position, at least part of the deposited powder can be located vertically on top of the bottom of the layer dispensing mechanism. Sometimes the container that houses the powder bed may be devoid of powder material. Sometimes the container that houses the powder bed comprises the powder material.
The layer dispensing mechanism can be laterally translated along the powder bed so that at least part of the powder material obstructs the movement of the layer dispensing mechanism in the second position. The coating dispensing mechanism can push, squeeze or collect the powdery material that clogs you when it moves
190
INSTITUTO MEXICANO .¡g ^ laterally. The dispensing mechanism of leveling the powder material as it moves 1 atpyai a -. ', Or length of the powder bed (eg, along the width or length of the powder bed). Leveling of the powder can result in the generation of a substantially flat uniform surface in at least one plane (eg, a horizontal plane) at the top (ie, the exposed surface) of the powder bed. Leveling the powder can result in the generation of a flat average uniform surface in at least one plane (eg, a horizontal plane) at the top of the layer of powder material. The average plane can be a plane defined by a least squares plane fit of the top of the powder layer surface. The average plane can be a plane calculated by averaging the height of the powder at each point on the upper surface of the powder bed. The layer dispensing mechanism (eg, 105) may comprise a roller, brush, rake (eg, saw tooth rake or herringbone rake), harrow, spatula, or knife blade. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a vertical cross section (for example, the cross section
191 ί;
instituto mexc ylateral) of a circle, triangle, quadra9tíjta5js ^ £ itá4¿ ^ or 'hexagon, octagon or any other po 1. E ”—7<sup>inr0</sup> In cases, the layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a roller. The roller can be a smooth roller. The roller can be a rough roller. The roller can have protrusions or recesses. The extrusions can be flexible (eg, brush) extrusions; the extrusions can be hard (eg, rake) extrusions. The extrusions can comprise a pointed end, a round end, or a blunt end. The projections or recesses can form a pattern on the roll or be randomly located on the roll. Alternatively or additionally, the layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a harrow or rake. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a paddle. The paddle may comprise a flat concave, flat convex, chisel-shaped or wedge-shaped paddle. The paddle can have a chisel or wedge shape, as well as a concave top surface (Figure 12C at 1212) that can allow dust to build up on it (eg, 1214). The paddle can be chisel or wedge shaped (for example, Figure 12B at 1207) and allow powder to slide over it, (for example,
1209). The paddle may comprise a sharp edge or a
192
Ρ <sup>7</sup> μ, institute ττ'.χζ; ·; ο ν5<sup>:;</sup>·<sup>;</sup><?
Β £ LA kJOr 15ΓΑΓ> 'Τ <; .., ..:
curved surface. The curved surface can co ^ p ^ Wn ^ eM'TÍñ radius of curvature of at least approximately C) .T '“mm, T mm, mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm, 7 mm, 8 mm, 9mm, 10mm or 11mm. The radius of curvature can be a maximum of about 12mm, 11mm, 10mm, 9mm, 8mm, 7mm, 6mm, 4mm, 3mm, 2mm or 1mm. The radius of curvature of the curved surface can have any value between the values mentioned above (for example, from about 0.5mm to about 12mm, from about 0.5mm to about 5mm, or from about 5mm to about 12mm). The layer dispensing mechanism can be comprised of a ceramic, metallic, metal alloy (eg steel) or polymeric (eg rubber) material. For example, the layer dispensing mechanism (eg 105) may comprise a rake with vertical elements that can be used to move the powder and a vertical opening between the elements.
In some cases, the layer dispensing mechanism may have a substantially convex, concave, sloping, or straight edge that touches the bed of powder. The edge of the layer dispensing mechanism can be perpendicular, parallel, or at an acute angle between zero and 90 degrees to the surface of the powder bed. The dispensing mechanism of the
193
IMPI
MEXICAN OÍSTITJTO
<img file="MX355451B_D0086.tif" />
Layer can be configured to provide uniform and / or level recycled powder, new · cold powder, hot powder, room temperature powder, or any combination of them across the upper surface of the powder bed. The powder material can be selected such that the powder material is the desired or otherwise predetermined material for the object. In some cases, a layer of the 3D object comprises a single type of material. In some examples, a layer of the 3D object may comprise a single type of simple metal or a single type of alloy. In some examples, a layer within the 3D object may comprise several types of material (eg, a simple metal and an alloy, an alloy and a ceramic, an alloy, and an allotropic variety of simple carbon). In some embodiments each type of material comprises only a single member of that type. For example: a single member of simple metal (for example, iron), a single member of metal alloy (for example, stainless steel), a single member of ceramic material (for example, silicon carbide or tungsten carbide) or a single member (eg, an allotropic variety) of simple carbon (eg, graphite). In some cases, a layer of the 3D object comprises more than one type of material. In • χ '. ·
194
V. ί some cases, a layer of the 3D object buys ^^^ j ^^^^ member of a material type. ~ ____________ _______. ...........
The simple metal can be an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal, a transition metal, a rare earth element metal, or another metal. The alkali metal can be lithium, sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, or francium. The alkaline earth metal can be beryllium, magnesium, calcium, strontium, barium, or radium. The transition metal can be scandium, titanium, vanadium, chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper, zinc, yttrium, zirconium, platinum, gold, rutherfordium, dubnium, seaborgium, bohrium, hassium, meitnerium, copernicium, niobium, iridium, molybdenum, technetium, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, silver, cadmium, hafnium, tantalum, tungsten, rhenium, or osmium. The transition metal can be mercury. The rare earth metal can be a lanthanide or an actinide.
The lanthanide metal can be lanthanum, cerium, praseodymium, neodymium, promised, samarium, europium, gadolinium, terbium, dysprosium, holmium, erbium, thulium, ytterbium, or lutetium. The actinide metal can be actinium, thorium, protactinium, uranium, neptunium, plutonium, americium, curium, berkelium, californium, einsteinium, fermium, mendelevium, nobelium or lawrence. The other metal can be aluminum, gallium, indium, tin, thallium, lead, or bismuth.
• ejíuri
195
M p J (£? '?> · »
L. IL T ,. * -;>. · Ί \
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '
The metal alloy can be a bas ^ NtSeRi ^ ieá ^ / nickel-based alloy, a beee — ete ^ eeteei ^ ef- · - ^ alloy<sup>5</sup>· 'Chromium-based alloy, cobalt-chromium-based alloy, titanium-based alloy, magnesium-based alloy, copper-based alloy, or any combination of these. The alloy may comprise an oxidation or corrosion resistant alloy. The alloy may comprise a superalloy (eg Inconel). The superalloy can comprise Inconel 600, 617, 625, 690, 718, or X-750. The metal (for example, alloyed or plain) may comprise an alloy used for applications in industries including aerospace, automotive, marine, rail, satellite, defense, oil and gas, power generation, semiconductor, fashion, construction, agriculture, printing or medical. The metal (for example, alloyed or plain) can comprise an alloy used for products comprising, devices, medical devices (for humans and veterinarians), machinery, cell phones, semiconductor equipment, generators, motors, pistons, electronics (for e.g. circuits), electronic equipment, agricultural equipment, electric motors, gears, transmission, communication equipment, computer equipment (e.g. laptop, telephone
196
<img file="MX355451B_D0087.tif" />
SM, „cell phone, Ipad), air conditioners®<sup>I</sup>F<sup>r</sup>S ^ £ ^^ x ^
INDUSTRIAL furniture, music equipment, art, jewelry, kitchen equipment or sports equipment. The metal (eg, alloyed or plain) may comprise an alloy used for products for human or veterinary applications comprising implants or prostheses. The metal alloy may comprise an alloy used for applications in the fields comprising human or veterinary surgery, implants (eg dental) or prosthetics.
The methods, apparatus, and systems of the present disclosure can be used to form 3D objects for various uses and applications. Such uses and applications include, without limitation, electronics, electronic components (eg, packages), machines, machine parts, tools, implants, prosthetics, fashion items, clothing, shoes, or jewelry. Implants can be directed (for example, embedded) into hard tissue, soft tissue, or
<td>combination of fabrics</td><td>hard and</td><td>soft.</td><td>The</td><td>implants</td><td>they can</td>
<td>adhere with tissue</td><td>hard or</td><td>soft.</td><td>The</td><td>machines</td><td>they can</td>
<td colspan="2">include motors or parts of</td><td>engines.</td><td>The</td><td>machines</td><td>they can</td>
include a vehicle. The machines may comprise machines related to aerospace applications. The machines may comprise airborne machines. The vehicle
197
Λ <sup>fr</sup> '~.
INSTITUTO MEXICANO, S, <sup>OF THE</sup>indu<sup>> IEDAD</sup> * ^ -¾¾ ^ can include airplane, drone, car, train, SicicTb ^ rai ^ • »W ^ s.T4Si ^ -xsr = £ x - - ..<sub>M</sub>. ........
ship or ferries (for example, space shuttles). The machine can include a satellite or a missile.
Uses and application may include 3D objects related to the industries and / or products mentioned above.
In some cases, the iron alloy comprises elinvar, fernic, ferroalloys, invar, iron hydride, Kovar,
Spiegeleisen, staballoy (stainless steel) or steel. In some cases, the metallic alloy is steel. The ferroalloy can comprise ferroboron, ferrocerium, ferrochrome, ferromagnesium, ferromanganese, ferromolybdenum, ferro-nickel, ferrophosphorus, ferrosilicon, ferrotitanium, ferrouranium or ferrovanadium. The iron alloy can include cast iron or pig iron. Steel can include bulat steel, chromium-moly steel, crucible steel, damascene steel, Hadfield steel, high-speed steel, micro-alloyed steel, heat-treated martensitic steel, steel
Reynolds 531, silicon steel, crossbow steel, stainless steel, tool steel, corten steel, or wootz steel. High speed steel can include Mushet steel. Stainless steel can include AL-6XN, Alloy 20,
Celestrium, Marine Class Stainless, Stainless Steel ί ΚΙ Β τ
ΜΤΪΤΓυΤΟ MEXICAN '- * - - <Γ £
198
X .fC 1 f '
WSTtTUTO MEXICANO V-Á ''. ' 'Martensitic, Surgical Stainless Steel, or ZeroiíouWM Tool steel can include steel -a<sup>1</sup> -Ina <sub>V</sub>For example, steel may comprise stainless steel, nickel steel, chrome nickel steel, molybdenum steel, chrome steel, chrome vanadium steel, tungsten steel, chrome nickel moly steel or silicon manganese steel. Steel can be comprised of any grade according to the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) standard such as 440F, 410, 312,
<td>430, 440A, 440B,</td><td>440C,</td><td> 304,</td><td>305, 304L,</td><td>304L,</td><td colspan="2">301, 304LN,</td>
<td>301LN, 2304, 316,</td><td>316L,</td><td>316LN,</td><td>316, 316LN,</td><td>- 316L,</td><td>316L,</td><td> 316,</td>
<td>317L, 2205, 409,</td><td>904L,</td><td colspan="2">321, 254SMO, 316TI</td><td>, 321H</td><td>or 304H</td><td>. The</td>
<td colspan="2">steel can comprise</td><td>steel</td><td>stainless</td><td>from to</td><td>less</td><td>a</td>
crystalline structure selected from the group consisting of austenitic, super-austenitic, ferritic, martensitic, duplex, and precipitation-hardened martensitic. Duplex stainless steel can be depleted duplex, standard duplex, super duplex, or hyper duplex. Stainless steel may comprise surgical grade stainless steel (for example, austenitic 316, martensitic 420, or martensitic
440). Austenitic 316 stainless steel can include 316L or 316LVM. The steel may include 17-4 precipitation hardened steel (also known as Type 630, to steel
199
ΒβΕ <β «*» * «*> ·> * ί * ίν, Λ -«. <>. ·· <1Ρ ί βκϊπτυτο Mexican γί »'» · ·, precipitation hardened stainless steel 17-4PH)
Titanium-based alloys can include alpha alloys, near alpha alloys, alpha and beta alloys, or beta alloys. The titanium alloy can comprise grade 1, 2, 2H, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 7H, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 16H, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 2, 23, 24, 25, 26, 26H, 27,
28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38 or higher. In some cases, the titanium-based alloy includes TÍ-6A14V or Ti-6Al-7Nb.
Nickel-based alloy can include alnico, alumel, chromel, cupro-nickel, ferro-nickel, German silver, Hastelloy,
Inconel, monel metal, nichrome, nickel-carbon, nicrosil, nisil, nitinol or soft magnetic alloys ·. Soft magnetic alloys can comprise mu-metal, permalloy, supermalloy, or brass. Brass can include nickel hydride, stainless silver, or coin silver. The cobalt alloy can include Megallium, Estelite (eg, Talonite), Ultimet, or Vitallium. The chromium alloy can include chromium or nichrome hydroxide.
Aluminum alloy can include AA-8000, Al-Li (aluminum-lithium), alnico, duralumin, Hiduminium, magnalium
Kryron, Nambe, Scandium-Aluminum or Alloy Y. The alloy of
200
The ri (π rrc, μγυ'Ωανπ ·, · s?
.If magnesium can be Elektron, Magnox or al -'Aí .-. DB '(Bergman phase). .......................
The copper alloy can comprise arsenic copper, beryllium copper, Trillion, brass, bronze, constantan, copper hydride, copper-tungsten, Corinthian bronze, cunife, cupronickel, cymbal alloys, Devarda alloy, Electrum,
Hepatizon, Heusler Alloy, Manganin, Molybdochalkos, Nickel Silver, Nordic Gold, Shakudo or Tumbaga. Brass may include calamine brass, Chinese silver, gold metal, ornamentation metal, Muntz metal, Pinchbeck metal, Prince Rupert metal, or tombac. Bronze can include Aluminum Bronze, Arsenic Bronze, Bell Metal, Florentine Bronze, Guanin, Gunmetal, Glucydur, Phosphor Bronze, Gold Bronze, or Mirror Metal.
The powder can be configured to provide support for the 3D object as it is formed in the powder bed by the 3D printing process. In some cases, a low-flow powder can support a 3D object better than a high-flow powder. A low flow powder can be achieved inter alia with a powder composed of relatively small particles, with particles of non-uniform size or with particles that are attracted to each other. The powder can be low, medium or high flowability. Powdered material can
201 ·<sup>;</sup>.
Ii. -VAT Is. Λ. ξ> · \
ΒΒΤΓΓϋΤΟ MEXICAN may have a compressibility of at least approximately «ft ^^ g
5r «*.
% Z 3%<sub>F</sub> 4 %<sub>r</sub> 5 %, 6 %<sub>t</sub> 7 % <sub>z</sub> 8%, 9% or il tά 3 an applied force of 15 kilopascals (kPa). The powder can have a maximum compressibility of about 9%,%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4.5%, 4.0%, 3.5%, 3.0%, 2.5%, 2.0%,
1.5%, 1.0%, or 0.5% in response to an applied force of 15 kilopascals (kPa). Dust can have a basic flow energy of at least about 100 millijoules (mJ), 200 mJ, 300 mJ, 400 mJ, 450 mJ, 500 mJ, 550 mJ, 600 mJ, 650 mJ,
700 mJ, 750 mJ, 800 mJ or 900 mJ. The powder can have a maximum basic flow energy of approximately 200 mJ, 300 mJ, 400 mJ, 450 mJ, 500 mJ, 550 mJ, 600 mJ, 650 mJ,
700 mJ, 750 mJ, 800 mJ, 900 mJ, or 1,000 mJ. The powder may have a basic flow energy from the values listed above for basic flow energy. For example, the powder may have a basic flux energy of from about 100 mJ to about 1,000 mJ, from about 100 mJ to about 600 mJ, or from about 500 mJ to about 1,000 mJ. The powder has a specific energy of at least about 1.0 millijoules per gram (mJ / g), 1.5 mJ / g,
2.0 mJ / g, 2.5 mJ / g, 3.0 mJ / g, 3.5 mJ / g, 4.0 mJ / g, 4.5 mJ / g or
5.0 mJ / g. The powder can have a specific energy such as
202 ra \ r \,
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V> * '· - -' DE LA PROPERTY \
ΤΠ; {tri
EICANC ______ IC / IEDAL <sub>s</sub> .. . , .
maximum of 5.0 mJ / g, 4.5 mJ / g, 4.0 mJ / g, 3.5 mj / g ^<sup>8</sup>^ 0 imf / 'g /
2.5 mJ / g, 2.0 mJ / g, 1.5 mJ / g or 1.0 mJ / g. ET'dust ^ 'can ^ e''have a specific energy from any of the above specific energy values. For example, the powder may have a specific energy of about 1.0 mJ / g to about 5.0 mJ / g, about 3.0 mJ / g to about 5 mJ / g, or about 1.0 mJ / g to about 3.5 mJ / g.
The 3D object may have auxiliary elements that can be supported by the powder bed. The 3D object may have auxiliary elements that can be supported by the powder bed and not touch the base, the substrate, the container that houses the powder bed, or the bottom of the enclosure. The three-dimensional part (the 3D object) in a partially or fully formed state can be fully supported by the powder bed (for example, without touching the substrate, the base, the container that houses the powder bed, and the enclosure). The three-dimensional part (the 3D object) in a partially or fully formed state can be fully supported by the powder bed (for example, without touching anything except the powder bed). The 3D object in a partially or fully formed state can be suspended in the powder bed without resting on any additional support structures. In some
203 ϊ <sup>ν</sup> Y
INSTITUTO MEXICANO, DE LA rXEfsSDAD ΤΛ. ·;.-.- -U ,. In cases, the 3D object in a partial state (insl ^ - ^ l dééir / incipient) or fully formed can »-f · ίtr |? ay-e l'-dust bed.
The 3D object can have various surface roughness profiles, which can be suitable for various applications. Surface roughness can be deviations in the direction of the normal vector of a real surface, from its ideal shape. Surface roughness can be measured as the arithmetic average of the roughness profile (hereinafter Ra). The value of Ra can use absolute values. The 3D object can have a value of
Ra of at least approximately 200 μπι, 100 μιη, 7 5 μιη, 50 μπι, μιη, 40 μιη, 35 μιη, 30 μιη, 25 μπι, 20 μπι, 15 μιη, 10 μιη, 7 μιη, 5 μιη, 3 pm, 1 μπι, 500 nm, 400 nm, 300 nm, 200 nm, 100 nm, 50 nm, 40 nm, or 30 nm. The formed object can have a maximum Ra value of approximately 200 μπι, 100 μπι, 75 μπι, 50 μηι, 45 μηι, 40 μπι, 35 μπι, 30 μπι, 25 μπι, 20 μπι, 15 μπι, μπι, 7 μιη , 5 μπι, 3 μη, 1 μη, 500 nm, 400 nm, 300 nm, 200 nm, 100 nm, 50 nm, 40 nm or 30 nm. The 3D object can have a Ra value between any of the Ra values mentioned above. For example, the value of Ra can be from about 30 nm to about 50 μη, from k 'ν-Λ
204
Τ. Λabout 5 pm to about '' from .y
I / .y, MEXICAN eCTITUTE \ <OF THE PROPERTY <sup>V</sup> li
MillLÍSTRÍAL pm, approximately 3 pm to approximately 30 pm, approximately 10 nm to approximately 50 pm or approximately 15 nm to approximately 80 pm. Ra values can be measured by electron microscopy (eg, scanning electron microscopy), scanning tunneling microscopy, atomic force microscopy, optical microscopy (eg, confocal, laser), or by ultrasound. Ra values can be measured by a contact or non-contact method.
The 3D object can be composed of successive layers (eg, successive cross sections) of the solid material originating from a transformed material (eg, fused, sintered, fused, bonded, or otherwise connected powdered material). The transformed powder material can be connected to a hardened (eg solidified) material. The hardened material can be within the same layer or in another layer (for example, a previous layer). In some examples, the hardened material comprises parts subsequently by the newly transformed material (by disconnected from the three-dimensional object, which are connected
205 * · Τγ-.χ *; - τ
ÁV Ά<sup>:</sup>.1 . . · \
INSTITUTE ME'GCANO, ι
DE LA ÍROílEDA © * <_ · 'í
GVD'JSTaiAL '~ for example, by a fused, sintered, fused, bonded or otherwise connected powder material).
A cross section (eg, vertical cross section) of the generated (ie formed) 3D object can reveal a microstructure or grain structure indicative of layered deposition. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the microstructure or grain structure may originate due to solidification of the transformed powder material which is typical and / or indicative of the 3D printing method. For example, a cross section can reveal a microstructure that looks like ripples or waves indicative of solidified accumulations of melt that can form during the 3D printing process. The repeating layered structure of solidified melt accumulations can reveal the orientation in which the part was printed. The cross section may reveal a substantially repeating grain structure or microstructure. The microstructure or grain structure can comprise substantially repetitive variations in material composition, grain orientation, material density, degree of compound segregation or element segregation towards grain boundaries, material phase, phase
206
<img file="MX355451B_D0088.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0089.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO metallurgica, phase of crystals, Í<sup>and</sup>sunwjsi »crystalline, the porosity of the material oo ua í 1 ora '-etecombinations. The microstructure or grain structure may comprise the substantially repetitive solidification of layered melt accumulations. The substantially repeating microstructure can have an average layer size of at least about 0.5 pm, 1 pm, 5 pm, 10 pm, 20 pm, 30 pm, 40 pm, 50 pm, 60 pm, 70 pm, 80 pm, 90 pm, 100 pm, 150 pm, 200 μπι, 250 pm, 300 μπι, 350 pm, 400 μιη, 450 μπι ο 500 μπι. The substantially repeating microstructure can have a maximum average layer size of about 500 pm, 450 pm, 400 pm, 350 pm, 300 pm, 250 pm, 200 pm, 150 pm, 100 pm, 90 pm, 80 pm, 70 pm, 60 pm, 50 pm, 40 pm, 30 pm, 20 pm or 10 pm. The substantially repeating microstructure can have an average layer size of any value between the mentioned values.
<td>previously</td><td>from</td><td>size</td><td>from</td><td colspan="3">cap. For example,</td><td>the</td>
<td>microstructure</td><td colspan="3">substantially</td><td>repetitive can</td><td colspan="2">to have</td><td>a</td>
<td>Average size</td><td>from</td><td colspan="2">the layer of</td><td>approximately</td><td> 0.5</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 500</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 5</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 150</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
207
<img file="MX355451B_D0090.tif" />
PHASE »·· '<v¡ # í
At approximately 100 μτη approximately 8 0 μιη.
The 3D printed object can be printed without the use of auxiliary elements, it can be printed using a reduced number of auxiliary elements, or it can be printed using separate auxiliary elements. In some embodiments, the 3D printed object may lack one or more auxiliary support elements or auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element that are indicative of the presence or removal auxiliary support elements. The 3D object may lack one or more auxiliary support elements and one or more marks of an auxiliary element (including a base structure) that was removed (for example, after the generation of the 3D object). The 3D printed object may comprise a single marking of the auxiliary support. The only auxiliary element (for example, the auxiliary support or the auxiliary structure) can be a base, a substrate or a mold. The auxiliary support can adhere to the base, the substrate or the mold. The object
3D can comprise marks that belong to one or more auxiliary structures. The 3D object can comprise two or more marks that belong to auxiliary elements. The object
208
IMPI go? ''<sup>1</sup>* • 'SEísass v ··
3D may lack related or auxiliary markings. The 3D object may lack a be · u UTüiTí á r.
The 3D object may lack one or more auxiliary support elements and one or more markings related to an auxiliary support. The marking may comprise variation of grain orientation, variation of bedding orientation, variation of bedding thickness, variation of material density, variation of the degree of segregation of compounds towards grain boundaries, variation of porosity of the material, variation of the degree of segregation of elements towards the limits of the grains, variation of the phase of the material, variation of the metallurgical phase, variation of the phase of the crystals or variation of the crystal structure, where the variation may not have been created by the geometry of the 3D object alone and, therefore, may be indicative of a previously existing auxiliary support that was removed. The variation can be forced at the moment the 3D object is generated by the geometry of the support. In some cases, the 3D structure of the printed object can be forced by the auxiliary support (for example, by a mold). For example, a mark can be a point of discontinuity that is not explained by the geometry of the 3D object, which does not include any auxiliary support,
209
<img file="MX355451B_D0091.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0092.tif" />
a mark can be a surface element that cannot be explained by the geometry of a 3D object, which does not include any auxiliary support (for example, a mold). The two or more auxiliary elements or marks of the auxiliary supporting elements can be separated by a separation distance of at least 1.5 millimeters (mm), 2mm, 2.5mm, 3mm, 3.5mm, 4mm, 4.5mm, 5mm , 5.5mm, 6mm, 6.5mm, 7mm,
<td>7.5 mm,</td><td>8 mm, 8</td><td>. 5mm, 9</td><td>mm,</td><td>9.5 mm,</td><td>10 mm,</td><td> 10.5</td><td>mm</td><td>, 11 mm,</td>
<td>11.5 mm,</td><td>12 mm,</td><td>12.5 mm,</td><td> 13</td><td>mm, 13.5</td><td>mm, 14</td><td>mm,</td><td> 14.</td><td>5mm, 15</td>
<td>mm, 15.5</td><td>mm, 16</td><td>mm, 20 mm</td><td> , 20</td><td>.5 mm, 21</td><td>mm, 25</td><td>mm,</td><td> 30</td><td>mm, 30.5</td>
mm, 31mm, 35mm, 40mm, 40.5mm, 41mm, 45mm, 50mm, 80mm,
100 mm, 200mm, 300mm or 500mm. The two or more auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements can be separated by a maximum separation distance of 1.5mm, 2mm, 2.5mm, 3mm, 3.5mm, 4mm, 4.5mm, 5
<td>mm,</td><td>5.5 mm, 6</td><td>mm, 6.</td><td>5mm, 7mm,</td><td> 7.5</td><td>mm,</td><td>8 mm,</td><td> 8.</td><td>5 mm,</td><td> 9</td><td>mm,</td>
<td> 9.5</td><td>mm, 10 mm</td><td> , 10.5</td><td>mm, 11 mm,</td><td> 11.5</td><td>mm,</td><td>12 mm</td><td>Λ</td><td> 12.5</td><td>mm,</td><td> 13</td>
<td>mm,</td><td>13.5 mm,</td><td>14 mm,</td><td>14.5mm, 15</td><td>mm,</td><td> 15.</td><td>5 mm,</td><td> 16</td><td>mm,</td><td> 20</td><td>mm,</td>
20.5mm, 21mm, 25mm, 30mm, 30.5mm, 31mm, 35mm, 40mm,
40.5mm, 41mm, 45mm, 50mm, 80mm, 100mm, 200mm, 300mm or
500 mm. The two or more auxiliary support elements or marks of the auxiliary support elements can be separated by a separation distance of any value
210
<img file="MX355451B_D0093.tif" />
DíOTn-U ',
FROM tZ. ί \: · ζ. · ό ·.: Α · ιΓ>>. ·.
between the previously mentioned values of sep'á'í '^' cioír-'tíé 'the auxiliary supports. For example empicó '' r ^ '' '' '^' Telnérrt'b's auxiliary can be separated by a distance of 1.5 mm to 500 mm, from 2 mm to 100 mm, from 15 mm to 50 mm or from 45 mm to 200 mm .
(collectively referred to in the present description as the separation distance of the auxiliary elements).
The 3D object may comprise a layered structure indicative of the 3D printing process that lacks one or more of the auxiliary support elements or one or more marks of the auxiliary support elements that are indicative of the presence or removal of the one or more auxiliary support elements. The 3D object may comprise a layered structure indicative of the 3D printing process, which includes one, two or more marks of the auxiliary supports. Supports or support marks can be on the surface of the 3D object. The auxiliary supports or support marks can be on an external surface, or on an internal one (for example, a cavity within the 3D object) or on both. The layered structure may have a layering plane. In one example, two auxiliary support elements. o auxiliary support element or mark of the auxiliary support element present in the 3D object can be separated by the separation distance of the elements
211 , T
Τ Τ. , σ ΤΠ) 7Γ ζΓ '-. ·',. .
i.ter i
INSTITUTO MEXICANO auxiliaries. The acute angle (that is, sharp ^^^^ xer ^^^^ é straight line connecting the two supports<sup>what</sup>s au¿fi 1 ί, = τ<sup>ο <::</sup>Auxiliary support marks and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can be at least approximately 45 degrees (°), 50 °, 55 °, 60 °, 65 °, 70 °, 75 °, 80 ° or 85 °. The acute angle alpha between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary supports or the marks of the auxiliary supports and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can be at most approximately 90 °, 85 °, 80 °, 75 °, 70 °, 65 °, 60 °, 55 °, 50 ° or 45 °. The acute angle alpha between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary supports or the marks on the auxiliary supports and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can be any angular interval between the angles mentioned above. For example, from about 45 degrees (°), to about 90 °, from about 60 ° to about 90 °, from about 75 ° to about 90 °, from about 80 ° to about 90 °, from about 85 ° to about 90 °. The acute angle alpha between the straight line connecting the two auxiliary supports or the marks on the auxiliary supports and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can be from about 87 ° to about 90 °. The two supports
212
<img file="MX355451B_D0094.tif" />
Auxiliaries or the marks of the auxiliary supports must be on the same surface. The same<sup>ιι</sup>& «Ρ ^ ί? ΊίΌ · ίο ·· ~ 'ptte can be an external surface or an internal surface (for example, a surface of a cavity within the 3D object).
When the angle between the shortest straight line connecting the two auxiliary supports or the marks on the auxiliary supports and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane is greater than 90 degrees, the complementary angle can be considered to be acute. In some embodiments, any two auxiliary supports or marks on the auxiliary supports are separated by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more. In some embodiments, any two auxiliary supports or marks on the auxiliary supports are separated by at least about 40.5 millimeters or more. In some embodiments, any two auxiliary supports or marks of the auxiliary supports are separated by the separation distance of the auxiliary elements.
The single or more layers within the 3D object can be substantially flat. The single or more substantially flat layers may have a large radius of curvature. The single or more layers may have a radius of curvature equal to the radius of curvature of the surface. The radius of curvature of the
213
IMPIO / ν
MEXICAN INSTITUTE (··. · <
surface can have a value of at least áPp * 3 * ffiid®ftgdáaignt ^ ·.
0.1 centimeters (cm), 0.2 cm, 0.3 cm, 0.4 cm, 0.!? qm. 0. 6 .cm.
0.7cm, 0.8cm, 0.9cm, 1cm, 5cm, 10cm, 20cm, 30cm, 40cm, 50cm, 60cm, 70cm, 80cm, 90cm, 1 meter (m), 1.5m , 2m, 2.5m, 3m, 3.5m, 4m, 4.5m, 5m, 10m, 15m, 20m, 25m, 30m, 50m, or 100m. The radius of curvature of the surface can have a maximum value of approximately 0.1 centimeters (cm), 0.2 cm, 0.3 cm, 0.4 cm, 0.5 cm, 0.6 cm, 0.7 cm, 0.8 cm, 0.9 cm, 1 cm, 5 cm , 10 cm, 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm, cm, 60 cm, 70 cm, 80 cm, 90 cm, 1 meter (m), 1.5 m, 2 m,
2.5m, 3m, 3.5m, 4m, 4.5m, 5m, 10m, 15m, 20m, 25m, 50m, or 100m. The radius of curvature of the surface can have any value between any of the above-mentioned values of the radius of curvature. For example, about 10 cm to about 90 m, about 50 cm about 5 cm, about 50 cm to about 10 m, about about m, or about 40 cm to about 50 m. In some examples, the single or more layers can be included in a flat section of the 3D object or it can be a flat 3D object.
The radius of curvature can be measured by light microscopy, electron microscopy, confocal microscopy,
214
<img file="MX355451B_D0095.tif" />
or laser (by atomic force, spherometer, king gauge), positive lens, foot interferometer .. give
V -'LJ>
example, follower).
Each layer of the three-dimensional structure can be made of a single material or of multiple materials as described in the present description. A layer of the 3D object can be made up of a composite material. The 3D object can be made up of a composite material.
The 3D object may comprise a point X, which lies on the surface of the 3D object and a point Y, which is the auxiliary support or mark of the auxiliary support closest to X. In some embodiments, X is separated from Y by the separation distance auxiliary elements. The acute angle between the shortest straight line XY and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can have the value of the acute angle alpha.
When the angle between the shortest straight line XY and the direction normal to the bedding plane is greater than 90 degrees, the complementary angle can be considered to be acute. In some embodiments, X is separated from Y by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more. In some embodiments, X is separated from Y by at least approximately
40.5 millimeters or more.
215
ΤΓ Ά. 1 'O' ί / A ¿L .¿ύ, .ΐ LL -i
ΕΰΤΓΓΌΤΟ MSXJCANÜ □ £ LA ??<sup>F</sup>VIWA £ ν ·· '·>? - <iMríú *
The 3D object may comprise a plane of this aspect of the layered structure. The object '^^^ p ^ efde ^' - cbmptéider points X and Y, lying on the surface of the 3D object, where X is separated from Y by at least about 10.5 millimeters or more. In some embodiments, B is separated from C by the separation distance of the auxiliary elements.
A sphere of radius XY centered at X lacks one or more auxiliary supports or one or more auxiliary support marks that are indicative of the presence or removal of the one or more auxiliary support elements. In some embodiments, Y is separated from X by at least about
10.5 millimeters or more. An acute angle between the straight line
XY and the direction of the normal to N can be from about 45 degrees to about 90 degrees. The acute angle between the XY straight line and the direction of the normal to the bedding plane can be the value of the acute angle alpha. When the angle between the straight line XY and the direction of the normal to N is greater than 90 degrees, the complementary angle can be considered to be acute. The layer structure can comprise any material used for 3D printing described in the present description. Each layer of the three-dimensional structure can be made of a single material or of multiple materials. Sometimes a
216
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ' <sup>Γ</sup>»ΆΑ part of the layer may comprise one material £ ^ $ ^ r ^ raij3a £ tfe may comprise a second material different ..... from the first material.
The straight line XY or the surface having the fundamental length scale (eg, the radius) of XY can be substantially flat. For example, the substantially flat surface can have a large radius of curvature. The straight line XY or the surface having a radius (or fundamental length scale of) XY can have a radius of curvature equal to the values of the radius of curvature of the surface. The radius of curvature of the straight line XY can be normal to the length of the line XY. The curvature of the straight line XY can be the curvature along the length of the line XY.
One or more sensors (at least one sensor) can monitor the amount of powder in the powder bed. At least the single sensor can be operatively coupled to a control system (eg, a computer control system). The sensor can comprise light sensor, acoustic sensor, vibration sensor, chemical sensor, electrical sensor, magnetic sensor, fluidity sensor, motion sensor, speed sensor, position sensor, pressure sensor, force sensor, pressure sensor. density or proximity sensor. The sensor
217
<img file="MX355451B_D0096.tif" />
iS
CE THE PROPERTY \ A,. η,,. , UfíZJSHUAL.
It can include a temperature sensor, a weight sensor, a dust level serYSOf, a gas sensor or a humidity sensor. 'The' gas sensor can detect any of the gases outlined in the present description. The temperature sensor can comprise bolometer, bimetallic strip, calorimeter, exhaust gas temperature indicator, flame detection, Gardon indicator, Golay cell, heat flow sensor, infrared thermometer, microbolometer, microwave radiometer, radiometer. net, quartz thermometer, resistance temperature detector, resistance thermometer, silicon band separation temperature sensor, Special microwave sensor / imager, temperature indicator, thermistor, thermocouple, thermometer or pyrometer. The pressure sensor may comprise barograph, barometer, thrust indicator, Bourdon indicator, hot filament ionization indicator, ionization indicator, McLeod indicator, oscillating U-tube, permanent downhole indicator, piezometer, Pirani indicator , pressure sensor, pressure indicator, touch sensor or pressure time indicator. The position sensor can comprise auxanometer, capacitive displacement sensor, capacitive sensing, free fall sensor, gravimeter,
218 hi ri
INSTITUTO MEXICANO EDA & ε Ια property gyroscopic sensor, impact sensor, inclinome ^ To ^<sup>1</sup>Photoelectric inclinometer sensor, integrated circuit piezoelectric, '*' feTSmet'ro laser, 'laser surface speedometer, LIDAR, linear encoder, linearly varying differential transformer (LVDT), liquid capacitive, odometer, piezoelectric accelerometer sensor, speed sensor angular, rotary encoder, rotary variable differential transformer, autosynchronous motor, crash detector, crash data log, tilt sensor, tachometer, ultrasonic thickness gauge, variable reluctance sensor or speed sensor. The optical sensor may comprise a charge coupled device, colorimeter, contact image sensor, electro-optical sensor, infrared sensor, kinetic inductance detector, light emitting diode (eg, light sensor), light-steerable potentiometric sensor, radiometer. from Nichols, fiber optic sensors, optical position sensor, photodetector, photodiode, photomultiplier tubes, phototransistor, photoelectric sensor, photoionization detector, photomultiplier, photoresistor, photo switch, phototube, scintillation counter, Shack-Hartmann wavefront sensor, Geiger mode avalanche photodiode, nanowire isolated photon detector
219
<img file="MX355451B_D0097.tif" />
.M. go i
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DS LA PROPERTY INDUSTRIAL superconductor, transition edge sensor, visible light photon counter or wavefront sensor. The weight of the powder bed can be monitored by one or more weight sensors in or adjacent to the powder. For example, a weight sensor in the powder bed may be at the bottom of the powder bed. The weight sensor can be between the bottom of the enclosure and the substrate. The weight sensor can be between the bottom of the enclosure and the base. The weight sensor can be between the bottom of the enclosure and the powder bed. A weight sensor can comprise a pressure sensor. The weight sensor may comprise a spring weight, a hydraulic weight, a pneumatic weight, or a scale. At least a portion of the pressure sensor can be exposed on a lower surface of the powder bed. In some cases, the weight sensor may comprise a button-type load cell. The button-type load cell can detect the pressure of the powder adjacent to the load cell. In another example, one or more sensors (eg, optical sensors or optical level sensors) may be provided adjacent to the powder bed such as above, below, or to the side of the powder bed.
In some examples, the single or more sensors can detect the level of dust. In some cases, the level sensors
220
<img file="MX355451B_D0098.tif" />
7 '1 -, t a powder can monitor the
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '' ·
FROM Lñ PRDHÍDAB \
INDUSTRY!
pfc & LVo level in front of leveling mechanism (eg leveling device). The powder level sensor may be in communication with a powder dispensing system (also referred to herein as a powder dispensing member, powder dispensing mechanism, or coating dispensing mechanism) configured to dispense the powder when the sensor drops. dust level detects a dust level below a predetermined threshold. Alternatively or additionally a sensor can be configured to monitor the weight of the powder bed by monitoring the weight of a structure containing the powder bed. One or more position sensors (eg height sensors) can measure the height of the powder bed relative to the substrate.
The position sensors can be optical sensors. Position sensors can determine the distance between one or more energy sources (for example, a laser or an electron beam) and a surface of the powder. The single or more sensors can be connected to a control system (eg, a processor, a computer).
The system may comprise a first (for example, Figure
1, 106) and a second power source (for example, Figure
1, 107). In some cases, the system may comprise three,
221 ? Α T ΤΑ ΤΓ Λ '· \ ter Ife <-> ?,
INSTITUTO MEXICANO £, · - \ fj »'ό four, five or more sources of energy. EP<sup>EU</sup>g<sub>;</sub>t ^ - ^ ¿na '' comprise a set of egp sources, tgga___In aJ ^ maiaa ^ · cases, the system may comprise a third energy source. The third energy source can heat at least a fraction of a 3D object at any point during the 3D object's formation. Alternatively or additionally, the powder bed can be heated by a heating member comprising a lamp, a heating rod or a radiator (eg, a panel radiator). In some cases, the system may have only one power source (for example, the first). A power source can be a source configured to supply power to an area (eg, a confined area). An energy source can supply energy to the confined area through radiation heat transfer. The energy beam may include radiation comprising an electromagnetic, charged particle, or uncharged particle beam. The energy beam may include radiation comprising electromagnetic, electronic, positronic, proton, plasma, or ionic radiation. The electromagnetic beam can comprise microwave, infrared, ultraviolet or visible radiation. The energy beam may include electromagnetic energy beam, electron beam,
222
IMPIOS particle beam or ion beam, for example pyre) Q.MEx ^ io - cfe / '* industrial' ions can include a cation or an anion. A particle beam can include radicals. The electromagnetic beam can comprise a laser beam. The power source can include a laser source. The power source may include an electron gun. The power source can include a power source that can deliver power to a point or area. In some embodiments the energy source can be a laser. In one example, a laser can provide
<td>light energy in</td><td>a</td><td>length</td><td>from</td><td>wave</td><td>maximum of</td><td>to the</td><td>less</td>
<td>about 100</td><td colspan="3">nanometers (nm),</td><td> 500</td><td>nm, 1,000</td><td>nm,</td><td> 1, 010</td>
<td>nm, 1,020 nm, 1,030</td><td>nm,</td><td>1,040 nm,</td><td> 1</td><td> , 050</td><td>nm, 1,060</td><td>nm,</td><td> 1, 070</td>
<td>nm, 1,080 nm, 1,090</td><td>nm,</td><td>1,100 nm,</td><td> 1</td><td> , 200</td><td>nm, 1,500</td><td>nm,</td><td> 1, 600</td>
<td>nm, 1,700 nm, 1,800</td><td>nm,</td><td>1,900 nm</td><td>or</td><td> 2,000</td><td>nm. In a</td><td colspan="2">. example,</td>
a laser can provide light energy at a maximum wavelength of approximately 2,000 nm, 1,900 nm, 1,800 nm, 1,700 nm, 1,600 nm, 1,500 nm, 1,200 nm, 1,100 nm, 1,090 nm, 1,080 nm, 1,070 nm, 1,060 nm, 1,050 nm, 1,040 nm, 1,030 nm, 1,020 nm, 1,010 nm, 1,000 nm, 500 nm, or 100 nm.
The laser can provide light energy at a maximum wavelength between any of the above-mentioned maximum wavelength values. For example, the laser can provide light energy in a length of
223
IMPI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY,, ·, ·,. INDUSTRIAL peak wave from about 100 nm to about
<img file="MX355451B_D0099.tif" />
nm, from about 500 nm to about 1,500 nm, or from about 1,000 nm to about 1,100 nm. A beam of energy from the first and / or second energy source can strike or be directed towards the upper surface of the powder bed (eg 101). The energy beam can strike a specified area of the powder bed for a specified period of time. The powder material in the powder bed can absorb the energy of the energy beam and as a result, it can increase the temperature of a localized region of the powder material. The energy beam can move in a translatable manner relative to the upper (ie, exposed) surface of the powder bed. In some cases, the power source can move so that it can translate relative to the upper surface of the powder bed. The first and optionally the second beam and / or power source can be moved by means of a galvanometer scanner, a polygon, a mechanical platform or any of their combinations. The first source and / or energy beam can be moved with a first scanner (eg, Figure 1, 108). Optionally the second beam and / or power source can be moved with a second scanner (eg Figure 1, 109). The first
224 power source and optionally the second;
<img file="MX355451B_D0100.tif" />
of energy can move independently — απο ~ -of --- work.
In some cases, the first and optionally the second source and / or energy beam can travel at different speeds such that the movement of the first or second source and / or energy beam is faster compared to the movement of the second, optional, or the first power source.
Energy (eg heat) can be transferred from the powder to a cooling member (eg heat sink Figure 1, 110). The cooling member can facilitate the transfer of energy in the opposite direction to at least a portion of a layer of powder. In some cases, the cooling member can be a thermally conductive plate. The cooling member may comprise a cleaning mechanism (eg, the cleaning device), which removes dust and / or process residues from a surface of the cooling member to maintain efficient cooling. The debris can comprise dirt, dust (eg, resulting from heating, melting, evaporation, and / or other process transitions), or hardened material that was not part of the 3D object. In some cases, the mechanism of
225
ÍU '| Cleaning may comprise a rotating brush, rake, spatula or trowel that rotates when the heat sink is moved in a direction adjacent to the base. The cleaning mechanism may comprise a vertical cross section (eg, the lateral cross section) of a circle, triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon, octagon, or any other polygon. The vertical cross section can be amorphous. In some cases, the cleaning mechanism rotates when the cooling member moves in a non-lateral direction. In some cases, the cleaning mechanism rotates without movement of the cooling member. In some cases, the cooling member comprises at least one surface that is coated with a layer that prevents dust and / or debris from binding to at least the only surface (eg, a release layer).
One or more temperature sensors can detect the temperature of the cooling member. The temperature sensor may comprise a thermocouple, thermistor, pyrometer, thermometer (eg resistance thermometer) or a silicon band separation temperature sensor.
The cooling member can comprise two or more thermally conductive plates. The cooling member can
226
<img file="MX355451B_D0101.tif" />
example, a metal or metallic alloy. The cooling member can comprise copper or aluminum. The cooling member (eg, a heat sink) may comprise a material that efficiently conducts heat.
Efficient thermal conductivity can be at least about 20 Watts per meter Kelvin (W / mK), 50
W / mK, 100 W / mK, 150 W / mK, 200 W / mK, 205 W / mK, 300 W / mK, 350
W / mK, 400 W / mK, 450 W / mK, 500 W / mK, 550 W / mK, 600 W / mK, 700
W / mK, 800 W / mK, 900 W / mK, or 1,000 W / mK. The efficient thermal conductivity can have any value between the values mentioned above. For example, the efficient thermal conductivity can be about
400 W / mK to approximately 1,000 W / mK or approximately 20
W / mK to about 500 W / mK. The heat sink can comprise a simple metal or a metallic alloy. The heat sink can comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, ceramic, an allotropic variety of simple carbon, or a polymer. The heat sink can comprise stone, zeolite, clay, or glass. The heat sink (eg 110) can be placed on top of the upper surface of the powder bed (eg 101). The heat sink can be placed under the dust bed or to the side
227
<img file="MX355451B_D0102.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO LA PROPIEDAD ί> Λ tv.uriGvnv of the surface of the dust bed. In some ^<sup>Du</sup>^^ s • Vi ».
SOS
<img file="MX355451B_D0103.tif" />
heat sink can touch a surfacefTcTe '^ eT<sup>ace</sup>ieci? o '~' 'of' dust. The heat sink can only touch the surface of the powder bed. The heat sink can apply a compressive force to the exposed surface of the powder bed. In some cases, the heat sink may extend beyond the edges of the upper surface of the powder bed. In some cases, the heat sink may extend to the edges of the upper surface of the powder bed. In some cases, the heat sink may span the edges of the upper surface of the powder bed. The heat sink can facilitate the transfer of energy from at least a portion of a powder layer without substantially changing an initial configuration of the powder material in the powder layer. In some cases, the powder layer may comprise a partially or fully formed 3D object. The heat sink can facilitate the transfer of energy from at least a portion of a layer of dust without substantially modifying the position of the 3D printed object (or a part thereof) in any of the position modifying values described in the present description.
228 • Κ Α ΊΌ ΊΓ 'ki 2-7Α Ji A' ·>.
CTnViOMíXICANO '< <sup>J</sup> <
«Soser stpyg,
The cooling member can heat transfer enabling _ ca 1 ent.ajnle.nt-.c.,., ... el. . · Cooling or maintaining the temperature of the powder bed or 3D object that is formed in the powder bed.
In some examples, the heat transfer member is a cooling member that enables energy transfer out of the powder bed. The heat transfer member can enable energy transfer to the powder bed.
Heat can be transferred from the powder bed to the heat sink through any one or a combination of heat transfer mechanisms (eg, conduction, natural convection, forced convection, and radiation). The heat sink can be solid, liquid, or semi-solid. In some examples, the heat sink is solid. The heat sink can comprise a gas.
Alternatively the heat sink may comprise one or more openings (eg Figure 2, 205). The openings can be arranged in a pattern or randomly. The openings can be arranged in a striped pattern or a checkered pattern. In some cases, the dust removal openings (eg, suction nozzles) may be adjacent to the openings. In one example, the heatsink
229
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL heat can be a plate. An example of a heat sink is shown in Figure 2. In the example ™ shown in Figure 2 the heat sink 201 is at a distance d from the surface of the powder bed 202, which constitutes a gap. The gap can be adjusted or fixed. The heat sink can be controlled by a control system (for example, a processor). The spacing can be adjusted by the control system based on a fusion energy per unit area that is suitable for transforming the powder bed or a portion thereof. A gas layer (eg 203) can be provided between the heat sink and the surface of the powder bed. The heat sink can be thermally coupled to the powder bed through the gas layer. The gas layer can comprise ambient gas (eg, air), argon, nitrogen, helium, neon, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, or oxygen. In some cases, the gas layer can be selected to achieve a desired thermal transfer property between the upper surface of the powder bed and the heat sink. A distance sensor can measure the distance of the gas separation. The distance sensor may comprise an optical sensor, a capacitive sensor, or both an optical sensor and a sensor.
230
J11'Μ lf il,. . MEXICAN NETWORK • Capacitive Á.'i'iijSS. In one example, you can select artseyg ^^ c high thermal conductivity. The separation of .ga_§ ^ 42ug ^ g,., .. s £ -r ·· .un, ambient between the heat sink and an exposed surface of the dust bed. The size of the gap can be controlled. In some cases, rotational streams of gas flow may be generated in the separation. The currents can cause or increase the convective heat transfer between the powder bed and the heat sink. In some cases, the streams can be activated by movement of the heat sink with periodic shims present along the heat sink to direct the streams to the powder bed. The shims may periodically separate along a surface of the heat sink with a separation distance of from about 1 pm to about 100 mm or from about 10 pm to about 10 mm. Alternatively or additionally, a convection current may be generated in the gas stripping by injecting the flow of the gas into the stripping. The flow of the gas can be forced by a first set or array of nozzles built into the heat sink (eg, on the surface of the heat sink). The nozzles can be oriented towards a surface of the powder bed and can allow gas to flow into the gap
231 (for example, by means of liberation and MP í
X ja ¿i. .X
INSTITUTO MEXICANO kf '„' * 1 b
OF THE 7AOPSEDAD,. 'J Júí ^ NKJST & IAL a gas at ank.V4 £ ¿pressure). A second set or array of nozzles may remove the gas introduced by the first set or array of nozzles to create the flow of the gas (eg, by means of the vacuum mechanism).
In some cases, the heat sink may comprise a heat exchanger (eg 204). The heat exchanger (for example, a thermostat) can be configured to keep the heat sink temperature at a constant target temperature. In some cases, the desired temperature may be higher, lower, or nearly the same as room temperature. The heat exchanger can circulate a cooling fluid through a plumbing system (eg pipes or coil) incorporated in the heat sink. The cooling fluid can be configured to absorb heat from the heat sink through any one or a combination of thermal transfer mechanisms (eg, conduction, natural convection, forced convection, and radiation). The cooling fluid can be water, oil, or a refrigerant (eg R34a). In some examples, the cooling member is not incorporated into the powder bed (eg, in the form of pipes).
232 • u-1 / .. Λ Λ ν y, -ίί'ίΝϊτ; -. :: í: cawq V The cooling member can cool a powder by means of mechanical contact The cooling member can touch a surface of the powder bed for a maximum of about 1 second (s), 5 s, 10 s, 20s, 30s, 40s, 50s, 60s, 70s, 80s, 90s, 100s, 110s, 120s, 130s, 140s, 150s, 160s, 170s, 180s , 190 s,
200 s, 210 s, 220 s, 230 s, 240 s, 250 s, 260 s, 270 s, 280 s, 290 s, 300 s, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 1 day or less. The cooling member can touch a surface of the powder bed for at least about 1 second (s), 5 s, 10 s, 20
<td>Yes,</td><td> 30</td><td>s, 40 s,</td><td> 50</td><td>yes,</td><td> 60</td><td>s, 70 s, 80 s</td><td>, 90 s,</td><td> 100</td><td>yes,</td><td> 110</td><td>yes,</td>
<td> 120</td><td>yes,</td><td>130 s,</td><td> 140</td><td>yes,</td><td> 150</td><td>s, 160 s, 170</td><td>s, 180</td><td>yes,</td><td> 190</td><td>yes,</td><td> 200</td>
<td>yes,</td><td> 210</td><td>s, 220</td><td>yes,</td><td> 230</td><td>yes,</td><td>240 s, 250 s,</td><td>260 s,</td><td> 270</td><td>yes,</td><td> 280</td><td>yes,</td>
<td> 290</td><td>yes,</td><td>300 s,</td><td> 10</td><td colspan="2">minutes</td><td>, 15 minutes,</td><td colspan="2">30 minutes,</td><td> 1</td><td>hour</td><td> , 3</td>
<td colspan="2">hours,</td><td colspan="2">6 hours,</td><td> 12</td><td colspan="2">hours, 1 day or</td><td>more.</td><td colspan="3">The member</td><td>from</td>
Cooling can touch a surface of the powder bed for a time between any of the time periods mentioned above. For example, the cooling member may touch a surface of the powder bed.
<td colspan="2">for a period</td><td colspan="2">of time</td><td>about 1 s</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>min,</td><td>from</td><td>about 1s</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>min,</td><td>from</td><td>about 1s</td><td>to</td>
233
<img file="MX355451B_D0104.tif" />
approximately 5 min, of approximately ·?
about 1 min or about Isa about 30 s. The cooling member can be a plate that touches the surface of the powder bed along a flat dimension. In some cases, the cooling member can be one or more cylinders that roll along the surface of the powder. Alternatively the cooling member can be a belt that runs along the surface of the powder. The cooling member may comprise prongs, ridges, or other protrusions configured to penetrate the powder to increase the surface area and depth of cooling. Protruding elements can bend (eg, soft) or not bend (eg, rigid).
In some cases, the cooling member does not reside within the powdered material. In other examples, the cooling member may be within the powder material.
The cooling member can be a conduit or a pipe.
In some cases, the cooling member is not a plate.
The cooling member can be a cold powder layer.
The cold powder coat can act as a heat sink. The cold powder layer can be integrated with a member
234
IMPIé ^ 3
INSTITUTO Mexicano, DB lAPROWEDAD of scraping that provides and / or moves the materS @ l<sup>STiU</sup>^ TL ρσΤνο adjacent to the base and / or another layer of poJÍwü. A scraped ΐίΙΙίΑ'ίϋτο ae can provide a cold powder layer with a thickness of at least about 0.5mm, 1mm, 5mm, 10mm, 20mm, 25mm or 30mm adjacent to a first powder layer. A scraping member can provide a cold powder layer with a maximum thickness of about 0.5mm, 1mm, 5mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, 25mm or 30mm adjacent to a first powder layer. Heat (e.g. thermal energy) from a first layer of powder can be removed by transfer from the first layer of
<td></td><td>dust towards the layer of</td><td>dust</td><td>cold. The layer</td><td>from</td><td>dust</td><td>cold</td>
<td></td><td>can be provided to</td><td>a</td><td colspan="2">temperature like</td><td>maximum</td><td>from</td>
<td></td><td>approximately -40'C, -</td><td>20 'C,</td><td>-10 'C, 0' C,</td><td> 10</td><td>'C, 20</td><td>'C,</td>
<td> 15</td><td>25'C, 30'C, 40'C, 50</td><td>'C, 60</td><td>'C, 70 C, 80</td><td>'C,</td><td>90'C,</td><td> 100</td>
<td></td><td>'C, 200' C, 300 'C, 400</td><td colspan="2">'C or 500' C. The layer</td><td>from</td><td>dust</td><td>cold</td>
<td></td><td>can be provided to</td><td>a</td><td>temperature</td><td>from</td><td colspan="2">at least</td>
<td></td><td>approximately -40'C, -</td><td>20 'C,</td><td>-10 'C, 0' C,</td><td> 10</td><td>'C, 20</td><td>'C,</td>
<td></td><td>25'C, 30 ° C, 40'C, 50</td><td>'C, 60</td><td>'C, 70' C, 80</td><td>'C,</td><td>90'C,</td><td> 100</td>
<td> 20</td><td>'C, 200' C, 300 'C, 400</td><td colspan="2">'C or 500' C. The layer</td><td>from</td><td>dust</td><td>cold</td>
<td></td><td colspan="3">can be provided at a temperature between</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">values of</td>
temperature listed above.
After heat transfer occurs, most of the powder layer
235
IQl Τ / 2 - rr \ jl 1 .ifx _,, INSTITUTO MEXICANO? 3 cold can be extracted so that the layer thickness is at most approximately 500 um, 250 nm.10Q. -um-.
pm, 45 pm, 40 pm, 35 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 30 pm, 25 pm, 20 pm, 15 pm, 5 pm, 1 pm or 0.5 pm. The remaining cold powder can be exposed to one or both of the optional first and second (or additional) energy sources to form at least a portion of a 3D object.
Figure 9 depicts another example of a system that can be used to generate a 3D object using a 3D printing process. The system 900 shown in Figure 9 may be similar to the system shown in Figure 1. The system 900 shown in Figure 9 may comprise at least some of the components included in the system shown in Figure 1. The system 900 shown in Figure 9 may comprise additional components that are not included in the
Figure 1.
System 900 may include an enclosure (eg, camera 901). At least a fraction of the components in system 900 can be enclosed in chamber 901. At least a fraction of chamber 901 can be filled with a gas to create a gaseous atmosphere. The gas can be an inert gas (for example, argon, neon, or helium). The chamber can be filled with another gas or gas mixture. The gas can be a non-gas
236
<img file="MX355451B_D0105.tif" />
any of the
WICKED
XiCANO / may comprise argon, nitrogen, helium, neon,. krypton., ... ..
xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, or carbon dioxide.
The pressure in the chamber can be at least 10 '<sup>7</sup> Torr, 10 "<sup>6 </sup>Torr, 10<sup>5</sup> Torr, 10 '<sup>4</sup> Torr, IO<sup>-3</sup> Torr, IO<sup>-2</sup> Torr, 10<sup>_1</sup> Torr, 1 Torr, 10 Torr, 100 Torr, 1 bar, 2 bar, 3 bar, 4 bar, 5 bar, 20 bar, 30 bar, 40 bar, 50 bar, 100 bar, 200 bar, 300 bar, 400 bar, 500 bar, 1,000 bar or more. The pressure in the chamber can be at least 100 Torr, 200 Torr, 300 Torr, 400
Torr, 500 Torr, 600 Torr, 700 Torr, 720 Torr, 740 Torr, 750
Torr, 760 Torr, 900 Torr, 1,000 Torr, 1,100 Torr, 1,200 Torr.
The pressure in the chamber can be a maximum of 10 '<sup>7</sup> Torr, 10<sup>6 </sup>Torr, 10<sup>-5</sup> Torr or 10 "<sup>4</sup> Torr, 10<sup>-3</sup> Torr, 10 "<sup>2</sup> Torr, 10 '<sup>1</sup> Torr, 1 Torr, 10 Torr, 100 Torr, 200 Torr, 300 Torr, 400 Torr, 500
Torr, 600 Torr, 700 Torr, 720 Torr, 740 Torr, 750 Torr, 760
Torr, 900 Torr, 1,000 Torr, 1,100 Torr, or 1,200 Torr. The pressure in the chamber can be in a range between the pressure values mentioned above. For example, the pressure can be about 10 '<sup>7</sup> Torr to approximately 1,200 Torr, from approximately 10<sup>7</sup> Torr to about 1 Torr, from about 1 Torr to about 1,200 Torr, or from about 10
Torr to approximately 10 Torr. On
237 ϊ Ρ ϊ η <sub>Ί</sub> . ,, INSTITUTO MEXICANO In some cases, the pressure in the chamber can be normal atmospheric. In some examples, chamber ^ 901 may be under vacuum pressure. _
The chamber can comprise two or more gaseous layers. The gaseous layers can be separated by molecular weight or density such that a first gas with a first molecular weight or density is located in a first region (for example, 903) of the chamber and a second gas with a second molecular weight or density that is less than the first molecular weight or density is located in a second region (eg, 902) of the chamber. Gaseous layers can be separated by temperature. The first gas may be in a lower region of the chamber relative to the second gas. The second gas and the first gas can be in adjacent locations. The second gas can be above, on top of, or on top of the first gas. In some cases, the first gas can be argon and the second gas can be helium. The molecular weight or density of the first gas can be at least about 1.5 *, 2 *, 3 *, 4 *, 5 *, 10 *, 15 *, 20 *, 25 *,
30*, 35*, 40*, 50*, 55*, 60*, 70*, 75*, 80*, 90*, 100*, 200*,
300 *, 400 * or 500 * greater than or greater than the molecular weight or density of the second gas. * is used in the present description to designate the mathematical operation
238 multiplication or the word times
IMPI uiaexi 'PIETY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX355451B_D0106.tif" />
first gas can be greater than the molecular weight of air. The molecular weight or density of the first gas may be greater than the molecular weight or density of the oxygen gas (for example, 0<sub>2</sub>). The molecular weight or density of the first gas may be greater than the molecular weight or density of the nitrogen gas (for example, N<sub>2</sub>). Sometimes the molecular weight or density of the first gas may be less than that of oxygen gas or nitrogen gas.
The first gas with the relatively higher molecular weight or density can fill a region of the system (eg, 903) where at least a fraction of the powder is stored. The second gas with the relatively lower molecular weight or density can fill a region of the system (eg, 902) where the 3D object is formed. The region where the 3D object is formed may comprise a layer of powder that is energized in a predetermined pattern to form at least a fraction of the 3D object; the powder layer can be supported on a substrate (eg, 904). The substrate can have a circular, rectangular, square or irregularly shaped cross section. The substrate may comprise a base arranged on top of the substrate. The substrate may comprise a base arranged between the
239 substrate and a layer of dust (or a space ''<sup>ST</sup>^ 'r ^ 7?' í ^ ÚiÓ
ΙΜΡΪ
INDUSTRIAL by a layer of dust). The region where the 3D object is formed may further comprise a leveling mechanism (e.g., a roller, brush, rake, spatula, or paddle) configured to move and / or level the powder material along the layer of dust. The leveling mechanism may comprise a vertical cross section (for example, the lateral cross section) in the form of a circle, triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon, octagon or any other polygon or a partial shape or a combination of the shapes of these. . The leveling mechanism may comprise an amorphous vertical cross section (eg lateral cross section). The leveling mechanism can comprise one or more paddles. In some examples, the leveling mechanism comprises a blade with two facing sides or two blades joined to form two facing blades. Such an opposing arrangement can ensure a similar action when the leveling mechanism is moved to one side and to the opposite side. A thermal control unit (for example, a cooling member such as a heat sink or a cooling plate, a heating plate or a thermostat) can be provided within the region where the 3D object is formed or adjacent to
240
ΤΟ) ΤΓ ΐ
Γ · ί • - • / 'ϊ, the region where the 3D object is formed.
OF THE FILM> -. 7 INDL'STíüAX, ^ * · * ί ',>.
Thermal can be provided outside the region where the 3D object is formed (eg at a predetermined distance). In some cases, the thermal control unit may form at least a section of a boundary region where the 3D object is formed (eg, the container that houses the powder bed).
The oxygen concentration in the chamber can be minimized.
The oxygen concentration or humidity in the chamber can be kept below a predetermined threshold value. For example, the gaseous composition of the chamber may contain a level of oxygen or a humidity that is at most approximately 100 parts per billion (ppb), 10 ppb, 1 ppb,
0.1 ppb, 0.01 ppb, 0.001 ppb, 100 parts per million (ppm), 10 ppm, 1 ppm, 0.1 ppm, 0.01 ppm, or 0.001 ppm. The gaseous composition of the chamber can contain a level of oxygen or humidity between any of the values mentioned above. For example, the gaseous composition of the chamber may contain an oxygen or humidity level of from about 100 ppb to about 0.001 ppm, from about 1 ppb to about 0.01 ppm, or from about 1 ppm to about 0.1 ppm. In some cases, the chamber may be opened at the time of
241
Μ® completion of 3D object formation.<sup>, NST</sup>ÍJ¿S ^^ ga ': qám ;.
INDUSTRIAL opens, ambient air, containing oxygen, and / or moisture can enter the chamber. Exposure of one or more components within the chamber to air can be reduced, for example, by the flow of an inert gas while the chamber is open (for example, to prevent the entry of ambient air) or by the flow of a gas. heavy (eg argon) resting on the surface of the powder bed. In some cases, components that absorb oxygen and / or water on their surface (s) may seal while the chamber is open.
The chamber can be configured so that the gas within the chamber has a relatively low rate of leakage from the chamber to the environment outside the chamber. In some cases, the leak rate can be a maximum of approximately 100 milliTorr / minute (mTorr / min), 50 mTorr / min, 25 mTorr / min, 15 mTorr / min, 10 mTorr / min, 5 mTorr / min, 1 mTorr / min, 0.5 mTorr / min, 0.1 mTorr / min, 0.05 mTorr / min, 0.01 mTorr / min, 0.005 mTorr / min, 0.001 mTorr / min,
0.0005 mTorr / min or 0.0001 mTorr / min. The leak rate can be between any of the leak rates mentioned above (for example, approximately
0.0001 mTorr / min to approximately 100 mTorr / min, from
242
IMPI about 1 mTorr / min to about ^ ís ^ ívn ^ SeSsr ^ nírpSd from about 1 mTorr / min to about 100 mTorr / min. The chamber (eg, 901) can be sealed so that the rate of leakage of gas from within the chamber to the environment outside the chamber is low. The seals may comprise o-rings, rubber seals, metal seals, load seals, or bellows on a piston. In some cases, the camera may have a controller configured to detect leaks above a specified leak rate (for example, by using a sensor). The sensor can be coupled to a controller. In some cases, the controller can identify a leak by detecting a drop in pressure on the chamber side over a specified time interval.
The powder can be dispensed onto the substrate (for example,
904) to form a 3D object from the powder material.
The powder can be dispensed from a powder dispensing mechanism (eg, 905 such as a powder dispenser). The powder dispensing mechanism may be adjacent to the powder bed. The powder dispensing mechanism can span the entire width of the powder bed, the entire length of the powder bed, or a portion of the powder bed. The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a set of
243 iMPi my
Mexican institute V'C r7.d powder supply components (for example<sup>D</sup>or powder dispensers). The set -de, c empane ixLes -_. Dg ...
powder supply can be spread evenly or not. The set of powder dispensing components can be separated by a maximum of 0.1mm, 0.3mm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm or 5mm. The set of powder supply components can be separated at least 0.1mm, 0.3mm,
0.5mm, 1mm, 1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm or 5mm. The assembly of powder supply components (eg, the members) may be spaced a distance between any of the above-mentioned gaps of the leveling members (eg, from about 0.1mm to about about 2mm, mm, of about 0.1mm about 1.5mm about 5mm). The leveling mechanism can be attached to the powder dispensing mechanism or it can be a part thereof. The leveling mechanism can compact the powder within the layer of the powder material. In some cases, the leveling mechanism does not substantially compact the powder in the layer of the powder material.
Figures 13A-13D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for dispensing powder material. Figure 13A represents
244
IMPI a 1303 powder dispenser located on top of the «<sup>w</sup>£ ^ gj | p 1310 moving in direction 1306, Figure 13B represents a powder dispenser 1311 located above surface 1317 moving in direction 1314. Figure 13C depicts a powder dispenser 1318 located above the surface 1325 moving in the direction 1321. The
Figure 13D depicts a powder dispenser 1326 located on top of surface 1333 moving in the direction
1329.
The dust dispensing mechanism may be coupled to a dust removal mechanism or it may be a part thereof (eg, a dust removal member). The dust removal member may be referred to herein as a dust removal system. For example, Figure 25C shows a dust dispensing mechanism that integrates with the dust removal system (eg, 2531). In that system (ie mechanism), the powder supply components (eg 2533) are separated and integrated with the components of the dust removal mechanism (eg 2532). The integration of the components can form a pattern or can be separated into two groups each of which contains a type of component or can be located randomly. The single or more ports of
<img file="MX355451B_D0107.tif" />
245
Ρ ΐ
<img file="MX355451B_D0108.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0109.tif" />
yy
INDUSTRIAL vacuum inlet (eg powder outlet and one or more ports can be arranged in a pattern sequentially), grouped together or randomly. The single or more dust outlet ports and one or more vacuum inlet ports operate sequentially, simultaneously, jointly or separately from each other.
The powder dispensing mechanism can be integrated with both the powder removal system and the powder leveling system. Figure 24 shows an example for an integration of the three systems. As the system moves along direction 2401 over a bed of powder 2409, the powder dispensing mechanism 2406 deposits the powder material 2407. That delivery system couples (eg, through 2403) to a 2405 powder leveling system that includes a 2408 leveling component (eg, a blade) and levels the deposited 2411 powder material. The leveling system Dust removal is coupled (eg, via 2402) to a Dust Removal System 2404 that removes deposited and leveled powder material without touching the top surface of the leveled powder layer 2411. Removal can use negative pressure (eg vacuum) as exemplified in Figure 24, 2421.
246
ÍMPIOBP
MIiiCANO INSTITUTE *>
FROM PROPERTY L * “« to «? 5sa2S6t. '
INDUSTRIAL ''
Figures 25A-C schematically represent bottom views of various mechanisms for removing powder material. Figure 25A schematically depicts a dust removal member 2511 having a dust inlet port 2512. Figure 25B schematically depicts a dust removal member 2521 having multiple port ports (eg, 2523). dust inlet (for example, 2522). The
Figure 25C schematically depicts an integrated member for dispensing and removing powder 2531 having powder inlet port ports (eg, 2532) and powder port outlet ports (eg, 2533).
The dust removal system can be oriented up, down, and / or to the side of the substrate (eg, substrate, base, or powder bed). The dust removal system can rotate around an axis. The axis of rotation can be normal to the direction in which the dust enters the dust removal system. In some examples, the dust removal system may not rotate. The dust removal system can be moved horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The dust removal system may comprise a dust inlet opening port and a dust outlet opening port. The entrance
247 1 ? J INSTITUTE
7R?
The dust inlet and the dust outlet can be the same. The dust inlet and the outlet of the dust can be different openings. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be spatially separated. The spatial separation can be on the outer surface of the dust removal system. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be connected. The dust inlet and the dust outlet can be connected within the dust removal system. The connection can be an internal cavity within the dust removal system. For example, Figure 24 schematically shows a dust removal system
2404 having a nozzle opening 2413 through which powder enters. The nozzle may comprise a single aperture or a multiplicity of apertures. The multiplicity of openings can be aggregated (for example, in a nozzle). Figure 24 schematically depicts a nozzle having three openings 2415,
2417, and 2419. The multiplicity of openings can be vertically leveled (eg, aligned). In some cases, at least one opening within the multiplicity of openings may be vertically misaligned. In some examples, none of the openings can be at the same vertical level. Figure 24 exemplifies three openings with each
248
C- '
IΜ ΡI
MEXICAN INSTITUTE Κ '- <sup>1</sup>
OF PROPERTY (one that resides on a different vertical level
2416, 2418, and 2420). ~ ---- ~
The powder material can travel from the powder inlet to the powder outlet, through the internal cavity. For example, Figure 24 shows powdered material entering openings 2415, 2417, and 2419 and moving through internal cavity 2424 to outlet 2423. In some cases, powdered material can be dispensed from a system dust removal system that sits on top of the dust bed. The top dust removal system can remove dust from the dust bed from a position above the dust bed at an instant, frequency, location, predetermined removal plan, or any combination thereof. In some examples, the dust removal system touches the powder bed (for example, the exposed surface of the powder bed). In some examples, the dust removal system is not in contact with the powder bed (eg, the exposed surface of the powder bed). The dust removal system can be separated from the upper surface of the powder bed (eg, the exposed surface of the powder bed) by a separation.
The gap can be adjusted. The vertical separation distance from the exposed surface of the powder bed can
249 ί Α, Α Π> ::
l'v AA Ji '> ·'
<td>to be</td><td>to the</td><td>less than</td><td>about 0</td><td> . 5</td><td>mm, 1</td><td>INít; ·, '.. · ./'. ···· Jj 'DE LA, iv. mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4</td>
<td>mm,</td><td colspan="2">5mm, 6mm,</td><td>7mm, 8mm, 9mm,</td><td> 10</td><td>mm, 20</td><td>mm, 30mm, 40mm,</td>
<td> 50</td><td>mm,</td><td>60 mm,</td><td>70mm, 80mm, 90</td><td>mm</td><td>or 100</td><td>mm. Distance</td>
vertical separation of the exposed surface of the powder bed can be maximum of about 0.5mm, 1mm, mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10mm, 20 mm, mm, 40mm, 50mm, 60mm, 70mm, 80mm, 90mm or 100mm. The vertical separation distance from the exposed surface of the powder bed can have any value between the values mentioned above (for example, from about 0.5mm to about 100mm, from about 0.5mm to about 60mm, or from about 40mm to about 100 mm). The upper dust removal system may have at least one opening. The size of the opening, the shape of the opening, the time control and the duration of the opening can be controlled by a controller. The top dispensing powder dispenser can remove the powder from a higher height compared to a surface of the top surface of the powder bed. The powder dispensing mechanism can remove the powder from at least a fraction of the powder bed. The dust removal system may comprise a force that causes the powdered material to become
250 you ^ S MEXICAN FUTURE <<< -; - · <sup>T,</sup>'5<sup>;</sup>
CE LA PROPERTY *, f. . ·.
move from the dust bed to the inside ^ eT ^ sístefflia 'of dust removal. The removal system of T * p ^ vó ^ 'I could' comprise negative pressure (eg vacuum), electrostatic force, electrical force, magnetic force or physical force. The dust removal system may comprise positive pressure (eg, a gas) that causes the dust to exit the dust bed and travel through the openings of the dust removal system. The gas can comprise any gas described in the present description.
The gas can help fluidize the remaining powder material in the powder bed. The removed powder material can be recycled and reapplied to the powder bed using the powder dispenser system. The dust can be continuously recycled through the operation of the dust removal system. The powder can be recycled after depositing (eg, and leveling) each layer of the material. The powder can be recycled after depositing (eg, and leveling) several layers of the material. The powder can be recycled after each 3D object is printed.
Any dust removal system described in the present description may comprise a powder reservoir and / or a mechanism configured to supply the powder from the reservoir to the powder dispenser system. The dust in the
251 deposit can be dealt with. The treatment<sup>r</sup>'pWjá ^ r ihgjjg & ízt heating, cooling, holding — of ^ a ^ predetermined temperature, sieving, filtration, or fluidization (for example, with a gas). A leveling mechanism (for example, Figure 11, 1103; Figures 12A-F, 1202, 1207, 1212,
1217, 1222 or 1227; or Figure 15, 1503; such as a rake, roller, brush, spatula or trowel) can be synchronized with the dust removal system.
The dust removal mechanism may have an opening through which dust enters the suction device from the upper surface of the dust bed (e.g.
Figure 23, 2312). The inlet chamber into which the powder enters the suction device (for example, Figure 23,
2305) can have any shape. The inlet chamber can be a tube (eg flexible or rigid). The inlet chamber can be a funnel. The inlet chamber can have a rectangular cross section or a conical cross section. The inlet chamber can be amorphous. The dust removal mechanism (eg, the suction device) may include one or more suction nozzles. The suction nozzle can comprise any of the nozzles described in the present description. Nozzles can be comprised of a single aperture or a multiplicity of
252 'IMPI Mexican institute z;>.
openings as described in the present desEW ^? S ^ £ iAtx.aí§ ^<sup>s</sup>-<sup>5! </sup>Apertures may be vertically leveled not „ni.v ^ lars & l ^ - - · Apertures may or may not be vertically aligned.
In some examples, at least two of the multiplicity of openings may not align. The multiplicity of suction nozzles can be aligned at the same height relative to the substrate (eg, Figure 23, 2311) or at different heights (eg, vertical height). Nozzles of different heights can form a pattern or can be randomly located on the suction device. The nozzles can be of one type or of different types. The dust removal mechanism (eg the suction device) may comprise a curved surface, eg adjacent to the side of a nozzle. Powdered material entering through the nozzle can collect on the curved surface.
The nozzle may comprise a cone. The cone can be a convergent cone or a divergent cone. The dust removal mechanism (eg the suction device) may comprise a dust reservoir. Dust that enters the dust removal mechanism can sometimes enter the dust removal mechanism reservoir. The hopper can be emptied after leveling each layer of powder, when full, at the end of the build cycle, or in moments
253
<img file="MX355451B_D0110.tif" />
'- To arbitrarily determined. The tank pd ^^^ vabiraurSTe continuously during the
<img file="MX355451B_D0111.tif" />
dust removal. Figure 23, 2307 shows an example of a dust container within the suction device. Sometimes the dust removal mechanism does not have a reservoir. Sometimes the dust removal mechanism constitutes a dust removal channel (eg by suction) leading to an external reservoir. The dust removal mechanism may comprise an internal reservoir.
The dust removal mechanism can move laterally in front of the leveling member (eg, a roller) relative to the direction of movement. The dust removal mechanism can move laterally after the leveling member, relative to the direction of movement. The dust removal mechanism can be part of the leveling member. The dust removal mechanism can be the leveling member. The dust removal mechanism can be connected to the leveling member (eg roller). The dust removal mechanism can be disconnected from the leveling member. The dust removal mechanism may comprise a set of dust inlets (eg, suction devices or nozzles). The set of dust inlets (for example, the nozzle, the
254
INSVnUTü UEGCANO openings for dust or an aggregate of aberí®®®e $ 'p-úed¿ ·· spread evenly or not. The set untT7 ~ '^ t ± s—<sup>1</sup> gnt-ra-da-s— dust can be separated at most about 0.1 mm, 0.3
<td>mm, 0.5 mm,</td><td> 1</td><td>mm,</td><td>1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4</td><td>mm</td><td>or 5 mm. The</td>
<td>set of</td><td colspan="5">dust inlets can be separated at least</td>
<td colspan="2">approximately</td><td> 0.1</td><td>mm, 0.3mm, 0.5mm, 1mm,</td><td> 1.5</td><td>mm, 2 mm, 3</td>
<td>mm, 4 mm or</td><td> 5</td><td>mm.</td><td>The set of inputs</td><td>from</td><td>powder can</td>
spacing a distance between any of the above-mentioned gaps of the leveling members (eg, from about 0.1mm to about 5mm, from about 0.1mm to about 2mm, from about 1.5mm to about 5mm).
One controller can control the dust removal system. The controller can control the rapidity (speed) of the lateral movement of the dust removal system. The controller can control the pressure level (eg vacuum or positive pressure) in the dust removal system. The pressure level (eg vacuum or positive pressure) can be constant or vary. The pressure level can be turned on and off manually or via the controller. The pressure level can be less than approximately the pressure of 1 atmosphere (760 Torr). The pressure level can be any pressure level
255
<img file="MX355451B_D0112.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0113.tif" />
described in the present description. The contrOT§2f6r controlling the amount of force exerted
<img file="MX355451B_D0114.tif" />
of the dust removal system. For example, the controller can control the amount of magnetic force, electrical force, electrostatic force, or physical force exerted by the dust removal system. The controller can control whether the above-mentioned forces are exerted and when they are exerted.
The powder dispensing mechanism can be oriented upward, downward, and / or toward the powder bed (or powder container). The powder dispensing mechanism can rotate around an axis. The axis of rotation may be normal to the direction in which the powder exits the powder dispensing mechanism. In some examples, the powder dispensing mechanism may not rotate. The powder dispensing mechanism can be moved horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The axis of rotation of the powder dispensing mechanism can be normal or parallel to the direction of translation. The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a powder inlet port and a powder outlet port. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be the same opening. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be different openings.
256
<img file="MX355451B_D0115.tif" />
tnottotox: zx; cano V '
OF THE nUiUSCAi »<Λ .. A <sup>F</sup>
Powder inlet and powder outlet can '<sup>l</sup>'se ^ plow<sup>k</sup>SH '' · spatially. Spatial separation can be found on the outer surface of the powder dispensing mechanism. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be connected. The powder inlet and the powder outlet can be connected inside the powder dispensing mechanism. The connection may be an internal cavity within the powder dispensing mechanism. The powder material can travel from the powder inlet to the powder outlet, through the internal cavity. In some cases, the powder material can be dispensed from a top dispensing powder dispenser that is located on top of the substrate. The top dispensing powder dispenser can release powder onto the substrate from a position above the substrate at a predetermined instant, speed, location, dispensing scheme, or any combination thereof.
The top dispensing powder dispenser may have at least one opening. The size of the opening, the shape of the opening, the time control and the duration of the opening can be controlled by a controller. The top dispensing powder dispenser can release the powder onto the substrate from a higher height compared to a surface of the substrate. The powder dispensing mechanism
257 ¡Nstitu -.— h ^ c ^ nq I-- · and ,? , it can dispense the powder over at least u ^ á ^ '^' jMwBciony-jdéll · 'substrate 904. The dispensed mechanism—.de - „. © © 1 ^ © · - may comprise openings through which the gas. The gas can comprise any gas described in the present description. The gas can help fluidize powder material present in the powder dispensing reservoir or dispensing from the powder dispensing mechanism.
The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a chamber through which the gas flows. The chamber of the powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a single compartment or a multiplicity of compartments. The multiplicity of compartments can have identical or different vertical cross sections, horizontal cross sections, surface areas or volumes. The walls of the compartments can comprise identical or different materials. The multiplicity of compartments can be connected such that gas can move (flow) from one compartment to another (referred to herein as fluidly connected). The multiplicity of compartments can be connected so that the powder material that was collected by the gas (for example, the powder material carried by the air) can move (flow) from a
258 MSTITV * <sup>4</sup> ν-> 0 \, <sup>?</sup> compartment to another. Figure 27C shows egde · -! »! ' powder dispensing mechanism that has tra · »» e'omp'ia'gt'imi'eCTtvs of several vertical cross sections (2738, 2739, and
2740) that are fluidly connected as illustrated by the flow of gas 2733 within the internal cavity of the powder dispensing mechanism. The chamber of the powder dispensing mechanism may comprise a gas inlet, gas outlet, powder inlet and powder outlet. In some examples, the chamber of the powder dispensing mechanism may comprise two powder outlets. The gas inlet and the powder material inlet can be the same or different inlets.
The gas outlet and the powder material outlet can be the same or different inlets. The portion facing the substrate, the base, or the exposed surface of the powder bed is referred to herein as the lower portion. The portion facing away from the substrate, the base, or the exposed surface of the powder bed is referred to herein as the upper portion. The portion that is different from the upper or lower portion is referred to in the present description as the side portion. In some examples, an outlet of the powder is directed toward the substrate, base, or exposed surface of the powder bed. In some examples, an output
259 ϊ> <Ρ ϊ 7- ll Αν.1 Ji Λ 'of the dust resides at the bottom *<sup>KS</sup>^ eí '? S? ^ 8tfema die ÍNCUSTaiAl' · powder dispenser. The bottom outlet may comprise a screen, slot, hole, slanted baffle, slat, ramp, slanted surface, or any combination thereof. For example, Figure 27A shows an example of a 2715 mesh at the bottom of the powder dispensing mechanism; Figure 27B shows an example of a combination of a 2725 mesh and inclined baffles (eg, 2726); and Figure 27C shows an example of inclined baffles (eg 2736) at the bottom of the powder dispensing mechanism. The mesh can have any mesh value described in the present description. In some examples, the mesh may comprise
<td>sizes</td><td>from</td><td>hole</td><td>from</td><td colspan="4">at least about 5 pm, 10 pm,</td>
<td>15 20 pm,</td><td> 30</td><td>pm, 4 0</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td>60 pm, 7 0 pm, 8 0 pm, 90</td><td>p.m,</td>
<td>100 pm,</td><td colspan="3">2 00 pm, 300</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 400</td><td>pm, 500 pm, 600 pm, 700</td><td>p.m,</td>
800 pm, 900 μιη or 1,000 μιη. The mesh can comprise maximum hole sizes of approximately 10 pm, 20 pm, 30 pm, 4 0 pm, 50 pm, 60 pm, 70 pm, 80 pm, 90 pm, 100 pm, 200 pm, 300 pm, 400 pm , 500 pm, 600 pm, 700 pm, 800 pm, 900 pm or 1,000 pm. The mesh can comprise hole sizes between any of the hole sizes described in the
260 present description
For example,
IMPb the mesh ^ W »^<sup>1</sup>
INDUSTRIAL '
<img file="MX355451B_D0116.tif" />
hole sizes from about 5 μπι to about
1,000 μπι, from approximately 5 μπι to approximately 500 μιη, from approximately 400 μπι to approximately 1,000 μπι, or from approximately 200 μπι to approximately 800 μπι.
The chamber in which the bottom opening is located can be symmetrical with respect to the incoming gas (for example, Figure 27A) or non-symmetrical (for example, Figure
27D). The direction of the gas flow may coincide with the direction of the lateral movement of the powder dispenser system, not coincide or flow opposite to it. For example, Figure 27A schematically shows a powder dispensing mechanism where the direction of gas flow
2713 coincides with the direction of lateral movement of the powder dispenser system 2712. The powder can be disposed in the opposite direction to the opening at the bottom. The powder can be supplied from a reservoir. The supply of the powder can be done from the top of the powder dispensing chamber, from the bottom or from the side. For example, Figure 27A shows a powder reservoir 2719 supplying powder from the bottom of the powder dispensing chamber.
261
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V, // - <-; · DB LA PStONHDAO '
Dust can be raised by a mechanism dero ^ l '^ vac'iéTrr'
The lifting mechanism can comp2? Ewder * - "uria · '-'" conveyor belt or elevator. The lifting mechanism may comprise a mechanical lift. The lifting mechanism may comprise a climber, elevator, conveyor, elevator, rod, piston, worm, or Archimedean screw. The lifting mechanism may comprise a transportation system assisted by gas (eg gas under pressure), gravity, electricity, heat (eg steam) or gravity (eg weights). The conveyor belt can be rough; the conveyor belt may comprise protrusions, protrusions or recesses. The projections or recesses can trap the powder material that is transported into the inner chamber where the gas flows from one side to the other. Figure 27B shows a dust bin
2729 that delivers the powder from the top of the powder dispensing chamber. The powder delivery may include any other powder delivery method described above in the present disclosure.
The gas can move within the chamber of the powder dispensing mechanism at a speed. Speed may vary. The speed can be variable or constant. The speed can be at least about 0.001 Mach,
262 ¡NST1TOTO MEXICANO γ,.: -
0.03 Mach, 0.005 Mach, 0.07 Mach, 0.01 Mach,
Mach, 0.07 Mach, 0.1 Mach, 0.3 Mach, 0.5 «MAeb-r — O ^ .- 'A-Mach · Ό'Ί
Mach. Speed may vary. The speed can be variable or constant. The speed can be maximum about 0.001 Mach, 0.03 Mach, 0.005 Mach, 0.07 Mach,
0.01 Mach, 0.03 Mach, 0.05 Mach, 0.07 Mach, 0.1 Mach, 0.3
Mach, 0.5 Mach, 0.7 Mach or 1 Mach. The speed can be between any of the speed values mentioned
<td>previously.</td><td>For example,</td><td>speed</td><td>can</td><td>to be</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.01 Mach a</td><td>approximately</td><td> 0.7</td><td>Mach,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.005 Mach a</td><td>approximately</td><td> 0.01</td><td>Mach,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.05 Mach a</td><td>approximately</td><td> 0.9</td><td>Mach,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.007 Mach a</td><td>approximately</td><td colspan="2">0.5 Mach or</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.001 Mach</td><td colspan="2">to about 1</td><td>Mach.</td><td>The</td>
Mach unit of measure as used in the present description refers to the Mach number that represents the ratio of flow velocity beyond a limit to the local speed of sound.
Any of the powder dispensing mechanisms described in the present description (for example, Figure 9,
905; Figure 13C, 1319; or Figure 15, 1508) may comprise a powder bin and a mechanism configured to supply the powder from the bin to the powder bed. The dust in the
263
OB W Β -.> '/ ·
JL X.'SLs. TO . ·; 'Χ ·
Ββητυτο MEXICAN v / <¿Á yDE IA PROPERTY V. “-. , ·. -J ¡NDUSTUAL '-UlS.- ·· The tank can be preheated, cooled, at room temperature or kept at a predetermined temperature. A leveling mechanism (for example, Figure 11, 1103; Figure
12A-F, 1202, 1207, 1212, 1217, 1222, or 1227; o Figure 15,
1503; such as a rake, roller, brush, spatula or trowel) can be synchronized with the powder dispenser.
A controller can control the powder dispensing mechanism. The controller can control the rapidity (speed) of the lateral movement of the powder dispensing mechanism.
Where applicable, the controller can control the speed of the gas in the powder dispenser system. The controller can control the type of gas that moves within the powder dispenser system. The controller can control the amount of powder material released by the powder dispenser system. The controller can control the position in which the powder is deposited on the powder bed. The controller can control the radius of powder deposition on the powder bed. The controller can control the speed of powder deposition on the powder bed. The controller can control the vertical height of the powder dispenser system. The controller can control the gap between the bottom of the powder dispenser system and the top surface of the
264 iN5¿ 1 IU l ΜώλΙνΑΠυ · * ·, · -. V bed of powder. The controller can control ^^ pST ^ páid'qá.'éÉh between the opening of the di spansaMr-del ...,. Ρη-.Ί.va .... and. the inclined surface that is included in the powder dispenser system. The controller can control the angle (theta) of that inclined surface. The controller can control the vibration frequency of the vibrators that are part of the powder dispenser system (eg, Figure 28, 2836). For example, the controller can control the vibration frequency of the powder in the powder bin within the powder dispenser system.
The layer dispensing mechanism can dispense the powder material, level, distribute, spread, and / or stir the powder in the powder bed. The leveling mechanism can level, distribute and / or spread the powder on the powder bed. The leveling mechanism can lower the height of the deposited powder layer (eg, on top of the powder bed or inside the container that houses the powder bed). The leveling mechanism can relocate, cut, shear or scrape an upper portion of the powder layer. In some examples, the leveling mechanism can stir (for example, evacuate) the powdered material. In some examples, the removal of the powder material can be done by a separate mechanism that is
265 ¥ Λ-'Τ Τ ')' '
Ji J. .ii- .X \ - /.
RiÍS '* nVrü MEXICAN v <. ·' ·, - / «connects to the dust leveling mechanism dust removal mechanism). By e jemp 1ο<sub>Λ</sub>_ 1¾ JE j.gi | y », 15. shows a leveling mechanism 1503 that decreased the height level from a height of 1517 to a lower height of 1516. Leveling can take place as the powder is dispensed by the powder dispenser or after dispensing the powder through the powder dispenser. Leveling can be synchronized with the powder dispensing mechanism. The leveling operation can be separated from the powder dispensing operation. The leveling operation can be integrated with the powder dispensing operation. The leveling mechanism can become hot or cold. At least some of the components of the leveling mechanism may become hot or cold. The leveling mechanism may comprise openings through which gas can move. The gas can be any gas described in the present description. The gas can help fluidize the powder material. In some embodiments, the leveling member (eg, the leveling mechanism) enables the powder to be distributed substantially uniformly throughout the powder bed. The leveling member can be interchangeable, detachable, non-detachable, or non-interchangeable. The leveling member may comprise
266
Mexican Institute y-c'— Uk ·> OF PROPERTY interchangeable parts. The leveling member "can distribute the powder throughout the powder bed" 'ETfnThe leveling member can be a part of the powder dispensing mechanism (eg, the powder dispenser). The rake (eg Figure 11, 1103) is an example of a leveling member. The leveling member can provide uniformity of the powder throughout the bed so that the portions of the bed that are separated from each other by at least about 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm or 10mm, have a height deviation maximum about 10 mm, 9 mm, 8 mm, 7 mm, 6 mm, 5 mm, 4 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 500 μπι, 400 μιη, 300 μπι, 200 μπι, 100 μπι, 90 μη, 80 μπι, 70 μιη, 60 μπι, 50 μπι, 40 μπι, 30 μπι, 20 μπι ο 10 μπι; maximum of about 10 mm, 9 mm, 8 mm, 7 mm, 6 mm, 5 mm, 4 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 500 μπι, 400 μπι, 300 μπι, 200 μπι, 100 μπι, 90 μπι, 80, 70 μπι, 60 μπι, 50 μπι, 40 μπι, 30 μη, 20 μη ο 10 μη; ο of any value between the above-mentioned height deviation values. For example, the leveling member can provide uniformity of the powder throughout the bed such that the portions of the bed that are separated from each other by a distance of about mm to about 10 mm, have a deviation from the
267
ÍMWB
INSTITUTO MEXICANO r '
FROM PTIETY v height from about 10 mm to about ^<sup>uS</sup>í<sup>AND</sup>l! f<sup>L</sup> μιη? “ΕΤ leveling member can achieve a dS'svi'acTon ^ Se ~ a flat uniformity in at least one plane (for example, the horizontal plane) maximum of about 20%, 10%, 5%, 2%, 1% or 0.5%, compared to the average plane (eg horizontal plane) created by the top of the powder bed.
Figures 12A-12F schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for spreading and / or leveling the powder material. The figure
12A schematically depicts a blade 1207 located substantially perpendicular to surface 1203 moving in direction 1205. Figure 12B schematically depicts a blade 1207 located substantially parallel to surface 1208 moving in direction
1210. Figure 12C schematically represents a blade
1212 located practically parallel to the surface 1213 moving in the direction 1215. Figure 12D schematically represents a sprinkler 1217 located in motion in the direction 1220. Figure 12E schematically represents a roller 1222 located practically parallel to the surface
1223 moving in direction 1225. Figure 12F schematically represents a roller
1227 located
268
IKSTÍIUTO MEXICANO \ <, 3 li? £ LÁ iliOPIEDAD \ ~ <sub>v</sub> practically parallel to the surface 1228 that ^ gF'ffíüev & '-' ^ n 'the direction 1230.
Figures 14A-D schematically represent vertical lateral cross sections of various mechanisms for spreading and leveling the powder material; parallelograms 1413, 1423, 1426, 1446, 1447, 1453 and 1456 represent a schematic of any palette described in the present description; Rectangles 1415, 1424, 1444, and 1454 represent a schematic of any powder dispenser described in the present disclosure.
Figure 24 schematically represents vertical lateral cross sections of a mechanism for spreading, leveling and stirring the powder material. In this figure, parallelogram 2408 represents a schematic of any paddle described in the present description, rectangle 2406 represents a schematic of any powder dispenser described in the present disclosure, and rectangle 2404 represents a schematic of any dust removal member described. in the present description.
In some examples, the leveling member comprises a roller (eg, a cylinder). The roller may comprise one or more aperture ports (i.e., powder exit ports) through which the material being
269
MEXICAN INSTITUTE YOU ·?
. . . . . . .... _ ... OF IA PROKÉpAD Y '<sup>1</sup>-- ~ <sup>Γ</sup> Ó dust may come off the roller. The outputs can'TOwar along the rectangular cross section ^ Ι ^ -ΐΦά-ίΙ-Ιο.
(for example, a cylindrical roller). The rectangular cross section of the roll may comprise the height of the roll. The powder outlet ports can be located randomly or in a pattern along the rectangular cross section of the roller. The powder outlet ports can be located along a line within the rectangular cross section of the roller. The roller may comprise at least one opening port from which the powder enters the roller (ie the powder entry port). The dust entry can be located on the circular surface area of the roller (eg, the side of the roller), on its rectangular surface area, or on both the circular and rectangular surfaces. An opening (for example, a port) can have a shape comprising an ellipse (for example, a circle), parallelogram (for example, a rectangle or a square), triangle, any other geometric shape, an irregular shape, or any partial shape. or combination of these forms. The roller may comprise an internal cavity connecting the powder to at least one inlet port and to the one or more powder outlet ports. The internal cavity can enable the powder to flow from the
270 <Τ '<sup>7</sup>'·
LIV ί k 1 ΑΑΑΑΑ
ΒβΤΓΓΙ »'<? ·? í / A -At iV f) port of entry to port of exit, and<sup>c</sup>tc¿ifte ^ sÍ23Cíiíar connection of fluids between the single or more can £ fc «e» zd & = «» t \ t? ada and output. The powder material can move (eg flow) through the internal cavity from the powder inlet to the powder outlet. The shape and / or size of the powder opening port can determine the amount of powder dispensed from the roller. The roller can rotate.
The roller can rotate along its height (for example, along its longitudinal axis). The longitudinal axis of the roller can encompass the entire powder bed or a part of the powder bed. The speed of rotation of the roller (revolutions of the roller) can determine the amount of powder distributed by the roller. The rotation speed can determine the area of powder distributed by the roller.
The roller can be coupled to a control system. The control system can control the speed of the cylinder rotations and / or the speed of its horizontal or lateral angular movement (eg along a bed of powder).
The roller can comprise a smooth surface, a rough surface, a notch, a depression or a cavity.
The roller can be any of the rollers described in the present description. Figure 22 shows examples 2203,
271
IΜ ί-1
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
2204 and 2205 of various alternative rollers desoi ^ aECas present description. The roller of the me cani ame · β1ο · »« 4 · can sometimes rotate in the direction of lateral movement of the leveling mechanism or in a direction opposite to the direction of lateral movement of the leveling mechanism.
Figure 22, 2201 shows examples of the direction of lateral movement of roller 2203. In this example, roller 2203 rotates opposite to the direction of movement of the leveling mechanism, along an axis that is the longitudinal axis of the roller and , at the same time, normal to the lateral direction of movement of the roller (2201). When the roller spins (spins), it can induce the movement of any atmosphere surrounding the roller. Figure 22, 2207 shows examples of the movement of the atmosphere surrounding the roller.
The roller can be located a first distance above the surface of the layer of the powder material. The diameter of the roller can be at least 1 *, 5 *, 10 *, 50 *,
100 *, 500 * or more times (that is, *) the first distance.
The first distance can be at least about 10 pm, 50 pm, 100 pm, 150 pm, 200 pm, 250 pm, 300 pm, 350 pm,
400 pm, 450 pm, 500 pm, 550 pm or 600 pm. The first distance can be a maximum of approximately 10 pm, 50 ñ
miimu> w_iL Mr ι · τι ~ τ .. τ. : rt272
INSTITUTO MEXICANO 1 «'---A
OF THE FROPÍ2ÜAO? -.
pm, 100 pm, 150 pm, 200 pm, 250 pm, 300 pm, “TOO ^ pm ^ WO pm, 450 pm, 500 pm, 550 pm or 600 pm. Lprime? A distance
<td>the</td><td colspan="2">first</td>
<td>the</td><td colspan="2">first</td>
<td> 10</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td> 300</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td> 250</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td colspan="2">nent of</td><td>the</td>
distance can be from about 10 pm to about 400 pm, from about 300 pm to about 600 pm or from about 250 pm to about 450 pm. In some cases, the movement of the atmosphere surrounding the roller can induce the movement of the powder in the direction of movement. In some cases, dust can become suspended within the moving portion of the atmosphere. The speed of movement of the atmosphere can be the highest within the narrowest distance between the roller and the surface of the powder material. The atmosphere around the roller may comprise the circular motion of portions of the atmosphere. The atmosphere around the roll may comprise laminar movement of portions of the atmosphere. In some cases, when the roller rolls in the direction (for example, clockwise) of its lateral movement, the powder may be pushed down into the powder bed (for example, Figure 22, 2210 represents the bed of dust). On
273
IMPH;
¡Nstitctc ·. · «·. : · -S- - /. OF the r .; ..- 1.::1.-0 v. ..
some cases, when the roller rolls in the “^ Φϊ ^ οάΊ'όη opposite (for example, opposite to the direction of its lateral movement, the powder may be directed upwards (for example, Figure 22, represents the arrows 2206 designating the direction of the powder movement.) The rotating roller can generate a movement opposite (eg, counterclockwise) to the lateral translation movement of the roller throughout the powder bed. The opposite movement may comprise advancing the powder (relative to the lateral movement of the roller). The opposite movement may comprise moving the powder upward (eg, over the upper surface of the powder layer). The opposite movement may comprise advancing the powder (relative to the lateral movement of the roller) and simultaneously moving it upward (eg, above the surface of the powder layer). Upward and forward moving powder can form a boundary layer on top of the upper level surface of the powder bed. Roller rotation can continue boundary layer formation until a predetermined powder height is achieved. The roller may comprise a dust trap to catch any dusty material moving in the direction behind the
274
<img file="MX355451B_D0117.tif" />
roller (in relation to its movement
Lateral ifv). The dust trap can be in the shape of a curved surface (for example, a glass or a spoon). In some examples, when the powder is thrown upward, a dust removal mechanism (for example, the dust suction device) can pick up the excess dust from the surface. Figure 23,
2301 shows an example of a dust removal mechanism.
The leveling mechanism can span the entire width of the powder bed, the entire length of the powder bed, or a portion of the powder bed. The leveling mechanism may comprise a set of leveling members. The set of leveling members may or may not be evenly spaced. The set of leveling members can be spaced at most about 0.1mm, 0.3mm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm or 5mm. The set of leveling members can be separated by at least about 0.1mm,
0.3mm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 1.5mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm or 5mm. The set of leveling members can be spaced a distance between any of the aforementioned leveling members. For example, the set of leveling members can be spaced approximately
0.1mm to about 5mm, from about 1.5mm to
- · iís-sarit »'ar
275
TT \ ¿T 7 ^ 1 7f
;. INSTITUTO MEXICANO \ '' r- - '* -. ·. i »2 THE 1 'PROPERTY r“ Approximately 5 mm or approximately ¿approximately 2 mm.
A controller can be operatively coupled to the leveling member and controlling (eg, directing and / or regulating) the leveling member. The controller can control the speed of lateral movement of the roller. The controller can control the rotation speed of the roller. The controller can control the direction of rotation of the roller. The controller can control the number of notches or recesses on the surface of the roller. The controller can control the magnitude of the notches or recesses on the surface of the roller. The controller can control the temperature of the roller. The controller can control the roughness of the roller surface. The controller can control the roughness of the powder surface created by the roller.
In some examples, the leveling mechanism (eg, leveling member) prevents accumulation of dust in the direction of movement of the leveling member (eg, lateral movement). In some cases, the leveling mechanism comprises a paddle. The paddle can have any paddle shape described in the present description. The paddle may comprise a surface
276
MEXICAN INSTITUTE: / í
OF THE PROPERTY concave or convex. The trowel can level powdered IT ^^ teri ^ T ^ and cut, stir, shear, or collect unwanted powdered material. The paddle may be in the shape of a spoon or shovel. The paddle may be in the shape of the letter L (eg Figure 15, 1515 represents an alternative paddle). The paddle may have a notch, depression, or cavity. The notch can be of any shape. For example, the notch may comprise an elliptical (eg, circular), rectangular (eg, square), triangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, octagonal, any other geometric shape, or a random shape. The paddle may have a notch that can cut, push, lift, and / or collect powder material as it moves (for example, laterally). Figure 15 shows an example of a palette
1503 which has a notch 1514 in which dust is collected as the vane moves laterally in the direction
1504. In some cases, the paddle can pick up at least about 0.1 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.15 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.2 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.25 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.3 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.35 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.4 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.4 5 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.5 cm<sup>3</sup> or 0.55 cm<sup>3</sup> powder material. The pallet can pick up a maximum of approximately
<td> 0.1</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.15 cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td> 0.2</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.25</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td> 0.3</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td>0.35 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.4</td>
<td>cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td>0.45 cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.5</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td>0.55 cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td> 0 . 6</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>,</td><td> 0.65</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup>, 0.7 cm<sup>3</sup>,</td>
<td> 0.8</td><td>cm<sup>3</sup> or 0.9 cm<sup>3</sup></td><td>of</td><td>material</td><td>on</td><td>dust</td><td>. Read</td><td>palette can</td>
277
ΙΜΡϊ yy a
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V'm
OF THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL collect powdered material from any of the above-mentioned amounts of powdered material. For example, the pallet can collect the powder material in a volume of about 0.1 cm<sup>3</sup> at about 0.55 cm<sup>3</sup>, about 0.1 cm<sup>3</sup> to about 0.3 cm<sup>3</sup> or about 0.25 cm<sup>3</sup> at about 0.55 cm<sup>3</sup>.
The paddle can comprise at least one inclined surface.
For example, the portion closest to the tip of the paddle may comprise at least one inclined surface (eg, in Figure 20, the portion of the paddle closest to the paddle tip 1503 is 2005). The vane may comprise a first inclined surface, which may form a delta angle (δ) with the average plane formed by the upper surface of the layer of the powder material, the substrate or the base (for example, Figure 20, 2001). . The vane may comprise a second inclined surface, which may form a zeta angle (ζ) with the average plane formed by the upper surface of the powder material layer, with the substrate or with the base (eg 2003). The first and second inclined surfaces can be curved or flat. The first and second surfaces can form a symmetrical vane with the axis of symmetry in the center between the two surfaces. The first surface and the second can form
278
Λ · '! - ·. *
Λ?
-τ ... 33 '
INSTITUTO MEXICANO y <> DE LA PROPIEDAD an asymmetrical pallet in relation to the axis of siiffé'tf'Hfe éft ~ —ei center between the two surfaces. La pa 1 et'3 “j3üé'δ'δ''ό'ό'ίφΥ§iiSféi .........
at least one plane perpendicular to the average plane formed by the upper surface of the layer of the powder material. In the direction of motion, the delta angle can be an acute positive angle or an obtuse positive angle (that is, counterclockwise). The delta and zeta angles can be equal. The gamma and zeta angles can be different. Gamma can be greater than zeta.
Zeta can be greater than delta. Viewed from the same direction, delta, zeta, or both can be obtuse angles. Viewed from the same direction, gamma, zeta, or both can be acute angles. Viewed from the same direction, gamma, zeta, or both can be right angles. The first and second surfaces can be parallel to each other. The first and second surfaces can be non-parallel to each other. Zeta and / or delta can be at least about 1 °, 5 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °, 30 °, 40 °,
50°, 60°, 70°, 80°, 90°, 100°, 120°, 125°, 130°, 135°, 140°,
145 °, 150 °, 155 °, 160 °, 165 °, 170 °, 175 ° (degrees) or more. Delta and / or zeta can be a maximum of about 5 °, 10 °,
15°, 20°, 30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°, 90°, 100°, 120°, 125°,
130 °, 135 °, 140 °, 145 °, 150 °, 155 °, 160 °, 165 °, 170 °, 175 ° or
279
<img file="MX355451B_D0118.tif" />
ΙΜΡϊ £
MEXICAN INSTITUTE OF PROPERTY less. Delta and / or zeta can be any value of the aforementioned values in degrees for “étel t á 'and / or zeta. For example, delta and / or zeta can be from about 1 ° to about 175 °, from about 1 ° to about 90 °, from about 90 ° to about 175 °, or from about 15 ° to about 135 °.
The blade may comprise a sharp-edged bottom surface (eg, a chamfer). The sharp bottom surface can be flat or curved. The paddle can comprise a flat or a curved surface. The radius of curvature may be above the bottom edge-finished surface (eg, opposite the direction of the substrate) or below the bottom edge-ended surface (eg, towards the substrate direction). For example, Figure 20 shows a lower portion of a blade 2001 that tapers in the direction of motion 2002 and is flat. The sharp bottom surface (for example, a flat surface) can form an epsilon angle (ε) with the average top surface of the powder material, with the substrate, or with the base or with a plane parallel thereto. The angle can be an acute positive angle or an obtuse positive angle. The angle of the vane (delta
280
ΤΜΏ Ji.;. V „-, ...,
δ) can form a positive obtuse angle and ei<sup>or</sup>$ iM $ £ o bottom edge ending (eps i lonM-p ^ © 4e ~ -form ... .a ..
acute positive angle when viewed from the same observation position. The angle of the blade (delta) can form an obtuse positive angle and the angle of the bottom edge ended (epsilon) can form an acute positive angle. The vane angle (delta) can form an acute positive angle and the sharp bottom angle (epsilon) can form an obtuse positive angle. The vane can be substantially perpendicular to the average surface of the powder, substrate, or base layer. For example, Figure 20 shows a vane that forms a positive obtuse delta angle (δ), which has a sharp bottom, which forms an acute positive epsilon angle (ε). In some cases, both the angle of the delta vane and the angle of the bottom end with an epsilon edge can form obtuse positive angles. In some cases, both the angle of the delta vane and the angle of the bottom end of the epsilon edge can form acute positive angles. Epsilon and delta can have a different value. Positive angles can be counterclockwise angles.
Positive can be designated as a first direction. Both of them
281 Mr ί>
INSTITUTO M3X1CAÍMO ”- <sup>1</sup>, positive angles can be positive quat ¥ € fe | ™ ^ * P from the same observation position. ÉaaUx) .n, -can .s.ex less than about 0.1 °, 0.2 °, 0.3 °, 0.4 °, 0.5 °, 0.6 °,
0.7 °, 0.8 °, 0.9 °, 1 °, 2 °, 3 °, 4 °, 5 °, 6 °, 7 °, 8 °, 9 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °, 30 °, 40 ° or 50 °. Epsilon can be a maximum of about 0.1 °, 0.2 °, 0.3 °, 0.4 °, 0.5 °, 0.6 °, 0.7 °, 0.8 °, 0.9 °, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th, 15th, 20th, 30th, 40th or 50th. Epsilon can be any value between the degrees values mentioned above for epsilon. For example, epsilon can be from about 0.1 ° to about 50 °, from about 0.1 ° to about 20 °, from about 20 ° to about 50 °, or from about 10 ° to about 30 °.
In some cases, the edge-finished bottom is of a lower height compared to the height of the entire pallet. An example of the relative heights is shown in the
<td>Figure 20,</td><td>what</td><td>It represents</td><td>h</td><td>like height</td><td>of</td><td>extreme</td>
<td>sharp. On</td><td colspan="2">some cases,</td><td>h</td><td colspan="3">is at least approximately</td>
<td>0.1mm, 0.2</td><td>mm,</td><td>0.3mm, 0.4</td><td>mm,</td><td>0.5mm, 0.6mm,</td><td> 0.7</td><td>mm, 0.8</td>
<td>mm, 0.9 mm,</td><td> 1.0</td><td>mm, 1.1 mm,</td><td> 1.2</td><td>mm, 1.3 mm, 1.4</td><td>mm,</td><td>1.5 mm,</td>
<td>1.6mm, 1.7</td><td>mm,</td><td>1.7mm, 1.8</td><td>mm,</td><td>1.9 mm 0 2.0 mm</td><td>. On</td><td>Some</td>
<td colspan="3">cases, h is at most 0.</td><td>1 mm,</td><td>0.2mm, 0.3mm,</td><td> 0.4</td><td>mm, 0.5</td>
<td>mm, 0.6 mm,</td><td> 0.7</td><td>mm, 0.8 mm,</td><td> 0.9</td><td>mm, 1.0 mm, 1.1</td><td>mm,</td><td>1.2 mm,</td>
282
<img file="MX355451B_D0119.tif" />
1.3 mm,
1.4 mm,
1.5 mm,
1.6 mm,
<td>mm or 2.0 mm. On</td><td colspan="3">some cases,</td><td colspan="3">h is any .v $ Xo.P „, eptre</td>
<td>those mentioned</td><td colspan="3">previously</td><td colspan="2">for the heights h.</td><td>For</td>
<td>example, h</td><td>can</td><td>to be</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td>0.1 mm</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 2.0</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td>0.1 mm</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1.0</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td>0.9 mm</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 2.0</td><td>mm or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td>0.7 mm</td><td>to</td>
about 1.5 mm.
At least part of the blade may comprise simple metal, metallic alloy, an allotropic variety of simple carbon, ceramic, plastic, rubber, resin, polymer, glass, stone, or a zeolite. At least part of the blade can comprise a hard material. At least part of the blade can comprise a soft material. At least the portion of the blade may comprise the tip of the blade; the bottom of the pallet that faces the bottom of the container, the substrate, or the base or the entire pallet. At least part of the paddle may comprise a material that is not flexible during leveling of the powder material. At least part of the blade may comprise a material that is substantially inflexible when pushed against the powder material during the leveling process. At least part of the paddle can comprise a flexible material
283
IMPí <77 lUÜlUMEMuhi »w \<sub>Λ</sub>·... ' ,<sub>v</sub>. .., -, »τ
Say ΙΑ PROPERTY>
when pushed against the object that it understands ^<sup>r</sup>’<sup>IJ!</sup>iW<sup>L</sup> Transformed powder material that was allowed to harden The `` part '' of the paddle may comprise a material that is substantially inflexible during leveling of the powder material or during the removal of an object comprising a transformed powder material that was allowed to harden. At least part of the paddle can comprise an organic material. At least part of the pallet can comprise plastic, rubber or Teflon®. The paddle may comprise a material to which the powdered material does not adhere. At least part of the paddle may comprise a coating to which the powder material does not adhere. At least part of the pallet can be loaded to prevent powder material from adhering.
The paddle can comprise a flexible support. The paddle can pivot or rotate relative to the flexible support. The paddle can be suspended on springs. The spring can be attached to the flexible bracket. The paddle can be permanently attached (for example, to the flexible support). In some embodiments, the vane can be prevented from pivoting. In some embodiments, the vane can be prevented from rotating. The paddle can be interchangeable, detachable, non-detachable, or non-interchangeable. Figure 14A shows schematically
284 <π · ί; ·· <
(ΝΓΓΓΤυτσ MEXICAN Ί. J / a pallet 1413 (representing any pallet% ^^^ r £ hfe¿¿n 'the present description) on a stand.
a flexible stand) that can be moved horizontally
1411. The stand can let the paddle move vertically, horizontally or diagonally. Figure 14B schematically shows two paddles 1423 and 1426 respectively on supports 1422 and 1425 with arrows on them representing vertical movements. The support can comprise one or more springs. The bracket can let the paddle move vertically when it is against an obstacle. The obstacle can be a hardened material as described in the present description. The obstacle can be a generated part of a 3D object or a generated 3D object or a hardened material that was not part of the 3D object. The paddle can deform when it is against the object. The paddle may not deform substantially when it is against the object. The concave surface can be used to level the layer of powder material that is deposited in the enclosure (for example, on top of the substrate or on top of the base). The powder material can be pushed by the paddle (eg, by the concave surface). The powder material can be pushed by the paddle in the direction of its movement. Powder material can be pushed (by
285
ÍM iPí <^> «1
L-AVjí. .i.,<sub>c</sub> , tNsmy, -o Mexican V. ...... For example, relocate, shear, or remove) poaN £ ^ üáit> aiefca_) eW '' the opposite direction of its movement. Εto-gi-aj ».- eir. powder may be pushed down the paddle in a direction other than the direction of its movement. The powder material can be pushed by the paddle in a direction different from the direction of its movement or opposite to its movement. In some examples, the concave surface may not face the bottom of the enclosure, substrate, or base.
The paddle can move. For example, the palette can move horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. The paddle can be moved manually or automatically (for example, by a mechanism controlled by a controller). The movement of the paddle can be programmed. The movement of the paddle can be predetermined. The movement of the paddle can be according to an algorithm.
The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a leveling mechanism. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a powder dispensing mechanism and a leveling mechanism. The layer dispensing mechanism can move. The layer dispensing mechanism can move horizontally, vertically or diagonally. Layer dispensing mechanism can be moved manually or automatically
286
ΙΜΡΪνΟ η »
INSTITUTO MEXICANO, PE LA PROPERTY (for example, controlled by a controller). <sup>li</sup>B'l<sup>J</sup>'<sup>, l</sup>'Ffttovrm ± entO of the dispensing mechanism of the layer being programmed -. The movement of the layer dispensing mechanism can be predetermined. The movement of the layer dispensing mechanism can be in accordance with an algorithm.
The powder dispensing mechanism (for example, the powder dispenser) can move. The powder dispensing mechanism can move horizontally, vertically or diagonally.
The powder dispensing mechanism can be moved manually or automatically (eg controlled by a controller).
The dust removal mechanism can move. The removal mechanism can move horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The removal mechanism can be moved manually or automatically (eg controlled by a controller). The movement of the dust removal mechanism can be programmed. The movement of the dust removal mechanism can be predetermined. The movement of the dust removal mechanism can be according to an algorithm.
The powder leveling mechanism can move. The leveling mechanism can move horizontally, vertically or diagonally. The leveling mechanism can be moved manually or automatically (for example, controlled by a<sup>287</sup> T nr
INSTITUTO MEXICANO M
I heard IA PROPERTY \ \,, - 'industrial' controller). The movement of the leveling mechanism can be programmed. The movement of the leveling mechanism can be predetermined. The movement of the leveling mechanism can be according to an algorithm.
The layer dispensing mechanism can move in a horizontal direction from one side of the enclosure to its other side. The powder dispensing mechanism, the dust removal mechanism, the leveling mechanism and / or the paddle can move in a horizontal direction from one side of the enclosure to its other side. The vertical position of the powder dispensing mechanism, the dust removal mechanism, the leveling mechanism and / or the paddle can be adjusted. The horizontal position of the powder dispensing mechanism, the dust removal mechanism, the leveling mechanism and / or the paddle can be adjusted. The angular position of the powder dispensing mechanism, the powder leveling mechanism, the leveling mechanism and / or the paddle can be adjusted.
In some examples, the layer dispensing mechanism comprises at least one powder dispensing mechanism and at least one leveling member. At least the only powder dispensing mechanism and at least the single leveling member can be connected or disconnected. Figure 14A
288
IMPIyX
INSTITUTO MEXICANO schematically shows a pallet 1413 any pallet described in the pr —do oc-rlpoi ón).
connected via a connector 1437 to a powder dispensing mechanism 1415 (representing any powder dispensing mechanism described in the present disclosure). At least the only powder dispensing mechanism and at least the single leveling member can move at different speeds or at the same speed. At least the single powder dispensing mechanism and at least the single leveling member can be controlled simultaneously by the controller or non-simultaneously controlled (eg, controlled sequentially) by the controller. The speed and / or position of at least the single powder dispensing mechanism and at least the single leveling member may be controlled simultaneously by the controller or non-simultaneously controlled (eg, controlled sequentially) by the controller. The speed and / or position of at least the single powder dispenser and at least the single leveling member may be mutually dependent or independent. In relation to the direction of travel, the leveling member can follow the powder dispensing mechanism. Regarding the direction of travel, the leveling member may precede the
289
I HEARD'··- . ?
INSTITUTO MEXICANO W -, 'powder dispensing mechanism. In some at least one powder dispenser may be arranged ..... between two leveling members. Fig. 14B schematically shows an example of a first leveling member having a paddle 1423, a second leveling member having a paddle 1426, and a powder dispenser 1424. The two leveling members can move vertically (eg,
Figure 14B) or they may not move (for example, Figure 14D). In some examples, the underside of both leveling members (which face the exposed surface of the powder bed) are located at the same vertical height relative to the bottom of the enclosure, substrate, or base (i.e. example, Figure 14D). In some examples, the underside of both leveling members, which face the powder bed, are located at different vertical height relative to the bottom of the enclosure, substrate, or base (for example, Figure
14B). For example, relative to the direction of movement, the bottom face of the front leveling member (eg, Figure 14B, 1426) may be higher than the bottom face of the distal leveling member (eg, 1423) when moving. in a first address (eg 1430). When the dispensing mechanism of the layer
290
INSTITUTO MEXICANO '£ / OF PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL _______ reaches the end of the powder bed or precedes the end of the powder bed, the direction of movement may change and thus the level of the underside of the leveling members may change accordingly.
In some examples, at least one powder dispensing member (eg, powder dispenser, Figure 14A, 1415) may precede at least one leveling member (eg, 1412 and 1413 collectively) relative to the direction of movement. (for example, 1411). In this example, the powder dispensed from the powder dispenser can be leveled as the leveling system follows the powder dispenser. When the layer dispensing mechanism reaches the end of the powder bed or precedes the end of the powder bed, the direction of movement may change and thus the leveling member may move to a position that enables the powder dispensing member to precede the powder. leveling member. Figure 14C shows an example of changing the position of the leveling member (from 1443 and 1446 to 1445 and 1447 respectively), relative to the powder dispenser 1444; while changing the direction of movement from 1451 to 1452. Such movement can be, for example, a 180 degree turn around the axis that is practically perpendicular to the upper surface ιΧΛΛβΛΒ .- 'ΒΓ »» »
291 , 'T
y) average dust bed layer, '. al
Ε <~ ¡TfUTO MEXICANO © 5 THE substrate. „·> · To the base. The axis of rotation can pass through the powder dispensing mechanism (eg, 1441). The axis of rotation can pass through the conduit (eg cascade or drop) of powder material from the powder dispensing mechanism. In some examples, the powder is dispensed when the layer dispensing mechanism (for example, comprising the leveling member and the powder dispenser) moves in a first direction and the deposited layer of powder material is leveled when the mechanism Layer dispenser moves in the opposite direction. Powdered material can be dispensed by the layer dispensing mechanism (eg, the powder dispenser) when the layer dispensing mechanism is moved in a first direction. The powder material can be leveled by the leveling mechanism when the layer dispensing mechanism is moved in a second direction. The first and second addresses can be the same address. The first and second directions can be opposite directions.
In some cases, the mechanism that is configured to supply a powder material (eg, the powder dispenser) to the powder bed may be an ultrasonic powder dispensing mechanism. The mechanism that is
292
<img file="MX355451B_D0120.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0121.tif" />
configured to supply the powder to the powder bed can be a vibratory powder dispensing mechanism. The powder dispenser may comprise a vibrator or a shaker. The mechanism configured to supply the powder to the substrate may comprise a vibrating mesh. The vibration can be produced by an ultrasonic transducer, a piezoelectric device, a rotary motor (for example, with an eccentric cam), or any of their combinations. The ultrasonic and / or vibrating powder dispensing mechanism can dispense the powder in one, two or three dimensions. The frequency of an ultrasonic and / or vibratory disturbance of the dispenser can be selected such that the powder is supplied to the powder bed at a predetermined rate.
The ultrasonic and / or vibrating dispenser can dispense the powder onto the powder bed from a location above the powder bed. The ultrasonic and / or vibratory dispenser can dispense the powder onto the powder bed from a location that is at a relatively higher height relative to the powder bed (eg, the top of the enclosure). The ultrasonic and / or vibratory dispenser can dispense the powder onto the powder bed in a downward or lateral direction. The ultrasonic and / or vibrating dispenser can dispense the powder onto the powder bed
293
<img file="MX355451B_D0122.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0123.tif" />
institute A:? /. ?. ·.? stack lNí ^ l »wí # i í * LA £» '* · <Σ .7- ·' '·' in a downward direction. The powder can be dispensed by means of gravitational force. The ultrasonic and / or vibratory dispenser may be an overhead dispenser that dispenses the powder from a position on top of the substrate, the base, or the powder bed (or from a container to house the powder bed). The vibrator can comprise a spring. The vibrator can be an electric or hydraulic vibrator.
The powder dispenser may comprise a vibrator. The
Figure 15, 1507 shows an example of a powder dispenser
1509 with a vibrator 1507. The powder dispenser may comprise two or more vibrators (eg, a set of vibrators). The set of vibrators can be arranged linearly, non-linearly or randomly. The set of vibrators can be arranged along the opening of the powder dispenser or in the vicinity thereof. The powder dispenser can be comprised of multiple opening ports. The set of vibrators can be located along the set of opening ports (eg, the multiple openings). The vibrators can be arranged along a line. The vibrators can be arranged along a linear pattern. The vibrators can be arranged along a non-linear pattern. The arrangement of the vibrators can
294 ! λ / · '«!' I. ÁVu
Uerrf.TDi'f determine the speed at which the powder '^^ &' ie óféT powder dispenser. The vibraQie9? ^ Ersj— found on one face of the powder dispenser. The
Figure 16A shows an example of a powder dispenser 1605 comprising a mesh 1607 and a vibrator 1603. The vibrator may be near the outlet opening (eg, the port). The powder dispenser may comprise a mesh that is connected to a vibrator. The powder dispenser comprises a mesh that can vibrate. The vibrator (s) may vibrate at least some of the powder material within the powder dispenser (eg, Figure 16A, 1604). The vibrator (s) can vibrate at least a part of the body of the powder dispenser. The body of the powder dispenser (eg, the powder reservoir) may comprise a lightweight material such as a simple metal or lightweight metallic alloy (eg, aluminum). The vibrators can be controlled manually or automatically (eg by a controller). The frequency of the vibrator can be at least approximately
<td> 20 20</td><td>Hertz l</td><td>: hz),</td><td> 30</td><td>Hz,</td><td>40 Hz</td><td> , 50</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 60</td><td>Hz,</td><td>70 H</td><td>z, 80 Hz,</td><td> 90</td>
<td>Hz,</td><td>100 Hz,</td><td> 110</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 120</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 130</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 140</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 150</td><td>Hz, 160</td><td>Hz,</td>
<td> 170</td><td>Hz, 180</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 190</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 200</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 210</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 220</td><td>Hz,</td><td>230 Hz,</td><td> 240</td>
<td>Hz,</td><td>250 Hz,</td><td> 260</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 270</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 280</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 290</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 300</td><td>Hz, 350</td><td>Hz,</td>
295
<img file="MX355451B_D0124.tif" />
400 Hz, 450 Hz, 500 Hz, 550 Hz, 600 Hz, 700 Hz, 800 Hz, 900
Hz or 1,000 Hz. The vibrator frequency can be a maximum of approximately 20 Hertz (Hz), 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 50
<td>Hz,</td><td> 60</td><td>Hz,</td><td>70 Hz</td><td> , 80</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 90</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 100</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 110</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 120</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 130</td>
<td>Hz,</td><td> 140</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 150</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 160</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 170</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 180</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 190</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 200</td><td>Hz,</td>
<td> 210</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 220</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 230</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 240</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 250</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 260</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 270</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 280</td>
<td>Hz,</td><td> 290</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 300</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 350</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 400</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 450</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 500</td><td>Hz,</td><td> 550</td><td>Hz,</td>
600 Hz, 700 Hz, 800 Hz, 900 Hz, or 1,000 Hz. The vibrator frequency can be any number from the vibrator frequencies mentioned above. For example, the frequency of the vibrator can be from about 20 Hz to
<td>approximately</td><td> 1,000</td><td>Hz</td><td>, from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>Hz</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 400</td><td>Hz,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>Hz</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 700</td><td>Hz</td><td>or from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 600</td><td>Hz</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1,000</td><td>Hz.</td><td colspan="2">The vibrators in the</td><td colspan="2">set</td><td>from</td>
Vibrators can vibrate at the same or different frequencies. Vibrators can have a vibration amplitude of at least about 1 times the gravitational force (G), 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G, 6G, 7G, 8G, 9G, 10G, 11G,
15G, 17G, 19G, 20G, 30G, 40G or 50G. Vibrators can have a maximum vibration amplitude of approximately 1 times the gravitational force (G), 2G, 3G,
4G, 5G, 6G, 7G, 8G, 9G, 10G, 11G, 15G, 17G, 19G, 20G, 30G,
296 τιζΓΏΐΓ
1M Jr £. ;
TO MEXICAN /. 7 * 7 *
I i T3C> ry .. 'Br.¿.r \ »* · .....“ ·;., - · *.'
INSTITUTE
DELA PRCHSDAO INDUSTRIAL
40G or 50G. The vibrators can vibrate with an amplitude that has any value between the vibration amplitude values mentioned above. For example, vibrators can vibrate with an amplitude of approximately
1G to about 50G, from about 1G to about 30G, from about 19G to about
50G or from about 7G to about 11G.
In some cases, the mechanism configured to supply the powder from the reservoir to the substrate (ie, the powder dispenser) may be a screw, elevator, or conveyor belt. In some cases, the mechanism configured to supply the powder from the reservoir to the substrate (ie, the powder dispenser) may be a screw. The screw can be a rotating screw in a container. When the screw is turned, the powder can be dispensed from the screw through an outlet opening (eg, a port). The screw can dispense the powder in an upward, lateral or downward direction relative to the substrate. The pitch and size of the screw threads can be selected such that a predetermined amount of powder is dispensed onto the substrate with each complete or partial turn of the screw in the container. The speed of rotation of the screw in the
297
<img file="MX355451B_D0125.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0126.tif" />
<4 worm gear can be selected so that the powder is dispensed onto the substrate at a predetermined speed.
In some cases, the powder dispensed by the screw may be spread over at least a fraction of the substrate 904 by a rotating screw, the linear movement of a spreading tool, and / or one or more baffles. The screw can be an Archimedean screw. The screw can be an endless screw.
The powder dispenser can be shaped as an inverted cone, a funnel, an inverted pyramid, a cylinder, any irregular shape, or any combination thereof.
Examples of funnel dispensers are depicted in Figures 13A-13D, which show side cross sections of a powder dispenser. The opening at the bottom of the powder dispenser (for example, Figure 13A,
1334) can be completely blocked by a vertically movable plane (eg 1305) on top of which the powder is disposed (eg 1304). The plane can be located directly in the opening or at a vertical distance d from the opening. The movement (eg 1302) of the vertically movable plane can be controlled. When the plane moves vertically upwards (for example, in the opposite direction to the base (for example, 1310)), they form
298
<img file="MX355451B_D0127.tif" />
side openings between the plane and the edges of the powder dispenser, out of which the powder can slide through the funnel opening (eg 1307).
The powder dispenser may comprise at least one mesh that enables the homogeneous (eg uniform) distribution of the powder over the powder bed (or the container that houses the powder bed). The mesh can be located in the bottom opening of the powder dispenser (e.g. 1334) or anywhere between the bottom opening and the position where the plane completely blocks the powder dispenser (e.g. at any position within distance d in Figure
13A).
The powder dispenser can be a double mesh dispenser (eg Figure 13C). The double mesh dispenser can be shaped as an inverted cone, a funnel, an inverted pyramid, a cylinder, any irregular shape, or any combination thereof. Examples of funnel dispensers are depicted in Figures 13A20D, which show cross-sections of a powder dispenser. The bottom of the double mesh dispenser may comprise an opening (eg, 1335). The opening may be comprised of two meshes (e.g. 1323) of the
299 __ \ TCTiT'JTO mauonuAl '/' i
V / which at least one is mobile (for example-, horizontally)
The two meshes are aligned so that the opening of one mesh can be completely blocked by the second mesh. A horizontal movement (for example 1320) of at least the single moving screen can misalign the two screens and form openings that allow the flow of powder from the reservoir over the two screens (for example 1319) downward in the direction of the bed. powder (for example, 1324). Misalignment of the meshes can modify the size and / or shape of the openings through which the powder material can exit the powder dispenser. The apertures can have a fundamental length scale of at least about 0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.03mm, 0.05mm, 0.07mm,
0.09mm, 0.1mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm or 10mm. The apertures can have a fundamental length scale at most of about 0.001mm, 0.01mm, 0.03mm,
0.05mm, 0.07mm, 0.09mm, 0.1mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm or 10mm. The openings can have a fundamental length scale between any of the values mentioned above. For example, the apertures may have a fundamental length scale of about 0.001mm to about 10mm or 0.1mm to about 5mm.
300 τ ΛΑ Ό Κ 1. Μ .7 11 \ .3
INSTITUTE Nl- «O · OV,; T
FROM <sup>OR</sup>INDÜS1 j¿L <sup>L;</sup> 'F ~~
The powder dispenser may comprise a port for
<img file="MX355451B_D0128.tif" />
outlet opening residing within a face of the powder dispenser. The face can be the bottom of the powder dispenser, which faces the substrate, the base, or the bottom of the enclosure (eg, the chamber). Figure 13C shows an example of a powder dispenser 1318 having a bottom-facing outlet port 1335. The face on which the outlet opening port resides may be different from the bottom face of the powder dispenser. For example, the face can be one side of the powder dispenser. The face can be a face that is not parallel to the layer of the powder material. The face can be practically perpendicular to the average plane formed by the upper surface of the powder bed. Figure 15 shows an example of a powder dispenser 1509 having a side exit opening port 1511 that is substantially perpendicular to the top surface of the powder bed 1506. The face may be substantially perpendicular to the median plane of the substrate or the base. The face can be located on the top face of the powder dispenser. The top face of the dispenser can be the face facing away from the substrate, from the base, or from the bottom of the
301 ε- -η, rr -τλ '' / .....
Β π ί '' 'C-γ' · Υί * institu - ->
FROM ·..· _/ . ι V'Μ enclosure. The top face of the dispenser can be `` e-a'rá '' facing in the opposite direction<sup>1</sup> a ......... 1 ^ “Exposed surface ·· of the powder bed. The face can be a side face. The side face can be a face that is neither the bottom nor the top face. One surface of the face (eg, the entire face) may slope towards the powder bed, the substrate, the bottom of the container, or the base. The slope may comprise a surface that curves towards the substrate, the base and the bottom of the enclosure or towards the powder bed. The curved surface may have a radius of curvature centered at a point below the bottom of the powder dispenser. The curved surface may have a radius of curvature centered at a point above the bottom of the powder dispenser.
The inclination may comprise a plane that forms an acute angle with an average surface of the substrate, of the base or with an upper surface of the layer of the powder material or with a plane parallel thereto. For example, a surface of the underside of the powder dispenser may form an acute or an obtuse angle (ίί, φ) with the average plane formed by the upper surface of the powder material, by the substrate, or by the base. Figures 18B and 18D each show an example of a powder dispenser (1813 and 1833
302
INSTITUTE V'CA ί-i>> U, í
CM EA Κσ.'ίϊ. '? Λίϊ, -U' respectively), which has a port of abertuf'á '<sup>JS</sup>'d ^ - salfda' lateral (1812 and 1831 respectively), which ίτοττη ^ ΐΛί arigul'ó fi '(φ) with the upper surface of the 1810 powder material and
1830 respectively (or with a line parallel to it).
Figure 18B shows an example of an acute angle fi and the
Fig. 18D shows an example of an obtuse angle fi. The angle fi can be at least about 5 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °,
30°, 40°, 50°, 60°, 70°, 80°, 90°, 100°, 110°, 120°, 130°, 140°,
150 °, 160 ° or 170 °. Fi can be at most approximately 5 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °, 30 °, 40 °, 50 °, 60 °, 70 °, 80 °, 90 °, 100 °, 110 °, 120 °, 130 °, 140 °, 150 °, 160 ° or 170 °. The angle fi can be any value between the values in degrees mentioned above for fi. For example, the angle fi may be from about 5 ° to about 170 °, from about 5 ° to about 90 °, or from about 90 ° to about 170 °.
The powder dispenser may comprise a lower part having a first sloping lower surface. In some cases, one edge (side) of the surface at the bottom of the powder dispenser lies vertically on top of another edge of that surface. The surface can be convex or concave. The angle of the first sloping lower surface may or may not be adjusted. The first
303
11 / lljjs
ÍNSa-MEXICAN FUTO '' 'N sj
OF THE PROPERTY \ - -. <* Inclined lower surface can be oriented towards the bottom of the enclosure, of the substrate or of the lower part of the powder dispenser can be a surface inclined. Figure 17 shows an example of a powder dispenser 1702 with a sloped bottom surface 1711. The first inclined lower surface may form a first acute angle (gamma γ) in a first direction (eg, the positive direction) with a plane parallel to the average upper surface of the powder material, substrate or base. The bottom of the powder dispenser may comprise one or more additional surfaces. The one or more additional surfaces may be adjacent to the bottom of the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces can be attached to the bottom of the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces can be disconnected from the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces may be extensions of the underside of the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces can be sloped. The angle of the one or more additional surfaces may or may not be adjusted.
The one or more additional inclined surfaces may form an acute angle (theta Θ) in a second direction with a plane parallel to the average upper surface of the
304
A ΓΜΓ XX. ....
iw. ri title
MEXICAN INSTITUTE,
Say U KjGíiEDAD \ í f ['>
powder material. The direction (first and / or second) can be clockwise or counterclockwise. * ..... The * "'direction can be either the positive or negative direction. The first address can be the same as the second address. The first direction can be opposite to the second direction.
For example, the first and second directions can be clockwise. The first and second directions can be counterclockwise.
The first direction can be clockwise and the second direction can be counterclockwise. The first direction can be counterclockwise and the second direction can be clockwise. The first and second directions can be viewed from the same position. At least part of the one or more additional surfaces may be located at a different vertical position from the bottom of the first sloping bottom surface. At least part of the one or more additional surfaces can be located in a vertical position higher than the bottom of the first sloping bottom surface. At least part of the one or more additional surfaces may be located in a lower vertical position than the bottom of the first sloping lower surface. The bottom position
305 of the one or more additional surfaces
<img file="MX355451B_D0129.tif" />
a higher or lower vertical position Lfüis la · £ * »& Α · £ ·· 1όη.
bottom of the first sloping bottom surface. The upper position of the one or more additional surfaces may be located in a vertical position higher or lower than the upper position of the first sloping lower surface. The one or more additional surfaces may comprise a conveyor belt. The conveyor belt can move in the direction of movement of the powder dispenser or in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the powder dispenser. Figure 16D shows an example of a powder dispenser 1634 having a sloping bottom surface 1639 and an additional surface parallel to the base, comprising a conveyor belt.
1640, where the conveyor belt is moving in the opposite direction to the direction of motion 1638. Theta and / or delta can be at least about 5 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °, 30 °, 40 °, 50 ° , 60 °, 70 ° or 80 °. Theta and / or delta can be at most approximately 5 °, 10 °, 15 °, 20 °, 30 °, 40 °, 50 °, 60 °, 70 °, or 80 °. Theta and / or delta can be any value between the degree values mentioned above for gamma and / or delta. For example, theta and / or delta can be from about 5 ° to about 80 °, from about
306
<img file="MX355451B_D0130.tif" />
JV, INSTITUTO MEXICANO at about 40 ° or about ^^^ 'e about 80 °.
The one or more additional surfaces may comprise a plane that is horizontally separated from the powder outlet opening (eg, the port) by a gap. The
Figure 28 shows an example of a powder dispenser 2839 that has an additional sloped surface 2733 that is separated from the opening 2835 by a gap. The gap can be adjusted. The angle of the inclined surface can be adjusted. The angle can be any of the values of theta (Θ) mentioned above. The upper surface of the inclined surface can be smooth or rough. The upper surface of the inclined surface may comprise extrusions or recesses. Inlets or extrusions can be random or follow a pattern. The upper surface of the inclined surface may be polished (for example, by any polishing method described in the present description). The upper surface of the inclined surface can be formed by sanding with sandpaper. The grain size of sandpaper, as designated by the Institute of Abrasive Manufacturers of
United States Coating (CAMI), can be a maximum of about 24, 30, 36,
307 impipe
MEXICAN INSTITUTE \
40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, .150, 8
220, 240, 300, 360, 400, 600, 800 or 1.00 Or The Laid of the sandpaper, according to CAMI, can be at least 24, 30,
36, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 150, 160, 180,
200, 220, 240, 300, 360, 400, 600, 800, or 1,000. The size of
<td>according</td><td>CAMI, can</td><td>be a</td><td>paper</td>
<td>the</td><td>values of</td><td>size</td><td>grain</td>
<td>For</td><td>example, the</td><td>size</td><td>grain</td>
<td>CAMI,</td><td>it can be from</td><td colspan="2">approximately</td>
<td> 400,</td><td colspan="2">approximately</td><td>20 a</td>
60 to about 300, from about 100 to about
600 or from about 20 to about 1,000. The roughness of the upper surface of the inclined surface may be equivalent to the roughness of the sandpaper mentioned in the present description. The roughness of the upper surface of the inclined surface may be equal to the roughness of a treatment with the sandpaper mentioned in the present description. The inclined surface (eg, 2833) and the body of the powder dispenser (eg, reservoir 2839) can be of the same type of material or of different types of materials. The inclined surface may comprise a rougher material than that which practically makes up the body of the dispenser.
308
LMi_. .
MEXICAN INSTITUTE
OF PROPERTY V * -
INDUSTRIAL '' M-powder. The inclined surface may comprise a material
<img file="MX355451B_D0131.tif" />
«JJL Ll« IIU heavier than the one that practically composes the body of the powder dispenser. The inclined surface may comprise a harder material (eg, less flexible) than that which substantially makes up the body of the powder dispenser. For example, the body of the powder dispenser can be made of a light metal (eg aluminum), while the inclined surface can be made of steel or a steel alloy. The inclined surface can be mounted, while the body of the powder dispenser can vibrate or bend. Powder dispensed out of the outlet opening (for example, the port) of the powder dispensing reservoir (for example, Figure 28, 2839) can move down by means of gravitational force (for example, 2834), touching the surface inclined (for example 2733) during its drop, bounce off the inclined surface and continue its fall (for example 2832) to the powder bed (for example 2831) or to the substrate or base (for example 2830) . In some embodiments, when the powder material exits the powder dispensing mechanism (for example, the member) into the environment of the enclosure (for example, the chamber) and moves in the vertical direction of the powder bed (that is, down toward the the powder bed), finds at least one clog. The
309 obstruction can be a surface
MEXICAN TNSTITUTE. .
OF THE PROEIETY Y. ν<sub>Λ!</sub>- tV '
INDUSTRIAL The surface can be fixed or mobile (for example, a conveyor belt). The surface can be rough or smooth. The obstruction comprises a rough surface. The obstruction can be an inclined surface that forms an angle with the exposed surface of the powder bed. The angle can be any of the theta angles described in the present description. The dust removal mechanism (eg, the member) can be integrated within the powder dispensing member to form a dust dispensing and removing member described in the present disclosure.
Figure 18C shows an example of a powder dispenser
1824 with a sloped bottom surface 1821 that forms a counterclockwise gamma angle with a surface parallel to the base 1820; the powder dispenser having an additional surface 1823 that connects to the powder dispenser 1824, tilts and forms a counterclockwise theta angle with a surface parallel to the base, where theta is different from gamma (greater); and surface 1821 begins at a higher vertical position (di) than surface 1823 (d2) and ends at a higher vertical position (d2) than the final position of surface 1823 (d3) relative to the base.
310
WICKED
MSXICAN INSTITUTE
DS THE PROPERTY t
INDUSTRIAL
The powder dispenser may comprise a lower part having a vertical cross section that forms a first curved lower surface. The first curved bottom surface may have a radius of curvature that is located below the bottom of the powder dispenser (eg, in the direction of the substrate). The first curved bottom surface may have a radius of curvature that is located above the bottom of the powder dispenser (eg, away from the substrate). The radius of curvature of the first curved lower surface may or may not be adjusted. Figures 19A and Figure 19C show examples of vertical cross sections of powder dispensers 1901 and 1921 respectively having curved bottom surfaces 1902 and 1922 respectively. The bottom of the powder dispenser may comprise one or more additional surfaces. The one or more additional surfaces may be adjacent to the bottom of the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces can be attached to the bottom of the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces can be disconnected from the powder dispenser. The one or more additional surfaces may be extensions of the underside of the powder dispenser. The one or more surfaces
311
<img file="MX355451B_D0132.tif" />
The radius of curvature
<img file="MX355451B_D0133.tif" />
additional can be curves.
one or more additional surfaces may or may not be adjusted. The vertical cross section of the one or more additional curved surfaces may have a radius of curvature that lies below the one or more additional curved surfaces (eg, toward the direction of the substrate). The vertical cross section of the one or more additional curved surfaces may have a radius of curvature that lies above the one or more additional curved surfaces (eg, away from the substrate). The radius of curvature of the one or more additional curved surfaces may be equal to or different from the radius of curvature of the first curved lower surface. The radius of curvature of the one or more additional curved surfaces may be smaller or greater than the radius of curvature of the first curved lower surface. Figure 19A shows an example of a powder dispenser 1901 with a curved bottom surface 1902 having a radius of curvature ri and an additional curved surface 1905 that connects to the curved bottom surface.
1902 and has a radius of curvature r<sub>2</sub>, where r<sub>2</sub> is less than ri, and both radii are located below the bottom of the powder dispenser and the additional surface, toward the direction of the 1906 substrate. The one or more surfaces
312
<img file="MX355451B_D0134.tif" />
Additional curves and the first curved surface can be located on the same curve. Figure 19D shows an example of the vertical cross section of a powder dispenser 1931 with a curved bottom surface 1932 and having a radius of curvature r<sub>i2</sub>, which extends beyond the position of the outlet opening port of the powder dispenser 1933 and thus forms a further curved surface 1935.
In this example, the vertical cross section of the additional curved surface and the bottom of the powder dispenser are located on the same curve whose radius of curvature is located below the bottom of the powder dispenser, in the direction of the substrate 1936. The powder dispenser may have a flat bottom that may or may not be sloped. The powder dispenser may have a flat bottom parallel to the substrate (or to an average plane formed by the substrate). The powder dispenser may have one or more additional curved surfaces. The radius of curvature of curved surfaces (or of a vertical cross section of these) can be located below the curved surface (for example, in the direction of the substrate). Figure 19B shows an example vertical cross section of a powder dispenser 1911 with sloped bottom surface 1912 and an additional surface tf
313
I
LVAL .Ú. -A 'ΜINSTITUTO MIXICANO \ v DZ LA TEOFISDAO \ INDi'STBIAL curve 1915. The powder dispenser may have a curved bottom. The powder dispenser may or may not have one or more additional sloping surfaces. The powder dispenser may have one or more additional surfaces parallel or perpendicular to the substrate. The radius of curvature of curved surfaces (or of a vertical cross section thereof) can be located below the curved surface (for example, towards the direction of the substrate). Figure 19C shows an example of a vertical cross section of a 1921 powder dispenser with a curved bottom surface.
1922 and an additional inclined (extended) surface 1925.
The radii of curvature r<sub>iz</sub> r<sub>2</sub> and / or<sub>i2</sub> can be at least about 0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10mm, 20mm, 30mm, 40mm, 50mm , 60mm, 70mm, 80mm, 90mm or 100mm. The radii of curvature r<sub>lz</sub> r<sub>2</sub> and / or<sub>12</sub> can be at most about 0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10mm, 20mm, 40mm, 50mm, 60mm, 70mm, 80mm, 90mm or 100mm. The radii of curvature ri, r<sub>2</sub> and / or ri<sub>2</sub> they can be of any value between the values mentioned above (for example, from 0.5mm to about 100mm, from about 0.5mm to about 50mm, from about 50mm to about 100mm).
314
ΙΜΡΪ Mexican wrmvTo „. η,,, Μ THE PROPERTY ν
In some examples, the powder dispenser 'WSírip ^ errSs-ü outlet opening port and at the nrgiTO'<sup>1</sup>·<sup>1</sup> «Na ·<sup>1</sup> prime rg slanted surface as outlined above. For example, the powder dispenser may comprise a side outlet opening port and at least one first inclined surface as outlined above. The powder dispenser may comprise a side outlet opening and at least a first inclined surface and a second inclined surface as outlined above. The one or more inclined surfaces may be at the bottom of the powder dispenser. The second surface can be an extension of the bottom of the powder dispenser. The second surface can be detached from the bottom of the powder dispenser.
The powder dispenser opening may comprise a mesh or a perforated surface (collectively referred to herein as a mesh, eg, Figure 16A, 1607). The mesh comprises a hole (or a set of holes). The hole (or holes) can allow the powder material to flow out of the powder dispenser. The hole in the mesh can have a fundamental length scale of at least approximately 10 pm, 20 μπι, 30 μιη, 40 μιη, 50 μιη, 60 pm, 70 pm, 80 pm, 90 pm, 100 pm, ♦. ΤΎ> ->
315
WICKED
<td> 110</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 120</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 130</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 140</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 150</td><td>μπι,</td><td>MEXICAN BCTITUTE I read</td><td> \ <sup>r</sup> '-d μπ ^ -Λ ^ θΟ</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td> 190</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 200</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 250</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 300</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 350</td><td></td><td>'-450 - · μιΐι, ·</td>
<td> 500</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 550</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 600</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 650</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 700</td><td>μπι,</td><td>7 50 μπι, 8 00</td><td>μπι, 8 50</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td> 900</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 950</td><td>μπι</td><td>ο 1,</td><td> 000</td><td>μπι.</td><td colspan="4">The hole in the mesh can</td>
have a fundamental length scale at most of about 10 μιη, 20 μπι, 30 μπι, 40 μπι, 50 μπι, 60 μπι, 70
<td>μπι,</td><td> 80 |</td><td>um, <sup>1</sup></td><td>90 μπι, 100 μπι,</td><td> 110</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 120</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 130</td><td>μπι, 14 0</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 150</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td> 160</td><td>μπι,</td><td>170 μπι, 180</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 190</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 200</td><td>μπι,</td><td>250 μπι,</td><td> 300</td><td>μπι,</td>
<td> 350</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 400</td><td>μπι, 4 50 μπι,</td><td> 500</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 550</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 600</td><td>μπ ι, 650</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 700</td>
<td>10 μπι,</td><td> 750</td><td>μπι,</td><td>8 00 μπι, 8 50</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 900</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 950</td><td>μπι</td><td>ο 1,000</td><td>μπι.</td><td>Ε1</td>
hole in the mesh can have a fundamental length scale of any value among the fundamental length scales mentioned above. For example, the hole in the mesh may have the fundamental length scale of about 10 μπι to about 1,000 μπι, from about 10 μπι to about 600 μπι, from about 500 μπι to about 1,000 μπι, or from about 50 μπι to about 300 μπι . The fundamental length scale of the holes can be adjusted or fixed. In some embodiments the opening comprises two or more meshes. At least one of the two or more meshes can move.
316 insthutomexicano -r '.- sJ.
OF THE PROPERTY Vs-ÚCi .-. J -O j <sub>πη</sub> ... , - , , - <sub>n</sub> INDUSTRIAL
The movement of the two or more meshes can be controlled manually or automatically (for example, by * '* a controller). The relative position of the two or more meshes with respect to each other can determine the speed at which the powder passes through the hole (or holes). The fundamental length scale of the holes can be controlled electrically. The fundamental length scale of the holes can be thermally controlled. The mesh can be heated or cooled. The temperature of the mesh can be controlled manually or by means of a controller. The holes in the mesh can shrink or expand as a function of the temperature or electrical charge of the mesh. The mesh can be conductive. The mesh may comprise a mesh of standard mesh number 50, 70, 90,
100, 120, 140, 170, 200, 230, 270, 325, 550 or 625. The mesh may comprise a mesh of standard mesh number between any of the mesh numbers mentioned above.
For example, the mesh may comprise a mesh of standard mesh number of 50 to 625, 50 to 230, 230 to 625, or
100 to 325. The standard mesh number can be that of
America or Tyler's.
The two screens can have at least one position where the powder cannot pass through the outlet opening. The
317
<img file="MX355451B_D0135.tif" />
two meshes can have at least one position<sup>p</sup>! 5 ^ ft of! T can pass a maximum amount of dust through ^
<img file="MX355451B_D0136.tif" />
ixñ- .. departure. The two meshes can be identical or different. The size of the holes in the two meshes can be the same or different. The shape of the holes in the two meshes can be the same or different. The shape of the holes can be any hole shape as described in the present description. Figure 16C shows an example of a powder dispenser 1624 having an opening 1627 with two meshes or two perforated surfaces. Figure 16C shows an example where the two mesh extensions 1622 and 1626 can be translated vertically.
The opening (eg port) of the powder dispenser may comprise a paddle. The paddle can be a doctor blade. Figure 16B shows an example of a powder dispenser 1614 having an opening comprising a doctor blade 1617. The blade can be any of the blades mentioned above. The opening may comprise either a paddle or a mesh or a perforated surface. The screen (or surface with holes) may be closer to the outlet opening than the paddle. The paddle may be closer to the outlet opening than the screen (or surface with holes). Outlet opening
318 νϊ.τ I faith?
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V "'
OF PROPERTY ~ may comprise various meshes and pallets. The ^ AS ^ ttAda ^ 'output may comprise a first pallet followed by<sup>-</sup>^ 3T “Tinaf · mesh that is followed by a second pallet closer to the surface of the outlet opening. The outlet opening may comprise a first mesh followed by a paddle, which is followed by a second mesh closer to the surface of the outlet opening. The first and second blades can be the same or different. The first and second meshes can be the same or different. The powder dispenser may comprise a spring at the outlet opening. Figures 18A-18D show examples of powder dispensers having an opening comprising a spring (eg, 1807).
Any of the layer dispensing mechanisms described in the present disclosure may comprise a bulk reservoir (e.g., a tank, reservoir, barrel, or bucket) of powder and a mechanism configured to supply the powder from the bulk reservoir to the coating dispenser mechanism. The powder container can be connected or disconnected from the layer dispensing mechanism (eg, from the powder dispenser). Figure 15 shows an example of a bulk container 1513, connected to powder dispenser 1509. Figure 17 shows an example of
319 vr Yes
MEXICAN INSTITUTE ΐ> '
DE ΙΛ ntGFIECAD vUe¿7.
a bulk container 1701, disconnected from the di®p «'Ksad © rb¿de' 'powder 1702. The dcsr onectaete» -pBe powder dispenser can be located above, below or to the side of the powder bed. The disconnected powder dispenser can be located above the powder bed, for example, above the powder inlet opening to the powder dispenser. The attached powder dispenser can be located above, below, or next to the powder outlet port. The connected powder dispenser can be located above the powder outlet opening. The powdered material can be stored in the bulk warehouse. The bulk reservoir can contain at least an amount of powder material sufficient for one layer or sufficient to build the entire 3D object. The bulk reservoir can contain at least about 200 grams (g), 400 g, 500 g, 600 g, 800 g, 1 kilogram (kg), or 1.5 kg of powdered material. The bulk container can hold a maximum of 200g, 400g, 500g, 600g, 800g, 1kg or 1.5kg of powdered material. The bulk tank may contain an amount of material between any of the above-mentioned amounts of material in the bulk tank (for example, from about 200 g to about 1.5 kg, from about 200 g to about 8 00 g or from about 7 00 g to about 1.5 kg). The deposit
320
- «κ '“; ···. . * '<sup>r</sup> i
WSTITUTO MEXICANO 'powder dispenser can contain at least <sup>D</sup>tíA ^ u ^ £ iti4ad¿ide powder material enough for at least one. Ηη.ς<sub>Γ</sub> .trp / j. four or five layers. The powder dispensing tank may contain at least a quantity of powder material sufficient for at most one, two, three, four or five layers. The powder dispensing reservoir may contain an amount of material from any of the aforementioned amounts of material (eg, sufficient for a number of layers from about one layer to about five layers). The powder dispenser reservoir can contain at least about 20 grams (g), 40 g, 50 g, 60 g, 80 g, 100 g, 200 g, 400 g, 500 g, or 600 g of powder material. The powder dispensing tank can hold a maximum of approximately 20g, 40g, 50g, 80g, 100g, 200g, 400g, 500g or 600g of powder material. The powder dispenser reservoir may contain an amount of material between any of the aforementioned amounts of powder material in the dispenser reservoir (for example, from about 20 g to about 600 g, from about 20 g to about 300 g, or from about 200 g to about 600 g). The powder can be transferred from the bulk container to the powder dispenser by any
321
ΙΜΡΙΧΧ> - χ
MEXICAN INSTITUTE -, - í>,
OF THE PROPERTY V '' · industrial 'j- · t —-' 'An analogous method described in the present description for the exit of the powder material from the powder dispenser. At times, the outlet opening ports (eg, the holes) in the outlet opening of the bulk container may have a greater scale of fundamental length relative to that of the outlet opening port of the powder dispenser. For example, the bulk container may comprise an outlet comprising a mesh or a surface comprising at least one hole. The mesh (or a surface comprising at least one hole) may comprise a hole with a fundamental length scale of at least about 0.25mm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm , 7mm, 8mm, 9mm or 1 centimeter. The mesh (or a surface comprising at least one hole) may comprise a hole with the fundamental length scale at most about 0.25mm, 0.5mm. 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, or 1 centimeter. The mesh (or a surface comprising at least one hole) may comprise a hole with the fundamental length scale of any value between the values mentioned above (for example, approximately
0.25mm to about 1cm, from about 0.25mm to about 5mm, or from about 5mm to
322 ϊ Κ) I ®.
Ji ri / AJi JH '
INSTITUTO MEXICANO 'CV' J approximately 1 cm). The bulk tank can have a surface that can have at least nn-hnrHs me can<sub>t </sub>move into or out of the bulk warehouse. The bulk container may comprise a surface that can pivot into or out of the bulk container (eg, a hatch). That translation can create an opening, which can allow the powder in the bin to flow out of the bin (eg by gravity). A controller can be operatively coupled to the powder bin. The controller can control the amount of powder released from the bulk bin by controlling, for example, how long the conditions that enable the powder to exit the bulk bin are in effect. A controller can control the amount of powder released from the powder dispenser by controlling, for example, how long the conditions are in effect that enable the powder to exit the powder dispenser. In some examples, the powder dispenser dispenses any excess powder that is retained within the powder dispenser reservoir, prior to loading the powder from the bulk reservoir into the powder dispenser reservoir. In some examples, the powder dispenser does not dispense any excess powder that is retained within the dispenser reservoir.
323
- 'ν.
interchangeable interchangeable,
IMPI Μ. , powder, before loading the powder from the tank<sup>T</sup>i ^ $ [$ ^ gns & aiz / INOUSTWAL DUST DISPENSER TANK. The powder can be transferred from the bulk bin to the powder dispenser by using a powder pouring mechanism that removes the powder from the bulk bin and transfers it to the powder dispenser. The mechanism for pouring the powder can take out a fixed or predetermined amount of material. The amount taken out can be adjusted. The mechanism for pouring the powder can pivot (eg, rotate) in the direction perpendicular to the bilge direction. The bulk tank can be interchangeable, detachable, non-detachable, or non-interchangeable. The bulk tank may comprise parts
The powder dispenser can be detachable, non-detachable, or non-interchangeable. The powder dispensing mechanism may comprise interchangeable parts.
The powder in the bulk bin or powder dispensing mechanism can be preheated, cooled, at room temperature, or held at a predetermined temperature. A leveling mechanism (eg, Figure 11, 1103, a rake, roller, brush, spatula, or trowel) can be synchronized with the powder dispensing mechanism to supply the powder to the powder bed. The
324
MEXICAN BOTITUTO \ '·
Say PROPERTY \ Y. The leveling mechanism can level, dispense the powder on the substrate (or soBTS 1 a '^ ü ^ e ^ üaTídfcf the substrate comprises a base) as the powder is dispensed through the mechanism.
In one example, the leveling mechanisms (eg, the powder leveling mechanism), and / or the dust removal mechanisms described in the present disclosure can level the upper surface of the powder material by any method described herein. description, without substantially modifying the position of a hardened material that is disposed within the powder material and is suspended in the powder material. The hardened material can be residues or at least a part (or portion) of a 3D object. The hardened material that is suspended (eg, floats) in the powder material may not connect to the enclosure, substrate, or base. The hardened material may not be encased in a scaffold that is suspended in the powder material. The scaffold can be a filigree (eg a lace). The object may comprise auxiliary supports. The suspended object (for example, floating) in the powder material may not touch the enclosure, the substrate or the base. The object may comprise auxiliary supports. Auxiliary supports can
325
<img file="MX355451B_D0137.tif" />
To be suspended in the powder material
Suspended (for example, floating) auxiliary supports may not connect to the enclosure, substrate, or base. Suspended (for example, floating) auxiliary supports may not touch the enclosure, substrate, or base. Leveling mechanisms can level the upper surface of the powder bed while changing the position of an object (eg 3D object or debris) by a position change value. The position modification value can be
<td>What</td><td>maximum</td><td>from</td><td>about 1 micrometer</td><td>(μπι),</td><td> 2</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 3</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td>4 pm, 5</td><td>μπι</td><td>, 6 μπι, 7 μπι, 8 μπι, 9 μπι, 10</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 11</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 12</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td>13 μπι,</td><td> 14</td><td>μπι, 15 μπι, 16 μπι, 17 μπι, 18</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 19</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 20</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td>25 μπι,</td><td> 30</td><td>μπι, 35 μπι, 4 0 μπι, 4 5 μπι, 50</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 60</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 70</td>
<td>μπι,</td><td>8 0 μπι,</td><td> 90</td><td>μπι, 100 μπι, 200 μπι ο 300 μπι</td><td>. Ε1</td><td colspan="2">value</td><td>from</td>
Position modification can have any value between the values mentioned above. For example, the position modification value can be approximately 1
<td colspan="2">μπι to approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>μπι,</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>μπι or</td><td>d</td>
or from about 1 pm to
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
326
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V, '' '
ΒΪ THE PtOPLIBAC i. „·, INDUSTRIAL about 100 μπι. Modify the position can be w »b — i.iíuiiiiww wwoa'i w ·> · ιιι | ι move the position. Leveling mechanisms can level the top surface of the powder material while changing the position of a hardened material (for example, 3D object or debris) by up to 20 microns (μπι). Leveling mechanisms can level the top surface of the powder material while changing the position of the hardened material by a maximum of micrometers (μπι). Leveling mechanisms can level the top surface of the powder material while modifying the position of the hardened material by a maximum of 5 microns (μπι). The position change can be a horizontal change. The position change can be a vertical change. The position change can be a horizontal or vertical change. The modification of the position can be both vertical and horizontal. The object can be a 3D object.
The 3D object can be a substantially flat object or a wire. The hardened material may comprise transformed powder (eg, allowed to harden). The object
3D may lack auxiliary supports. The 3D object may comprise separate auxiliary supports as described in
327
IMPIAS ixmwro Mexican V;
the present description. The niv®33Kií mechanism will level the layer of powder material— · a ·· · Ία— «aa®.
It substantially modifies the position of the hardened material (for example, the suspended 3D object). The absence of substantial modification may be related to imaging or image processing. The resolution of imaging or image processing can be a maximum of approximately 1 μπι, 2 μπι, 3 μπι, 4 μη, 5 μιη, 6 μιη, 7 μιη, 8 μη, 9 μη, 10 μη, 20 μη , 30 μη, μη, 50 μη ο 60 μη. The resolution of imaging or image processing can be at least approximately 1 μη, 2 μη, 3 μη, 4 μη, 5 μη, 6 μη, 7 μη, 8 μπι, 9 μη, 10 μπι, 20 μη , 30 μη, 4 0 μη, 50 μπι ο 60 μη. The resolution of imaging or image processing can have any value between the resolution values mentioned above (for example, from about 1 μιη to about 60 μπι, from about 1 μη to about 10 μη, or from about 10 μη to approximately 60 μη). Figure 21A shows an example of two suspended planes 2101 and 2102 within a layer of the powder material prior to leveling by a leveling mechanism described in the
328
ΙΜΡΙ ^> »,, WSTITUTC MEXICANO ίζΑ '·· Α present description and two planes that connect
2103 and 2104 that serve as benchmarks. Figure 21B shows an example of the two suspended planes (now numbered 2111 and 2112 in Figure 21B) after leveling by a leveling mechanism described in the present disclosure and exposure to a gentle puff of air from a position above. of each of the planes. Planes 2111 and 2112 correspond to planes 2101 and 2102 respectively. Planes 2113 and 2114 that correspond to planes 2103 and 2104, respectively, are attached to the base to serve as reference points.
The leveling member and / or the powder dispenser can move at a speed of at least about 10 millimeters per second (mm / s), 15 mm / s, 20 mm / s, 25 mm / s, 30
<td>mm / s</td><td> , 35</td><td>mm / s,</td><td>40 mm / s,</td><td>45 mm / s,</td><td>50mm / s, 70</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> 90</td><td>mm / s,</td>
<td> 100</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> 120</td><td>mm / s, 140</td><td>mm / s, 150</td><td>mm / s, 160</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> 180</td><td>mm / s,</td>
<td> 200</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> 220</td><td>mm / s, 240</td><td>mm / s, 260</td><td>mm / s, 280</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> 300</td><td>mm / s,</td>
<td> 350</td><td>mm / s,</td><td> , 400</td><td colspan="2">mm / s, 450 mm / s or</td><td>500 mm / s.</td><td colspan="3">The member of</td>
leveling and / or the powder dispenser can move at a maximum speed of about 10mm / s, 15mm / s, 20mm / s, 25mm / s, 30mm / s, 35mm / s, 40mm / s, 45mm / s, 50mm / s, mm / s, 90mm / s, 100mm / s, 120mm / s, 140mm / s, 150mm / s, 160mm / s, 180mm / s , 200mm / s, 220mm / s, 240mm / s, 260mm / s, 280
329
<img file="MX355451B_D0138.tif" />
mm / s, 300 iran / s, 350 mm / s, 400 mm / s / 1 ΓΊ mm / t leveling member and / or the powder dispenser can move at any speed between the speeds mentioned above (for example, approximately 10mm / s to about 500mm / s, from about 10mm / s to about 300mm / s or from about 200mm / s to about 500mm / s). The leveling member and the powder dispenser can move at the same speed or at different speeds. The speeds of movement of the leveling member and / or the powder dispenser can be controlled manually or automatically (eg, by a controller). Movement speed can refer to the speed of movement throughout the powder bed (eg laterally).
<td>The dispenser</td><td>dust</td><td>can</td><td>dispense the</td><td>dust</td><td>to a</td>
<td>average speed</td><td>from</td><td colspan="3">at least approximately</td><td> 1,000</td>
<td>cubic millimeters</td><td colspan="2">per second i</td><td>Mm<sup>3</sup>/ s), 1,500</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 2,000</td>
<td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 2,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 3,000</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td>3,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 4,000</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td>
<td>4,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 5,000</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> , 5,500</td><td colspan="2">mm<sup>3</sup> / s or 6,000 mm<sup>3</sup></td><td>/ s. The</td>
<td>powder dispenser</td><td>can</td><td colspan="2">dispense powder to</td><td colspan="2">one gear</td>
<td colspan="2">average maximum of,</td><td colspan="2">about 1,000</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 1,500</td>
<td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 2,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 2,500</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td>3,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td><td> 3, 500</td><td>mm<sup>3</sup>/ s,</td>
4,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 4,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 5,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, 5,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s or 6,000
330
ΒβΓΠνΤΟ MSXiCANC ['~
DS LA PiGí UDAD Γ. '»
INCiSTBIAl mm / s. The powder dispenser can dispense the powder at an average speed between any of the average speeds mentioned above (for example, approximately 1,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s at about 6,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s, approximately 1,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s at approximately 3,500 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s or about 3,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s at about 6,000 mm<sup>3</sup>/ s.
The powder dispenser may comprise a rotating roller. The roller surface can be a smooth surface or a rough surface. Examples of roll surfaces are shown in Figure 17 and include a rough-surfaced roll 1709, protruding roll 1707, recessed roll 1719. The roll surface can include recesses, protrusions, or both protrusions and recesses (e.g., Figure 13B, 1313, or Figure 17). The roller can be positioned so that in a certain position, the powder arranged above the roller (eg 1312 or 1703) cannot flow down when the roller closes the opening of the powder dispenser. When the roller rotates (both clockwise and counterclockwise), a portion of the powder may become trapped within the recesses or projections (or both) and may transfer from the powder-occupying side of the dispenser. powder, to the powder-free side of the powder dispenser. That transfer
331
I. JA.
Ό 'Γ ¿ÓM -3' -.¾.
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Μ-'Μ <t¿, · ι. ,. ,. ,<sub>Ί π</sub> , DBlAFEORSeAD can enable the powder to be ejected from the bottom of the powder dispenser (eg-empl ^<sup>1</sup>·· ίβΰ'β ') ··<sup>¡</sup> Iraelael dust bed (for example, 1316). A similar mechanism is depicted in Figure 13D showing an example of a powder dispenser comprising an inner wall (eg, 1327) within. The powder transferred by roller 1331 can be cast onto wall 1337 and then can exit the funnel (eg, 1330) through the exit opening port.
The mechanism configured to supply the powder material to the substrate may comprise a flow of gas mixed with powder particles. Figures 10A and 10B show two illustrative configurations of mechanisms configured to supply the powder to the substrate (eg, from the reservoir). The mechanism configured to supply the powder to the substrate can be an air knife. The air knife can be articulated by a scanner to deliver powder to at least a fraction of the substrate (eg, 904). The air knife can be articulated by a scanner which is further used to articulate one or more power sources included in the system. Figure 10A depicts a schematic of an air knife 1,000 that can be configured to supply powder 1001 to the substrate (e.g., from the
332 ί ΜΡΡ. ^ ·;
ν, —i. -, χ). .¿I. t<sup>r</sup> Deposit). The air knife 1,000 pueSTwsSira ^ TO ^ t ^ a ^ - ^^ / gas and dust particles flow to the substrate._ Dust particles can become suspended in the gas. At least one fan 1002 can be included in the air blade to drive the flow of gas and particles. The number density of the particles in the gas and the gas flow rate can be selected so that a predetermined amount of powder is dispensed onto the substrate in a predetermined period of time. The gas flow rate can be selected so that the gas that is blown onto the substrate does not disturb a layer of dust on the substrate or the three-dimensional object. The gas flow rate can be selected so that the gas that is blown onto the substrate does not at least disturb the position of the three-dimensional object.
Figure 10B depicts a curved tube 1003 that may be another mechanism configured to deliver powder from the reservoir to the substrate. The curved tube may comprise an opening 1004. The opening may be located at an inflection point in the shape of the curved tube. The opening can be located on the outside of the curved tube shape. The opening can be on one side of the tube that is adjacent to the substrate 904. The opening 1004 can be a small hole.
333
ΤΓ Τ \ · Τ Τ ''. Τ
A- «¿i · i .4 — ί» —ι, ύ ^ '' INSTITUTE M2X1CANO faith; -7; - ~ \ <3
The small hole may have a maximum diameter or length of at least aprnxi madampnt-p »fl.nm jpni,, .0,0..1 ..
mm, 0.03mm, 0.05mm, 0.07mm, 0.09mm, 0.1mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm or 10mm. A mixture of gas and dust particles 1001 can be propelled through the curved tube 1003. The dust particles (ie, the particles of the powder material) can be suspended in the gas. At least a fraction of the powder particles can exit the curved tube through the opening 1004 and be dispensed onto the substrate 904. The number density of the particles in the gas and the gas flow rate can be chosen such that a predetermined amount of powder is dispensed onto the substrate in a predetermined period of time. The gas flow rate can be selected so that the gas that is blown onto the substrate does not disturb a layer of dust on the substrate or the three-dimensional object. The distance 1005 between the aperture and the substrate can be adjusted so that a predetermined amount of powder is dispensed onto the substrate in a predetermined period of time. In some cases, the size of the opening can be selected such that particles in a predetermined size range exit the curved tube through the opening 1004 and are dispensed onto the substrate 904.
334
<img file="MX355451B_D0139.tif" />
INSTITUTO MIXICANO M LA PRDNEFÍAD industrial ______ powder dispensed onto the substrate by the leveling mechanism can be spread and / or leveled (for example, with a roller, see Figure 12E at 1222). The leveling member can be configured so that the leveling of a layer of the powder on the substrate (eg 1223) is substantially flat (eg horizontal) (eg 1221). The leveling member may comprise a set of extrusions (eg, hard or soft extrusions) (eg, Figure 12F at 1227). The extrusion can have a pointed, round, or blunt end. The extrusions can be paddles. The leveling member can move at least a fraction of the powder with practically no moving the 3D object.
In some examples, practically moving at least the portion of the 3D object comprises changing the position of at least the portion of the three-dimensional object by the position modification value outlined in the present disclosure.
Practically moving at least the portion of the 3D object comprises changing the position of at least the portion of the three-dimensional object by the position modification value. The leveling member can move at least a fraction of the powder without substantially changing the location of the 3D object in the powder bed.
<img file="MX355451B_D0140.tif" />
335
IMPI
MSXICANO INSTITUTE V
DS LA PBC? I «JAO VUí -« y ',>
<sub>π1</sub> . ,,. ,, iNtxjmiAL<sup>;</sup>- \ u2 ± .Tr- '· ·
The leveling member may comprise a combination of a roller having a rolling surface comprising protrusions, recesses, or both protrusions and recesses. In some examples, the roll has a lamination surface that is smooth and does not have any protrusions or recesses (eg, Figure 12E at 1222). In some examples, the roll has a rough laminating surface. In some examples, the roll comprises recesses. In some examples, the roller comprises protrusions (eg, 12F at 1227). The roller can be in front of or behind a combing mechanism (for example, comprising a rake, brush, spatula or blade). The peeling mechanism may comprise a vertical cross section (eg the lateral cross section) in the form of a circle, triangle, square, pentagon, hexagon, octagon, any other polygon or an irregular figure. The roller can at least partially level the powder coat before the powder coat is leveled by the combing mechanism. The rotation of the roller can be in the direction that the leveling member moves (eg, laterally), in the opposite direction that the leveling member moves, or in any combination of the two directions. The roller can be in communication
336
IMPI M-Ü
INJTITUTO'MEXICANO * << - V '! ·! OS IA TSCTIEBAD! - * - «-Y¿iV ·
FNÜüjfplÁL *<sup>!</sup>S2SÜS *<sup>Í</sup>'with an active rotating mechanism (for example, a motor shaft) to perform the rotation of the roller. The roller can rotate clockwise and / or counterclockwise. The roller can have a rolling surface with a coefficient of static friction of at least about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5,
0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 or 1.0. The roll can have a rolling surface with a coefficient of dynamic friction of at least about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5,
0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 or 1.0. The roller can be a single roller. The roller can comprise two or more rollers. The two or more rollers can rotate in the same or different directions, at the same or different speeds. The rotation of the two or more rollers may or may not be synchronized. The rollers can be turned passively, actively (for example, by a controller and power source) or any combination of these. The rollers can be rotated manually or automatically (eg controlled by a controller). The roller can have an eccentric rotation.
An eccentric rotating roller can enable flattening with multiple heights. The roller can vibrate.
When the roller comprises more than one roller, at least a fraction of the rollers can be configured to compress the
337 «>»! Ί Λ - '· *> β. i ι (> :. 7
MEXICAN INSTITUTE l · '· * - i-.
M LA PROFÍTRAD t '-'-? '
INDUSTRIAL k'AJxJt 'powder and a fraction of the rollers can be set to level (eg flatten) the layer of powder material.
The surface (eg, the rolling surface) of the powder bed that was leveled by the roller can be smooth, level, or both. The surface of the roller can be rough. The surface of the roller can comprise notches (eg recesses), protrusions (eg paddles), or both. The blades may comprise one or more substantially smooth, tapered blades, or any combination of these. A practically smooth blade can have at least one cutting surface (eg, shear) with the minimum amount of elements protruding from the surface or recesses in the surface (eg, protrusions or grooves). A practically smooth vane can have at least one cutting surface with elements projecting from the surface or entering the surface, where the average distribution of the element covers a maximum of approximately 5 μπι, 3 μπι, 1 μπι, 300 nm, 100 nm, 30 nm or 10 nm. The roller can be made of a rigid material so that the roller does not deform when it travels along a surface of the powder material. In some cases, the rigid material can be metal (for example, plain or alloy), hard plastic, ceramic, composite material, or
338
ΙΜΡΪ
<img file="MX355451B_D0141.tif" />
any of its combinations
In some cases, the roller can be made from a flexible material so that the roller at least partially deforms as it travels along the surface of the powder. The flexible material can be a metal foil, rubber, soft plastic, or any combination thereof.
The leveling mechanism may comprise a plurality of needles distributed along a shaft of a smoothing mechanism. The plurality of needles can be arranged in an array or rows. and columns, in a set, in a pattern, or randomly. The needles can be rigid, flexible, or any combination of these. The needles can be arranged in the leveling mechanism such that each needle in the plurality of needles touches a different location on the bed of the powder material. The plurality of needles can level and / or smooth the dispensed powder from the upper dispensing powder dispenser. Leveling of the powder by the needles can arrange the powder so that the powder has a flat uniformity on at least one surface. Leveling of the powder material by the powder leveling mechanism and / or the dust removal mechanism can result in a surface with a flat uniformity on at least one surface. Flat uniformity can be in al
339
INSTITUTO .MBXICANO £ '.'-— ÜTqA minus one plane (for example, in the plane hd ^ Y ^^^ gl hAíyig? -' plane uniformity may be in the part sgpetj.QL · dg Ja- napa .... .
exposed powder material. For example, the flat uniformity may be on top of the layer of the powder material exposed to the environment in the enclosure (eg, to the gas within the chamber). The average plane can be a plane defined by a least squares plane fit of the top of the powder layer surface. The average plane can be a plane calculated by averaging the height of the powder at each point on the upper surface of the powder bed. In some cases, one or both of a rake and a roller may be provided adjacent the plurality of projections (eg, extrusions).
In some cases, an air knife can dispense the powder in front of the rake. The movement of the combing mechanism (for example, the rake) and the air knife may or may not be synchronized. The movement of the air knife and rake can be controlled by the same scanner or by different scanners.
In some cases, the leveling mechanism comprises a gas knife (eg, air knife) that shears or cuts the layer of powder material. Gas knife
340
<img file="MX355451B_D0142.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO DS PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL leveling concentrators may comprise gas pressure (eg from gas leveling mechanism.
an air can stream
<img file="MX355451B_D0143.tif" />
, H<sub>2</sub>, He or Ar /. The ^ paTetT ^ * ”comprise the blade of
The combing mechanism (eg, the rake) may comprise one or more blades. Figure 11 depicts an example of a rake 1103 that can move dust along a substrate. The peeler mechanism may have one or more blades 1101 touching the bed of the powder material.
The pallets can be of different sizes or a single, practically uniform size. The blades can extend different distances away from a top 1102 of the rake. The blades can be oriented at different angles (for example, at different angles of attack). The angle of attack can be an angle of a surface of the blade relative to the surface of the powder. In some cases, a small angle of attack can apply relatively less pressure to the part relative to a steep angle of attack. A small angle of attack can be a maximum angle of about 45 °, 40 °,
35 °, 30 °, 25 °, 20 °, 15 °, 10 ° or 5 ° between the vane surface and the average upper surface of the powder layer.
Small angle of attack can be about 0 °
341
TfA'τ .-- between the paddle surface and the average surface ^ supeiHror of the dust layer. The fins ρ s' '' p'üéden to be provided in a series in the combing mechanism, the series of vanes can have, relative to each other, an increasing or decreasing contact angle. The angles of the vanes can be arranged in a pattern (eg, in a line) or randomly. In some cases, the combing mechanism (for example, the rake) may comprise a harrow. The level of dust (eg layer thickness) in front of the rake can be actively or passively controlled.
The paddles can be made of rigid material so that a paddle within the combing mechanism does not move when
<td colspan="2">moves to</td><td rowspan="2">it the</td><td colspan="2">along a surface of dust.</td><td rowspan="2">On (for</td>
<td>Some</td><td>cases,</td><td>rigid material can be</td><td>metal</td>
<td>example,</td><td>simple</td><td>or</td><td>in alloy), hard plastic,</td><td colspan="2">ceramic or</td>
any of its combinations. In some cases, at least a fraction of the blades can be made from a flexible material such that the blades at least partially deform when dragged along the surface of the powder. The flexible material can be a metal foil, rubber, soft plastic, or any combination thereof.
342
O®
VXUCAI INSTITUTE
DE IA? ¡} CT!? ÉAD V / J '' 'M'
Any of the systems described in ^ í<sup>1</sup># 'pfe'-se'ñ'te description (collectively the system) can give ..... compf'élftierr- a powder dispensing mechanism, a powder leveling mechanism, a dust removal mechanism, a controller or any of its combinations.
The controller can control the vibrator (s). The controller can control the operation of the vibrator (s). The controller can control the amplitude of the vibrations of the vibrator (s). The controller can control the vibration frequency of the vibrator (s). When the system comprises more than one vibrator, the controller can control each of them individually or as a group (for example, collectively). The controller can control each of the vibrators sequentially. The controller can control the amount of powder material released by the powder dispenser. The controller can control the speed of the powder material released by the powder dispenser. The controller can control the height of the powder material deposited on a layer of the powder material (eg arranged on the powder bed). The controller can control the height from which powder is released from the powder dispenser.
*
343 íí & 7 ι * V '' * · 'Τ-- ··. ·? -> ·>' • s' ',' ·.
·*·*·» \ , . · -· \
.... INSTITUTO MEXICANO ν '.' .. ·: ·· /. ·
The controller can control the height <sup>D</sup>áeiÍDu? ^ Sfeitífct £ ay; uie leveling. The controller can control «e« -tí! A- ~ AJptujia<sub>í</sub>_... da..the paddle of the leveling member. The controller can
<td>control</td><td>speed</td><td>from</td><td>movement</td><td>of</td><td>member</td><td>from</td>
<td>leveling</td><td>(for example,</td><td>the</td><td>pallette). The</td><td colspan="3">controller can</td>
<td>control</td><td>the position</td><td>of</td><td>dispenser</td><td>from</td><td>dust.</td><td>The</td>
<td>controller</td><td colspan="2">can control</td><td>the position</td><td>of</td><td>member</td><td>from</td>
leveling. The position can comprise a vertical, horizontal or angular position. The position can comprise coordinates.
The controller can control the height of the dust removal member. The controller can control the speed of movement of the dust removal member. The controller can control the position of the dust removal member. The position can comprise a vertical, horizontal or angular position. The position can comprise coordinates. The controller can control the amount of material removed by the dust removal member. The controller can control the speed of material removed by the dust removal member.
The controller can control the path traveled by the powder dispensing mechanism, the powder removal mechanism, and / or the leveling mechanism. The controller can
344
TMPir'r institute me-ccm'o,, <sup>FROM</sup> THE PRCTiSB / .r, ':.
control the leveling of a super surface<sup>[</sup>ÍWf? '4 ^ e'<sup>i</sup><3iH ^ layer of powder material deposited on "eT lyuinéev —- eox .. ,, ......
For example, the controller can control the final height of the newly deposited powder material. The controller can control the final height of the powder material (for example, the last formed layer of the powder material). In some embodiments, the powder dispenser can deposit at least part of a layer of the powder material having a first vertical height. The leveling mechanism and / or the dust removal mechanism can level the deposited powder material so that the vertical height of the level section of the powder material layer can be at least about 0.02 *, 0.04 *, 0.05 *, 0.06 *, 0.08 *, 0.1 *,
0.2 *, 0.3 *, 0.4 *, 0.5 *, 0.6 *, 0.7 *, 0.8 * or 0.9 times (*) the first vertical height. The leveling member can level the deposited powder material so that the vertical height of the leveled section of the powder material layer can be at most approximately
0.02*, 0.04*, 0.05*, 0.06*, 0.08*, 0.1*, 0.2*, 0.3*, 0.4*,
0.5 *, 0.6 *, 0.7 *, 0.8 * or 0.9 times (*) the first vertical height. The leveling member can level the deposited powder material so that the vertical height of the leveled section of the powder material layer can be
3. 4. 5 i go 11 .., ..- · INSTITUTO MEXICANO V '· i a product of any value between the multipliers mentioned above (pcH¡? .. e ^ aiap<sup>1</sup> ______from.
about about about 0.4 *
0.02 * to about 0.9 *, from
0.02 * to about 0.5 *, from about 0.9 * or from about 0.05 * to about 0.4 *).
In the present description, methods for generating the 3D object from a powder material are described, which comprises leveling the powder material by using any of the apparatus described in the present description. The powdered material can be powdered material disposed adjacent to the bottom of the enclosure, the substrate, or the base (eg, on top). Powdered material may have been deposited by the layer dispensing mechanism (eg, the powder dispenser). In the present description a method of generating the 3D object from a powder material is described which comprises dispensing the powder material towards the bottom of an enclosure (for example, towards the substrate or the base) by using any apparatus described in the present description. In the present description a method for generating the 3D object from a powder material is described which comprises dispensing the powder material towards the part
346
Tr ~ <? · ·; 'ΛΑί
.......... JHÍ ^ πυτο Mexican Y
DE LA FílOFIL'rjAíj V \ · '' ·, '·' 'f bottom of an enclosure (for example, toward the suáW ^ o' 'base) by using any of ~ ÍÓ's''mechanical dispensers of the layer (eg, the powder dispenser) described in the present description. The method may comprise dispensing a layer of the powder material. The method may comprise moving the apparatus, the layer dispensing mechanism, the powder dispensing mechanism, the leveling mechanism, the dust removal mechanism, the substrate, the base, the enclosure, or any combination thereof. The controller can control the translation.
Powdered material can be dispensed by the layer dispensing mechanism (eg, the powder dispenser) when the layer dispensing mechanism is moved in a first direction. The powder material can be leveled by the leveling mechanism when the leveling mechanism and / or the dust removal mechanism is moved in a second direction. The first and second addresses can be the same address. The first and second directions can be opposite directions.
The method may comprise vibrating at least part of the powder material, at least part of the powder dispensing mechanism, or at least part of the layer dispensing mechanism. At least the part of the powder dispensing mechanism
347
IO and /
- £. XvA Ji. Can i γ / '..xx \ t fNSTinrroijí.xicano understand making vibrate at least part of Se'i ^ Srsá & ^ - éliSÜ? ^ - ···<sup>? </sup>outlet of the dispensing mechanism of polvrrr ^ i ^ iRéfeodQ .... can ..
understand vibrating the powder in the powder bed to level the powder material. The method may comprise vibrating the enclosure, substrate, base, container housing the powder bed, or any combination thereof, to level the powder material. The vibrations can be ultrasonic vibrations.
The method may comprise leveling at least part of a layer of the powder material by use of the leveling mechanism. Leveling can level the upper surface of the powder material with a deviation from the average plane created by the upper surface. The mean plane deviation can be any value of the mean plane deviation described in the present description. The
<td>leveling</td><td>can</td><td>move a</td><td>object in</td><td>the value of</td>
<td>modification</td><td>from</td><td>the position</td><td>described in</td><td>the present</td>
<td>description.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td colspan="2">In some cases,</td><td>a surface</td><td>of the cape</td><td>dust can</td>
Maintain practically flat average uniformity by fluidizing the powder in the powder bed. The fluidized powder bed may have one or more properties of a liquid (for example, with a volume similar to the volume
348
ΪΜΡΪΒ>:
fhísm ltom.óXíc, *, ** q ν '·' 'of the dust bed). The powder bed f will exhibit a hydrostatic behavior de ma n ^ rg a.<sup>1</sup>!?.... <sup>TO</sup> maintains an even flat surface of the powder without a combing mechanism (eg leveling or smoothing). A fluidized bed can be generated in the powder bed by injecting a pressurized gas through the powder bed. The gas can be flowed from the bottom, top, or one side of the powder bed. The gas can be an inert gas. The gas can be a noble gas. The gas can comprise argon, nitrogen, helium, neon, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, or air. The gas in the fluidized bed can be the same gas that is used in the chamber or a different gas than that used in the chamber.
At least a portion of the 3D object can sink into the fluidized bed. At least a portion of the 3D object can be surrounded by the fluidized bed (eg, submerged). At least a portion of the 3D object can rest on the powder material with practically no sagging (eg vertical movement). The absence of substantial sag may represent sag (eg, vertical movement) of at most about 40%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1% of the layer thickness. The absence of substantial subsidence
349
IM J? I f '
INSTITUTO MEXICANO 1 DE LA EROITLíJAD 'can represent a maximum of approximately 10 * 0<sup>Du</sup>p3íty · 3 '£ F - pinj pm, 3 pm or 1 pm. At least a portion of the 3D object can rest on the powder material without substantial movement (eg horizontal movement, diagonal movement). The absence of substantial movement can represent a maximum of 100 pm, 30 pm, 10 pm, 3 pm, 1 pm or less. The 3D object can rest on the substrate when the 3D object sinks or plunges into the fluidized powder bed.
The disclosed methods may comprise a powder leveling method wherein the powder comprises a structure protruding from the exposed surface of the powder bed (ie, the upper surface of the powder bed). The framework can be a powdered material that has been transformed and subsequently hardened. The structure can be a 3D object, part of a 3D object, or a powdered material that was transformed and subsequently hardened but was not part of the 3D object (that is, debris). The height (that is, the vertical distance) of the projecting structure from the exposed surface (that is, the top) of the powder bed can be at least about 10 μιη, 30 μιη, 50 μιη, 70 μιη, 100 μπι , 130 μπι,
150 μιη, 170 μη, 200 μπι, 230 μπι, 250 μπι, 270 μπι ο 300 μπι. The
350
IMP ίΝΓΤσυΤΩλ ^ ΖϊΡΑΜΛ '' - Y *
INSTITUTE Mexican .....
Γ> Ε The cold?<sub>t</sub>'í z? AD V'> · - · -? ''<sup>J</sup> height of the overhanging structure (hence erí '^ delán-fre<sup>7</sup>'overhang) of the upper surface of ^ T ^ Roof ^^ of' 'pblvo can be at most about 30 pm, 50 pm, 70 pm, 100 pm, 130 pm, 150 pm, 170 pm, 200 pm, 230 pm , 250 pm, 270 pm, 300 pm or 1,000 pm. The height of the boss on the upper surface of the powder bed can be between any of the values mentioned above. For example, from about 10 pm to about 1,000 pm, from about 50 pm to about 100 pm, from about 30 pm to about 300 pm, from about 20 pm to about 400 pm, or from about 100 pm to about 900 pm. The term between as used in the present description is to be considered inclusive unless otherwise specified. For example, between X and Y is considered, in the present description, to mean X to Y.
In some examples, the method comprises depositing a layer of the powder material on the powder bed which comprises dispensing the powder material into the enclosure to provide a powder bed; generate the 3D object from a portion of the powder material by transforming the powder material into a material
351
I
MEXICAN INSTITUTE --7 .:. ,
DELA PROPERTY Vu - ”^ J, V 'transformed that later forms a matter'3!<sup>DU</sup>§'Ftíiur & e ±<sup>:</sup>dcí7 'where the hardened material protrudes' '^ - Γ3 — Stlp'WfíC'i'e-' above the powder bed, where the hardened material is mobile within the powder bed; and adding a layer of the powder material on the upper surface of the powder bed. The movable hardened material may comprise auxiliary supports. Mobile hardened material may lack auxiliary supports. In some examples, the hardened material is suspended in the powder bed. In some examples, the cured material comprising the auxiliary supports is suspended in the powder bed. In some examples, hardened material is anchored (for example, by auxiliary supports) to the enclosure. Anchors can be attached to the bottom or sides of the enclosure. The anchors can be connected to the substrate or to the base. The anchors can be the substrate, the base, the bottom of the enclosure, a scaffold structure, a sintered structure (eg, a lightly sintered structure), or a mold.
In one example, adding a layer of the powder material on the upper surface of the powder bed displaces the hardened material by the position modification value. In one example, adding a layer of the powdered material over the
352
<img file="MX355451B_D0144.tif" />
DE LA PROWEL'AtS θ upper surface of the powder bed displaces<sup>, N</sup>^ T * 4hatí ^ fc§ & 'hardened in approximately 20 microns some examples, the hardened material includes warping, buckling, bending, rolling, crimping, warping or rounding.
For example, the hardened material can include at least a portion of a 3D object that was deformed. The deformation can be any deformation described in the present description such as warping, buckling, warping, bending, rolling, curling or rounding.
In some examples, the addition further comprises using a powder dispenser to deposit the layer of powder material on the powder bed (eg, by any deposition method or mechanism described herein). In some examples, the upper surface of the added layer of powder material is substantially flat. In some examples, the top surface of the added layer of powder material is leveled to be substantially flat. The leveling may comprise a leveling mechanism and / or a dust removal mechanism as described in the present description. For example, leveling the upper surface of the powder material layer may comprise shearing an excess amount of the powder material. Shearing can include shearing
353
INSTITUTO MSXICANO VY “XN Ot THE PROPERTY ·
INDUSTRIAL .. —i.
with a blade (eg, a hard, flexible® air blade as described in the present description). In some cases, the sheared powder material (ie, excess powder material) is displaced to another position in the powder bed. In some cases, the sheared powder material (ie, excess powder material) does not move to another position in the powder bed. For example, excess powder material can be removed by the dust removal mechanism described in the present disclosure. Removal of the powder material may comprise touching the powder bed (eg, the upper surface of the powder bed). Removal of the powder material may exclude touching the powder bed (for example, the upper surface of the powder bed). For example, the addition may comprise using a dust removal member to remove the excess amount of powder material without touching the layer of powder material.
In some examples, the powdered material, the hardened material, or both are devoid of at least two metals present in a proportion that will form a eutectic alloy. In some examples, the powder material, the hardened material, or both are made from a single simple metal. In some examples, powder material, material
354 η IOP
ΙΠΠΜΕΧΙΓΑΝη ViP / -
<img file="MX355451B_D0145.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE V <
.. OF THE PROPERTY Γ _,. INDUSTRIAL _ hardened or both include at most substantially a single simple metal composition. In to 1 winks ...... examples7'eΓ 'powder material, hardened material or both are made from a single metal alloy. In some examples, the powder material, the hardened material, or both include at most substantially a single metal alloy composition.
In another aspect in the present description a system for generating a three-dimensional object is described, comprising: an enclosure housing a powder bed comprising powder material; an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the powdered material and thereby transforms the powdered material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to form a hardened material. The cured material may protrude from the upper surface of the powder bed that forms the protrusion described in the present disclosure. The systems described in the present disclosure may further comprise a layer dispensing mechanism configured to add a flat powder layer to the powder bed. The layer dispensing mechanism may include the powder deposition mechanism.
The layer dispensing mechanism may further include the dust leveling mechanism and / or the dust removal mechanism. The powder leveling mechanism (for example, *
355
<img file="MX355451B_D0146.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0147.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0148.tif" />
the member) that levels excess powder material from the powder bed, may or may not touch the powder bed to make leveling. The powder leveling mechanism described in the present disclosure may be configured to at least shear, brush, trim, hem, shear, cut, scrape, hull, or truncate an excess of the powder material from an upper (i.e., exposed) portion of the dust bed. The powder leveling member can move the excess amount of powder material to another position in the powder bed. In some cases, the powder leveling member may not move the excess amount of powder material to another position in the powder bed.
The powder leveling mechanism can be any powder leveling mechanism described in the present description. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a dust removal mechanism (eg, a member) that removes excess powder material from the upper portion of the powder bed and may or may not touch the upper portion of the powder bed. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a dust removal mechanism (e.g. a member) that removes excess powder material from the upper portion of the powder bed although
· .. τ. ···. · - ·· .τγ ·. τ-ς ·. ·.> · Λ: <·? ·
356 iww institute ο ύ «- * τ ·
CE INDUSTRIAL EFFICIENCY touches the upper portion of the powder bed. The layer dispensing mechanism may comprise a dust removal mechanism that removes excess powder material from the upper portion of the powder bed without touching the upper portion of the powder bed. The layer dispensing mechanism can be separated from the upper portion of the powder bed by a gap. The separation can be any separation described in the present description. The dust removal mechanism can be any dust removal mechanism described in the present description. The dust removal mechanism may or may not be attached to the dust leveling mechanism. The dust removal mechanism may or may not be attached to the dust dispensing mechanism.
The powder leveling mechanism may or may not be attached to the powder dispensing mechanism.
Excess powder material that was removed by the dust removal mechanism can be reused by the powder dispensing member. Reuse may include continuously reuse during operation of the layer dispensing mechanism, reuse after adding a layer of the powder material to the powder bed, reuse at arbitrarily set times,
357 reuse manually
<img file="MX355451B_D0149.tif" />
reuse automafifeamérrtey 'reuse after generating a 3D object.
The systems described in the present description may further comprise a controller operatively coupled to the power source and to the layer dispensing mechanism or to at least one of its components. The controller can be programmed to (i) receive instructions to generate the three-dimensional object, (ii) generate the hardened material from a portion of the powdered material, and (iii) direct the layer dispensing mechanism to add a layer of the material in dust on the dust bed. The added layer of powder material may have a substantially flat top surface. The added layer of powder material may have a top surface that is substantially non-planar. In some cases, the layer dispensing mechanism can displace the hardened material. In some cases, the layer dispensing mechanism may not substantially displace the cured material. In some cases, the layer dispensing mechanism may displace the cured material by the position modification value described in the present disclosure. In some cases, the coating dispensing mechanism can displace the hardened material by a maximum of 20 μπι. Displacement can be
358
<img file="MX355451B_D0150.tif" />
a vertical displacement, horizontal · angular displacement can be an angle x ^ d ^ a ^ - "ja" ui<sub>1</sub>CL;,. ÁDg.ulo.
compound.
The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder dispensing mechanism (for example, the powder dispensing member or the powder dispenser) and can be programmed to direct the powder dispensing mechanism to add the layer of powder material to the powder bed. . The controller can be operatively coupled to the powder leveling mechanism and can be programmed to level an upper surface of the powder bed. The controller can be operatively coupled to the dust removal member and can be programmed to regulate the removal of excess dust material. The controller can control the recycling of the powder material that was removed by the dust removal mechanism. The controller can regulate the amount of powder material that is dispensed from the powder dispensing member.
The system may further comprise one or more mechanical members operatively coupled to the powder dispensing member, wherein the single or more mechanical members vibrate the powder dispensing member. The mechanical members can be motors (for example, motors
359 nerm / vc si'canιο //-.Ί / ¿5;
Lz \ ií.'A £ »i · rotating) or sonicators. Mechanical members' can cause vibrations. The controller can '^' be operatively attached to the single or more mechanical members. The controller can be operatively coupled to the one or more vibrators. The controller can be programmed to control the one or more mechanical members to regulate the amount of powder material that is dispensed from the powder dispensing member into the enclosure.
In another aspect, the methods described in the present disclosure may comprise methods in which a layer of the powder material is deposited in an enclosure to form a bed of powder, at least part of the layer is cured to form a cured material (which may or may not comprise at least a part of the 3D object), the hardened material may or may not protrude from the exposed surface of the powder bed.
A second layer of the powder material is deposited in excess.
The exposed surface of this second layer may or may not be leveled. Leveling of the second layer can be carried out in two different operations. The first involves the use of the dust leveling mechanism and the second involves the use of the dust removal mechanism. In some embodiments, leveling the second layer may involve the use of both the powder leveling mechanism and the leveling mechanism.
360
Ββητυτο; · η '· η_Μθ \ Χ'. ' · 'Ή · Dust removal in a single operationff / tólSñpk a ^ guríád modalities, the leveling of the second © ape ^^ secte- ^ imply the use of the dust leveling mechanism followed closely by the dust removal mechanism. In some embodiments, depositing the second layer of the powder material by the powder deposition mechanism, leveling it by the leveling mechanism (for example, by shearing), and removing the powder by the powder removal mechanism, are performed one after the other in a side run.
For example, the three mechanisms can be closely followed one after the other. For example, at least two of the three mechanisms can be closely followed one after the other. For example, all three mechanisms can be integrated into one mechanism. For example, at least two of the three mechanisms can be integrated into one mechanism. The mechanism (s) may spread and / or level the powder throughout the powder bed or only a portion of the powder bed. The method may include spreading and leveling the powder bed as the mechanism (s) move laterally in one direction. The method may include spreading the powder bed as the mechanism (s) move laterally in a first direction, leveling as the mechanism (s) move in the opposite direction and finally remove
361
<img file="MX355451B_D0151.tif" />
DE -Λ '\ · ·>
as the mechanism (s) go (s) again in the first direction. The method may include the operation of one or two mechanisms as the mechanism (s) move laterally in a first direction and the operation of one or two mechanisms as the mechanism (s) ) moves laterally in the opposite direction. Mechanisms may include the powder dispensing mechanism, the powder leveling mechanism, and the dust removal mechanism. The method can spread and level the powder material without substantially modifying the position of the hardened material, regardless of whether or not it is anchored (for example, by auxiliary supports).
In another aspect in the present description methods for generating a three-dimensional object are described which relate to the deposition and leveling of a layer of the powder material, wherein the final leveling operations take place without touching the upper surface of the powder bed. The method comprises providing a first layer of the powder material in an enclosure to provide a powder bed having a first upper surface (the first upper surface is, at this stage, the exposed surface); generate at least a portion of the three-dimensional object from at least a portion of the material i »
362
USTYÍUTG?
H ANO i: AO <sub>7</sub>- · Β><sup>;</sup> powdered; dispense a second layer of material<sup>1</sup>'"É'tf<sup>? J</sup>$ oívb “* é'ñ the powder bed, where the second cap ^ '* ^ J ^ TmaT'érial' ^ éri '' '' '' ''“ powder comprises a second upper surface (the second upper surface is , at this stage, the exposed surface); removing (eg, shearing) the second layer of the powder material to form a first flat surface; and removing substantially all of the powder material above a predetermined second flat surface of the second layer of the powder material, wherein the removal occurs without touching the powder bed. The first surface
<td>flat can</td><td>to be</td><td>on</td><td>the lowest point</td><td>from</td><td>the</td><td>second</td>
<td>surface</td><td>higher</td><td>or</td><td colspan="2">below this.</td><td>The</td><td>second</td>
<td>surface</td><td colspan="2">flat can</td><td>stand below</td><td>from</td><td>the</td><td>first</td>
<td>surface</td><td>flat.</td><td>The</td><td>operations of</td><td colspan="2">removal</td><td>they can</td>
understand any dust removal method used by the dust removal system described in the present description.
The generating operation may comprise transforming the powder material to generate a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to form a hardened material, wherein at least a portion of the hardened material protrudes from the first upper surface, and thus forms a protrusion. In some cases, the first layer of the
363
<img file="MX355451B_D0152.tif" />
powder material is provided on a bed in some cases, the first layer of the ma üer ϊ'31 '<sup>1</sup> 'δΊΓ ^ ροΤ vo comprises the overhang. The protrusion can be any protrusion described in the present description (for example, at least a part of the 3D object or residues). The protrusion may comprise warping, bending, warping, crimping, rolling, or rounding the hardened material. The height (ie, vertical distance) of the projecting structure from the exposed (ie upper) surface of the powder bed can be any of the values of the projection described in the present description. In some examples, the second flat surface is located on top of the first top surface.
Figures 26A-26D show examples of various stages of a layered deposition method described in the present disclosure. Figure 26A shows a powder bed 2601 in which a 3D (curved) object 2603 is suspended in the powder bed and protrudes from the exposed (upper) surface of the powder bed by a distance 2605. The exposed surface of the bed of Powder may level out (for example, as shown in Figure 26A, which has a 2604 level plane) or not level out. Figure 26B shows a subsequent operation where a layer is deposited on the powder bed
364 (for example, above plane 2604).
<img file="MX355451B_D0153.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE .- · *
OF THE PROPERTY i? „_ INDUSTRIAL
The newly deposited layer may not have a level top surface (eg, 2608). The upper non-level surface 2608 includes a lower vertical point 2609. The plane 2606 is a plane that is located at or below the lower vertical point of the non-level surface and at or above the shoulder 2605. Plane 2606 is located higher than upper surface 2604 at height 2610. Figure
26C shows a subsequent operation where the layer is leveled to the vertical position of plane 2606 by a leveling mechanism. That leveling may be the shearing of the powder material. Such leveling may not move excess powder material to a different position in the powder bed. Figure 26D shows a subsequent operation where the leveled layer is leveled lower than the vertical plane above 2604 and below
2606 and is designated 2611. This second leveling operation can be performed by the dust removal mechanism, which may or may not touch the exposed layer of the dust bed. This second leveling operation may or may not expose the projecting object. This second leveling operation can be a higher fidelity leveling operation. The average vertical distance from the first top surface
365
[Ρ .¡ί
INSTITUTE mex: can¿i re la pee: f: l: ·. ··. □ ·. '. ··
INDUSTRIAL, .T ·. ' to the second flat surface can be at least
200 pin, approximately 5 pm, 10 pm, 50 pm, 100 pm, 150 pm,
250 pm, 300 pm, 350 pm, 400 pm, 450 pm or 500 pm. The average vertical distance from the first upper surface to the second flat surface can be at most approximately 700 pm, 500 pm, 450 pm, 400 pm, 350 pm, 300 pm, 250 pm, 200 pm, 150 pm, 100 pm, 50 pm, 10 pm or 5 pm. The average vertical distance from the first upper surface to the second flat surface can be between any of the average values of the vertical distances mentioned above. The average vertical distance from the first top surface to the second flat surface can be from about 5 pm to about 500 pm, from about 10 pm to about 100 pm, from about 20 pm to about 300 pm, or from about 25 pm to about 250 pm. p.m.
The average vertical distance from the first upper surface to the second upper surface can be at least about 5 pm, 10 pm, 50 pm, 100 pm, 150 pm, 200 pm, 250 pm, 300 pm, 350 pm, 400 pm, 450 pm, 500 pm, 1,000 pm or 1,500 pm. The average vertical distance from the first top surface to the second top surface can
366
<img file="MX355451B_D0154.tif" />
iNtuyrsiÁL
<td>be at most</td><td>of about 2,000</td><td>μη, 1,500 μη, 1,000</td>
<td>μη, 7 00 μπι, 500</td><td>μη, 450 μπι, 4 00 μη, 350</td><td>μη, 300 μη, 250 μη,</td>
<td>200 μη, 150 μη,</td><td>100 μη, 50 μη, 10 μπι ο</td><td>5 μη. Distance</td>
Average vertical from the first upper surface to the second upper surface can be between any of the average values of the vertical distances mentioned above. For example, the average vertical distance from the first upper surface to the second upper surface can be from about 5 pm to about
2,000 μπι, from approximately 50 μπι to approximately 1,500 μπι, from approximately 100 μιη to approximately 1,000 μιη, or from approximately 200 μιη to approximately 500 μπι.
The average vertical distance from the first top surface to the first flat surface can be at least about 5 μιη, 10 μιη, 50 μιη, 100 μπι, 150 μπι, 200 μπι,
250 μκι, 300 μπι, 350 μιη, 400 μπι, 450 μπι, 500 μπι ο 1,000 μη. The average vertical distance from the first upper surface to the first flat surface can be a maximum of approximately 1,000 μη, 700 μη, 500 μη, 450 μη, 400 μη, 350 μη, 300 μη, 250 μιη, 200 μη, 150 μη, 100 μη, 50 μη, 10 μη ο 5 μπι. The average vertical distance of the first surface wm.
367 NSTmr ^; '' Air »ν '
FROM". . \ higher than the first flat surface can e<sup>L</sup>Átar ¿ríbré any of the average values of vertical 'Tas SisBancias' mentioned above. The average vertical distance from the first top surface to the first flat surface can be about 5 μπι a
<td>approximately</td><td> 1,000</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 500</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>μη</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 100</td><td>μπι,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>μπι or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 25</td><td>μπι</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>250 pm.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
Removal encompasses any methodology used in the present disclosure by the dust removal mechanism.
For example, the removal operation may comprise using a vacuum. The removed powdered material can be recycled or reused as described in the present description. For example, the removed powdered material (ie, excess) can be continuously reused in any of the methods described in the present disclosure.
The dispensing method can use any powder dispensing mechanism described in the present description. For example, a dispensing method that uses force
368
ΎΓ A fT Ό 7
Imí ί \ ·> ζ
SESo®.? yt, -,
INDUSTRIAL ^ ~ X -— gravitational, and / or one that uses gas flow (eg air flow) to displace the powdered material.
In another aspect in the present description systems for generating a three-dimensional object are described, comprising an enclosure that houses a bed of powder; an energy source that provides a beam of energy to the powdered material and thereby transforms the powdered material into a transformed material which is subsequently hardened to form a hardened material; a powder dispensing member that dispenses the powder material into the powder bed; a powder leveling member that levels an exposed surface of the powder bed; a dust removal member that removes powdered material from an exposed surface of the powder bed without touching the upper surface of the powder bed; and a controller that is operatively coupled to the power source, the powder dispensing member, the powder leveling member, and the dust removal member and is programmed to: direct the powder dispenser to dispense a first layer of the powder material having a first upper surface into the powder bed, receive instructions to generate at least part of the three-dimensional object, generate at least part of the three-dimensional object from a portion of the powder material,
369 iWCUÓ Í .UAL · ** ·· —...------- direct the powder dispenser to dispense a second layer of the powder material having a second upper surface adjacent to the first upper surface, direct the powder leveling mechanism (for example, the member) to level the second top surface to a first flat surface that is at or below the lowest point of the second top surface and direct the dust removal mechanism (for example, the member) to remove the excess powder material from the second layer onto a predetermined second flat surface, wherein the second flat surface is below the first flat surface. The hardened material can form at least a part of the 3D object or be residue. The second flat surface can be located on top of the first top surface. The powder dispensing member can be separated from the exposed surface of the powder bed by a gap. The separation can be any separation described in the present description. The height (vertical distance) of the gap can be any gap height described in the present description. For example, the separation distance is from about 10 μιτι to about 50 mm. The dust leveling mechanism and / or the dust evacuation mechanism can move the
370
TO
If iNSTiTUTc- · '<4' · '. Hardened material (for example, the obj D p -e ή' approximately 300 micrometers or less .-- The ..... mwaTCfSfllEf''fré * 'powder leveling and / or the dust evacuation mechanism can level the upper surface of the powder bed while modifying the position of the hardened material by a maximum of about 1 micrometer (μιη), 2 pm, 3 pm, 4
<td>p.m,</td><td colspan="2">5 pm, 6 pm, 7</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 8 1</td><td>ixm, 9</td><td>p.m</td><td> , 10</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 11</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 12</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 13</td>
<td>p.m,</td><td> 14</td><td>pm, 15 pm,</td><td> 16</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 17</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 18</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 19</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 20</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 25</td>
<td>p.m,</td><td> 30</td><td>pm, 35 pm,</td><td> 40</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 45</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 60</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 70</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 80</td>
<td>p.m,</td><td> 90</td><td>pm, 100</td><td>p.m,</td><td> 200</td><td>p.m</td><td>or</td><td> 300</td><td>p.m.</td><td>The</td><td colspan="2">mechanic</td><td>otherwise</td><td>from</td>
Powder leveling and / or the powder evacuation mechanism can level the upper surface of the powder bed while modifying the position of the hardened material by any value between the values mentioned above.
For example, the powder leveling mechanism and / or the powder removal mechanism can level the top surface of the powder material while changing the position of the hardened material by a distance of
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td><td>approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td><td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td><td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td><td>approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td>
371
ENSTITUTC kU / .: CAi «,
DI LA NíOPisíME · if approximately 1 μπι to approximately 50 μπι from approximately 1 μπι to approximately 100 μπι.
The system described in the present description (eg 900) may comprise a recycling system (eg 907). The recycling system can collect unused powdered material and return unused powdered material to a bin of a powder dispensing mechanism or to the bulk bin. At least a fraction of the powdered material that is pushed out by the transfer mechanism (eg, the peeler and / or the roller) can be recovered by the recycling system. A vacuum (eg 908, which can be located at one edge of the powder bed) can collect unused powder. Unused powder can be removed from the powder bed without a vacuum. Unused powder can be removed from the powder bed by actively pushing it out of the powder bed (for example, mechanically or by using a positive pressure gas). A flow of the gas (eg 909) can direct the unused powder into a vacuum. A dust collection mechanism (eg a shovel) can direct unused dust out of the dust bed (and optionally into the recycling system). The recycling system may comprise one or more filters to
372
<img file="MX355451B_D0155.tif" />
XVI .r JL
MFX'CAMO INSTITUTE
OF THE PROFIL'AD
INDUSTRIAL control a range of sizes of the particles returned to the tank.
In some cases, unused dust can be collected by a Venturi-type sweep nozzle. The nozzle can have a large aspect ratio (for example, at least about 2: 1, 5: 1, 10: 1, 20: 1, 30: 1, 40: 1, or 100: 1) so that the nozzle does not becomes clogged with dust particle (s). The nozzle can be aligned with one or more beams of emitted energy (eg, from the primary and / or complementary energy source). For example, the nozzle and the single or more energy beams can be aligned so that the power source (s) can pass through the nozzle opening when the powder layer is heated.
The nozzle can collect unused powder as the energy beam moves through the nozzle to heat the powder layer.
In some cases, the powder may be collected by one or more nozzles and / or sucked into the vacuum ports that are provided in or adjacent to a heat transfer member, such as a cooling member (e.g., a cooling plate. ), a heating member, or a heat stabilizing member (eg, a thermostat). Nozzles and / or ports
373
<img file="MX355451B_D0156.tif" />
be mechanically coupled to the vacuum suction member can heat transfer.
In some embodiments, the dust can be collected by a purge system through one or more purge ports that purge the dust from the powder bed into one or more purge reservoirs. The dust in the one or more purge tanks can be reused (eg, after filtration and / or further treatment).
The components of the system described in the present description can be adapted and configured to generate a 3D object. The 3D object can be generated by a 3D printing process. A first layer of powder can be provided adjacent to a base, substrate, or bottom of an enclosure. A base can be a previously formed layer of the 3D object or any other surface on which a layer or bed of powder is spread, contained, placed or supported. In the case of the formation of the first layer of the 3D object, the first layer of powder can be formed in the powder bed without a base, without one or more auxiliary support elements (for example, rods) or without any other support structure. different from dust. Subsequent layers can be formed such that at least a portion of the subsequent layer is fused, sintered, fused,
374
MEXICAN INSTITUTE \ <sub>r</sub><sup>1</sup>
OF THE REOElSDAO V'U_ <sup>r</sup>
INDUSTRIAL <sup>x</sup>^ 2í¿.JS- ·· joins and / or connects in any other way to at least the only portion of a previously formed layer. In some cases, at least the only portion of the previously formed layer that is subsequently transformed and hardened into a hardened material, acts as a basis for the formation of the object.
3D. In some cases, the first layer comprises at least a portion of the base. The powder material can be any material used for 3D printing described in the present description. The powder layer can comprise particles of homogeneous or heterogeneous size and / or shape.
Figure 3 depicts an example of a bed 301 having a partially formed 3D object 302. The partially formed 3D object 302 may comprise at least one layer that was previously transformed and cured into the 3D object 302. A first powder layer 303 may be provided adjacent the partially formed 3D object 302. The first powder layer
303 it can be provided at a first temperature (Ti). The first temperature can be very close to room temperature. In some cases, the first layer may have a first temperature (Ti) above or below room temperature. For example, the first temperature (Τχ) can be at least about 0 ° C, 5 'C, 10 ° C,' C, 20 'C, 25' C, 30 'C, 35' C, 40 'C, 45 'C, 50' C, 60
375
IMPIOUS
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Ftwti- '·
OF THE PROPERTY rVaff
INDUSTRIAL 'C, 70' C, 80 'C, 90' C, 100 'C, 200' C, 300 'C, 400' C or 500 'C. The first temperature (Ti) can be a maximum of
<td>approximately</td><td> 0</td><td>'C,</td><td> 5</td><td>'C,</td><td> 10</td><td>'C,</td><td> 15</td><td>'C, 20' C,</td><td> 25</td><td>'C,</td><td> 30</td>
<td>'C, 35' C, 40 '</td><td>c,</td><td> 45 ’</td><td>c,</td><td> 50</td><td>'C,</td><td> 60</td><td>'C,</td><td>70'C, 80</td><td>° c,</td><td> 90</td><td>'C,</td>
<td>100 'C, 200'</td><td>c,</td><td> 300</td><td></td><td>c,</td><td> 400</td><td>'C</td><td>or</td><td>500 'C.</td><td>The</td><td colspan="2">first</td>
<td colspan="2">temperature can</td><td>to be</td><td colspan="3">any</td><td colspan="2">value</td><td>between the</td><td colspan="2">values</td><td>from</td>
temperature mentioned above (for example, from about 0 about 0 about 200 ° C, from about 0 ° C, from 'C or from' C to about 500 'C to about 300' C to about 500 about 100 'C to about 400' C ). In some cases, the first temperature (Ti) can be below 0'C.
Energy from a first (or primary) energy source
304 may be provided to at least a portion of the first powder layer 303. Power from the first power source 304 may be provided to the portion of the first powder layer (eg, using a vector scanning technique). In some cases, the primary source of energy can be a laser. In some cases, the primary energy source may project radiation comprising electromagnetic, electronic, positronic, proton, plasma, or ionic radiation. The beam
376 v INSTITU'TÍ DS · '' X./.auÁL <
Electromagnetic can comprise microwave, infrared (IR), ultraviolet (UV) or visible radiation. The ion beam can include a cation or an anion. The electromagnetic beam can comprise a laser beam. The primary source of energy can include a laser source. The primary source of energy can include an electron gun or any other energy source configured to provide directed energy to a surface or base. The primary source of energy may comprise a direct laser diode fiber coupled to a laser. The energy that is provided to the portion of the first layer of powder can be absorbed by the powder and the powder may experience an increase in temperature as a result of energy absorption. The energy that is provided by the primary energy source can fuse, sinter, melt, bond or otherwise connect one or more portions of a previously solidified layer.
Melt the previously solidified layer and the powder material can combine (for example, fuse, sinter, melt, join or connect in any other way) the two together to form the 3D object. In some cases, the primary source of energy can melt at least about 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 or
100 layers of the previously solidified layer. A layer d; · H ('\ í „./LO- IL \ wsxcuv; Ksvc.y * y * ce LA j. Lk?: ---, ü'.D'ús 1 .JAL thickness of at least approximately 1 pm, 5 pm,
377 it can have a pm, 15 pm, pm, 60 pm, 70 pm, 300 pm, 3 some cases, laser light.
unit of area unit of area of the second energy source. The laser light may have a power per unit area that is greater than the power per unit area of the second energy source. The rise in temperature may be sufficient to transform at least a portion of the first layer of powder. The rise in temperature may be sufficient to melt at least a portion of a first layer of powder and enable the molten powder to remain molten for at least about 1 femtosecond (fs), 50 fs, 100 fs,
500 fs, 1 picosecond (ps), 50 ps, 100 ps, 500 ps, 1 nanosecond (ns), 50 ns, 100 ns, 500 ns, 1 microsecond (ps), ps, 100 ps, 500 ps, 1 millisecond (ms ), 50 ms, 100 ms or
500 ms. The rise in temperature may be sufficient to melt the entire first powder layer. The temperature rise may be sufficient to sinter at least a portion of the first layer of powder during at pm, 25 pm, 30 pm, 35 pm, 40 pm, 45 pm, 50 pm, 80 pm, 90 pm, 100 pm , 150 pm, 200 pm, 250
550 pm, 400 pm, 450 pm, 500 pm or 750 pm. In the first source of energy can be a beam
The laser light may have a power per ¡a that is less than or equal to the power per
378 ϊ Ú77
INSTITUTO MEXICANO f
OF THE PROPERTY V ^ r -L. '' INDUSTRIAL '' minus 1 femtosecond (fs), 50 fs, 100 fs, 500 fs, 1 picosecond (ps), 50 ps, 100 ps, 500 ps, 1 nanosecond (ns), ns, 100 ns, 500 ns, 1 microsecond (ps), 50 ps, 100 ps,
500 ps, 1 millisecond (ms), 50 ms, 100 ms, or 500 ms. The temperature rise may be sufficient to sinter at least a portion of the first layer of powder for a period of time between the time periods mentioned above (e.g., from about 1 fs to about 500 ms, from about 1 ns to approximately 500 ms, approximately 1 fs to approximately 50 ns, or approximately 1 ps to approximately 1 ms). The rise in temperature may be sufficient to sinter the entire first powder layer. The first layer of powder can be melted along a predetermined pattern or randomly. At the time of fusion, the first layer of powder may be at a second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>). The second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) can be higher than the first temperature (Τχ). The second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) can be lower than the first temperature (Τχ). The second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) can be practically equal to the first temperature (Τχ). For example, the second temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) can be at least about 500'C, 750'C, 1,000 ° C, 1,250 ° C, 1,500 ° C, 1,750'C, 2,000 ° C,
379
<img file="MX355451B_D0157.tif" />
Ut LA “Kvi. ilíí-Λ L> 2,250'C, 2,500'C, 2,750'C, 3,000'C, 3,500'C, "T / WO<sup>V</sup>C<sup>;;</sup>% 5,000 'C. The second temperature can be between the temperature values mentioned above (for example, from about 500 C to about
2,500'C, about 2,250 ° C to about 5,000'C, or about 1,500'C to about 3,500'C).
The primary source of energy can supply energy to at least one point in a first layer of dust for a fixed period of time. The fixed time period can be selected so that a specified volume of the powder can reach a desired temperature. The time period can be selected based on the thermal properties of the
<td>material in</td><td>dust already</td><td>the amount</td><td>of energy that</td><td>I know</td>
<td colspan="2">provided by source</td><td colspan="2">primary energy. The term</td><td>from</td>
<td>Fixed time</td><td>can be</td><td>at least</td><td>approximately</td><td> 1</td>
<td>femtosecond</td><td>(fs), 50 fs,</td><td>100 fs, 500 fs,</td><td colspan="2">1 picosecond (ps),</td>
<td>50 ps, 100</td><td>ps, 500 ps,</td><td>1 nanosecond</td><td>(ns), 50 ns,</td><td> 0.1</td>
<td>wed second</td><td colspan="2">(gs), 0.5 gs, 1.0 gs, 2.0</td><td>gs, 3.0 gs, 4.5</td><td>gs,</td>
<td colspan="2">5.0 gs, 10 gs,</td><td>20 gs, 50 gs, 100 gs,</td><td colspan="2">300 gs, 500</td><td>gs</td><td>or 1</td><td>ms.</td>
<td>The</td><td>period of</td><td>fixed time can</td><td>to be</td><td>What</td><td colspan="2">maximum</td><td>from</td>
<td colspan="2">approximately</td><td>0.1 microseconds (g's'</td><td> ) , 0.5</td><td>gs,</td><td> 1.0</td><td>gs,</td><td> 2.0</td>
<td>gs,</td><td>3.0 gs, 4.5</td><td>gs, 5.0 gs, 10 gs, 20</td><td>gs, 50</td><td>gs,</td><td> 100</td><td>gs,</td><td> 300</td>
gs, 500 gs or 1 ms. The fixed time period can be
380
INSTITUTO Mexicano * —- <pi '/ sf ·' any value between the above values (for example, from about 1 fs to about 50 ps, or from about 1 ps to about 500 ps, or from about 1 ps to about 1 ms). The fixed period of time may comprise a period of time when the primary energy source supplies energy to a point on the powder bed. A point can be a site on the dust bed with an area equal to a fundamental beam length scale of the primary energy source. The total time energy is applied to an area in the first powder coat can be at least about 1 ps, 50 ps, 100 ps,
500 ps, 1 ms, 50 ms, 0.1 second (s), 0.5 are. During the time that the primary energy source supplies power to the first dust layer, the primary energy source can supply power to each point in the dust layer once, more than once, or not at all.
At least a portion of the powder can be selectively heated by an energy source to form a desired 3D object (eg, predetermined and / or requested). The portion of the powder that did not form at least a part of the desired 3D object can be referred to as the remainder. In some cases, the rest do not form a continuous structure that
381
MPT,; - Λ ¡NSTITt / rc covers 1mm, 0.5mm, 0.1mm or more. The structure<sup>11</sup> The circle may be a continuous solid structure or a continuous solidified structure. A continuous structure can be formed by the complete or partial transformation of portions of the powder. The systems and methods described in the present description may not produce a continuous solid structure in the rest. For example, they may not produce one portion of the powder transformed into the rest. In some cases, the continuous structure does not enclose the 3D object or part of it. In some cases, the rest do not form a scaffold that encloses the entire 3D object or part of it. In some cases, the rest does not form a slightly sintered structure that encloses the entire 3D object or part of it.
Power from a second (or complementary) power source 305 may optionally be provided to at least a portion of the remainder of the first powder layer. The supplemental power source 305 can be separated from the primary power source 304. In some cases, the second power source is integrated with the primary power source 304.
Power from the supplemental power source can be provided to the remainder of the first dust layer before, after, or concurrently with providing power to the
382 portion of the first layer of dust with the fueíí ^ Ml & S ^ Sia ^ perdé, · INDOsTKi U Vqg-HL'K-.
Energy. In some cases, the primary source of energy can transform the portion of the first layer of dust. The supplemental power source can increase the temperature of at least a portion of the remainder of the first powder layer. In some cases, the energy provided by the supplemental energy source may not be sufficient to transform the remainder of the first layer of dust. The primary source of energy can be any source of energy described in the present description. The primary source of energy can be any source of energy that generates a beam of energy described in the present description. The supplemental source of energy can be any source of energy described in the present description. The supplemental source of energy can be any source of energy that generates a beam of energy described in the present description. The supplemental source of energy can be a laser. The supplemental source of energy may include radiation comprising electromagnetic, electronic, positronic, proton, plasma, or ionic radiation. The electromagnetic beam can comprise microwave, infrared, ultraviolet or visible radiation.
The ion beam can include a cation or an anion. The beam
383 electromagnetic may comprise a beam
<img file="MX355451B_D0158.tif" />
atifiXICAl DC THE PROPERTY
INDUSTRIAL
<img file="MX355451B_D0159.tif" />
Complementary may include a laser source. The supplementary source <—ea — w jm tn jí'jwwmau — wwXT— íhi <h ή ..... * · may include an electronic cannon or any other energy source configured to provide directed energy to a surface or base . The supplemental source of energy may have a power per unit area that is less than the power per unit area of the primary source of energy. For example, the supplemental energy source can produce an energy beam with an area that is approximately 100 to approximately 1,000,000 times greater than the beam area of the first (eg, primary) energy source. The supplemental power source can supply power to at least a portion of the remainder of the first dust layer for a fixed period of time. The fixed time period can be selected so that a specified volume of the powder reaches a desired temperature, the time period can be selected based on the thermal properties of the powder and the amount of energy that is provided by the supplemental energy source. The fixed time period can be at least approximately 1 μΞ, 50 με, 100 με, 500 μβ, lms, 5 ms, 10 ms, 15 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, or 1 minute. The fixed time period
384
IMPI fv >>
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V, · * - -
OF THE ΚΛ-.λINDUSTRIAL PROPERTY can be a maximum of approximately 1 με, 50 με, 100
<td>με, 500</td><td>RS,</td><td>1 ms, 5 ms,</td><td>10 ms, 15</td><td>ms, 20 ms, 50</td><td>ms, 100 ms,</td>
<td>200 ms,</td><td> 500</td><td>ms, 1 s, 5</td><td>s, 10 s</td><td>1 minute. The</td><td>period of</td>
<td>weather</td><td>permanent</td><td>can be</td><td>any</td><td>value between</td><td>the values</td>
mentioned above (eg, from about 1 με to about 1 minute, from about 1 με to about 100 ms, from about 50 ms to about 1 minute, or from about 100 ms to about 10 s). The desired temperature can be a temperature below the transformation temperature of the powder material. In some cases, supplemental energy may be supplied to a single point, supplied to more than a single point, not supplied, supplied at least once, twice, 5 times, 10 times, times, 100 times, or 1,000 times to the same position or to a different position (s) in the powder layer. Such a supply of the supplementary energy may occur before or after the dust layer receives energy from the primary energy source or while it receives it.
In some cases, the supplemental power source can provide power to a fraction of the dust that is adjacent to at least a portion of the 3D object. In some cases, the supplemental power source may preheat
385
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V.í'or: '- ·'. · 3D before · is heated pw-source alternatively, the source will heat after the after the 3D object at least a fraction of the object only fraction of the primary 3D object of energy . Additional or complementary energy can minus a fraction of the 3D object be heated by the primary energy source. The supplemental energy source can remove an oxidized layer of material from at least a portion of a surface of at least the only fraction of the 3D object.
The supplemental source of energy can be an array, or array, of laser diodes. Each of the laser diodes in the array, or array, can be controlled independently (eg, by a control mechanism) so that the diodes can be turned on and off independently. At least a part of the laser diodes in the array or array can be collectively controlled so that at least the only part of the laser diodes can be turned off and on simultaneously. In some cases, all of the laser diodes in the array or arrays are collectively controlled so that all of the laser diodes can be turned off and on simultaneously.
The energy per unit area or intensity of each laser diode in the array or array can be modulated
386
IM M .W- »
Á J. v -Λ. Jt hee. ·· yiK '
INSTITUTO MEXICANO U \
OE THE F ^ OPIZITY> '* independently (for example, by a control mechanism ^^ smefiS). Sometimes the energy per * v ^ T3a3 '"<sup>=</sup>áe "<sup>to go</sup>'Sréá -'-<sup>i</sup>The intensity of at least a portion of the laser diodes in the array or array can be collectively modulated (eg, by a control mechanism). Sometimes the energy per unit area or intensity of all laser diodes in the array or array can be collectively modulated (eg, by a control mechanism). The supplemental power source can sweep across a surface of the powder, by mechanical movement of the power source, an adjustable reflective mirror, or a polygon light scanner. The supplemental power source can project the energy by using a DLP modulator, a one-dimensional scanner, or a two-dimensional scanner.
After supplying the energy to the portion of the first powder layer by the primary energy source and to the remainder portion by the supplemental energy source, the energy can be extracted from the powder bed by a cooling process where a cooling process can understand transferring the heat from the powder bed 306.
In some cases, heat can be transferred from the powder bed to a heat sink. Energy (e.g. heat) can be drawn from the powder bed uniformly from
387
- _ J¿ 'INSTÍTUTO MEXICANO \. T¡ 'way that the transfer speed of the<sup>and</sup> siwafg & a '' Tdgjáwjb. the portion of the first layer of dust - ^ heat the primary source of energy and from the portion of the remainder heated by the transfer of heat from the supplemental source of energy to the heat sink at a substantially similar rate, at different rates, at different rates. that follow patterns, at random speeds or any combination of these.
One or more primary sources of energy and one or more complementary sources of energy can be used. For example, at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 30, 100, 300 or 1,000 primary energy sources are used and at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 , 6, 7,
8, 9, 10, 30, 100, 300 or 1,000 complementary sources of energy. The primary and supplemental sources of energy can be independently or collectively controlled by a control mechanism (eg, a computer), as described in the present description. Sometimes at least part of the primary and supplemental energy sources can be independently or collectively controlled by a control mechanism (eg, a computer).
The cooling process can be optimized to reduce the time required to cool the powder bed. At the completion of the cooling process the powder bed
388
ΙΜ ΡΓΓ'-i
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '> - ·>
DE LA PRCI! = I.'AL>, can have a temperature practically uW ^ Fd ^ e ^^ tiJífá practically uniform temperature can S'ei ...... Figure. * Tentperfftura in the bed of dust where the difference Between the average temperature between a first point and a second point, it varies a maximum of approximately 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 6%, 4%, 2%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1%. The difference between the average temperature between a first point and a second point varies by any percentage value between the percentage values mentioned above (for example, from about 0.1% to about 20%, from about 0.1% to about 5%, or from about 5 % to about 20%). The first layer can be cooled down to a predetermined temperature within a fixed period of time. For example, the fixed cooling time period can be at most
<td>about 1</td><td>με, 50 με,</td><td> 100</td><td>με, 500 με, 1 ms, 5</td><td>ms, 10</td>
<td>ms, 15 ms, 2 0 ms,</td><td>50 ms, 100</td><td>ms,</td><td>200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s,</td><td>5 s, 10</td>
<td>s, 20 s, 30 s, 40</td><td>s, 50 s, 60</td><td>yes,</td><td>70 s, 80 s, 90 s, 100</td><td>s, 110</td>
<td>s, 120 s, 130 s,</td><td>140 s, 150</td><td>yes,</td><td>160 s, 170 s, 180 s,</td><td>190 s,</td>
<td>200 s, 210 s, 220</td><td>s, 230 s,</td><td> 240</td><td>s, 250 s, 260 s, 270</td><td>s, 280</td>
<td>s, 290 s, 300 s,</td><td>10 minutes,</td><td> 15</td><td>minutes, 30 minutes,</td><td>1 hour,</td>
<td>3 hours, 6 hours,</td><td>12 hours or</td><td colspan="3">1 day. The fixed time period</td>
<td colspan="3">can be between anyone</td><td>of the values of</td><td>weather</td>
389 ί, 2 /2-.--.2^.5¾ ntSTrruTo ^ · '· ί 7' mentioned above (for example, from ap ^ e ^ gárcaSe
<td>5th._</td><td> 1</td>
<td>, μ $</td><td>to</td>
<td>με</td><td>to</td>
<td>μΞ</td><td>to</td>
about 300 s, from about 1 about 90 s or from about 1 about 10 s)
After the first layer of powder has reached a sufficiently low temperature maximum of about 15'C, 20'C, 25'C, 30'C, 35'C, 40'C, 45'C, 50'C, 55 'C, 60' C, 65 'C, 70' C, 75 'C, 80' C, 85 'C, 90' C, 100 'C, 200' C, 300 'C, 400' C or 500 ' C; The process can be repeated by providing a second layer of powder 307 adjacent to the first layer. In some cases, the second powder layer 307 may be cooled to a temperature below the temperature of the powder bed.
The second powder layer 307 can absorb heat from the powder bed to help cool the powder bed. In some cases, at least a fraction of the first layer of powder may be removed prior to providing the second layer of powder adjacent to the first layer (for example, by use of the dust removal mechanism and / or the leveling mechanism of dust). The primary source of energy can selectively provide energy to at least a portion of the second layer of powder. The primary source of energy can
390
TUPÍ
JV XA Λ I ,, INSTITUTO MEXICANO be configured to provide enough portion of the second layer of man * »i» a powder, qu.o-itj ~ ¿uag¿arme ..
at least a portion of the second layer of powder. The supplemental source of energy can selectively provide energy to at least a portion of the remainder of the second powder layer. The supplemental power source can be configured to provide power to the remainder of the second powder layer so that at least a portion of the second powder layer experiences increased power.
<td>temperature.</td><td>Increasing</td><td>from</td><td>the</td><td>temperature</td><td>can</td><td>to be</td>
<td>insufficient</td><td colspan="2">to transform</td><td>to the</td><td>minus one</td><td>part of</td><td>the</td>
<td>Second layer</td><td>of dust.</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td colspan="2">In some cases, the object</td><td colspan="2">3d can</td><td colspan="2">be formed by</td><td>use</td>
<td>of only</td><td colspan="2">a primary source</td><td>from</td><td>Energy. For</td><td>example,</td><td>a</td>
First layer of powder can be provided at a first temperature (T<sub>or</sub>). T<sub>or</sub> It can be the average temperature in the first layer of dust. The primary source of energy can transform at least a portion of the first powder layer to form a transformed material (eg, fused, sintered, or molten). The powder material in the first powder layer adjacent to the transformed material can reach a temperature below the powder transformation temperature. The powder material in the first
391
Λ .., - ,, ·.,. , χ '· >>
ENSTiTUTC MEXICANO DE LA PROPERTY powder layer adjacent to the material that has been transferred to a temperature below cudTqtfl'éT ^ téiripe'fátüfa '··' of transformation (for example, melting, sintering or melting) of the dust. The transformed material may experience an increase in temperature such that the temperature within the transformed material can reach a maximum temperature (T<sub>2</sub>) · The first full layer of powder can be cooled to average temperature (Ti). Ti can be the default temperature. The powder layer can be cooled from a surface of the powder layer. In some cases, Ti may not be greater than T<sub>or</sub> in a K factor<sub>T</sub>2nd times (T<sub>2</sub>- T<sub>or</sub>). In some cases, Ti may not be greater than T<sub>or</sub> at most 0.1 times (T<sub>2</sub>- T<sub>or</sub>). In some cases, Ti may not be greater than T<sub>or</sub> at most 0.2 times (T<sub>2</sub>- To). In some cases, Ti may not be greater than To by at most 0.8 times (T<sub>2</sub>- To). Cooling of the first layer can be delayed as outlined for the cooling time period described in the present disclosure. In some cases, the first layer can be cooled to a temperature such that the average individual can touch it without burning or damaging themselves. In some cases, the first layer can be cooled to the sufficiently low temperature described in the present description. The transformed material (for
392
<img file="MX355451B_D0160.tif" />
MEXICANO v 'PRO: I? SAD INDUSTRL'
INSTITUTE ΜΣ DE LA PR <
example, cast) can be hardened (for example,
<img file="MX355451B_D0161.tif" />
solidify) during cooling
<img file="MX355451B_D0162.tif" />
first layer
A second powder layer can be provided adjacent to the first powder layer (e.g. on top) and both the process of transforming at least a portion of the powder layer and the process of cooling at least a portion of the powder layer can be repeated. powder (for example, cooling the entire powder layer or the entire powder bed). Repetition, which comprises providing the subsequent powder layer, melting at least a portion of the powder layer, and cooling at least a portion of the powder layer, may occur until a final or partial shape of the 3D object is obtained. Layer cooling can occur by transferring energy from a layer to a cooling member (eg, a heat sink).
Energy can be transferred from a layer along a direction facing away from a layer of powder disposed on the powder bed. In some cases, energy can be transferred in one direction towards the surface of a heat sink. Energy can be transferred in the direction of the exposed surface of the powder bed. Energy can be transferred upwards. Energy can be transferred to a cooling member located above
393
<img file="MX355451B_D0163.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO J-fí '*
OF THE. PROPERTY VV ί * 'r';<sup>:</sup> from the powder bed or next to the powder bed<sup>N</sup>F<sup>ÜS</sup>^ timesS7 "<sup>i</sup>at least approximately 20%, 30%, 4 0%, 50%, ”6 0<sup>_</sup>% 7 TÓ 'f', '' '70'% 80%, 90% or 95% of the energy (eg heat) is transferred to the cooling member. Sometimes at most about 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 30% or 20% of the energy is transferred to the cooling member. Sometimes the energy transferred to the cooling member may have a percentage value between any of the percentage values mentioned above (for example, from about 20% to
<td>approximately</td><td> 95</td><td>or ° r</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 20</td><td>or. to * 3 or.</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 60</td><td>OR, or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>or. ra U Cl</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 95 %) .</td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td><td></td>
<td>The final form</td><td colspan="2">of the object</td><td>3D</td><td colspan="2">can recover little</td><td>later</td>
<td>to cool a</td><td>layer of</td><td colspan="2">dust</td><td>final. Shortly after</td><td>from</td><td>cool</td>
<td>it can be like</td><td>maximum</td><td>from</td><td colspan="2">about 1 day,</td><td colspan="2">12 hours, 6</td>
<td>hours, 3 hours,</td><td colspan="2">2 hours,</td><td colspan="2">1 hour, 30 minutes, 15</td><td colspan="2">minutes, 5</td>
<td>minutes, 240 s,</td><td>220 s,</td><td> 200</td><td>yes,</td><td>180 s, 160 s, 140 s,</td><td> 120</td><td>S, 100</td>
s, 80s, 60s, 40s, 20s, 10s, 9s, 8s, 7s, 6s, 5s, 4s, 3s, 2s, or 1s. Shortly after cooling it can be between any of the time values mentioned above (for example, from about Isa to about 1 day, from about Isa to about 1 hour, from
394
<img file="MX355451B_D0164.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \ '·' approximately 30 minutes to approximately PI ^^^ j ^ a ^ o. · From 'approximately 2 0 s to approximately .340 ..). (¾) <sup>F</sup>In some cases, the cooling can be produced by the method comprising active convection cooling by using a gas or a mixture of cold gases comprising argon, nitrogen, helium, neon, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, dioxide carbon or oxygen.
In some cases, unused powder can surround the three-dimensional (3D) object in the powder bed. Unused powder can be substantially removed from the 3D object. Substantial removal can mean that the dust covers a maximum of approximately 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 6%, 4%, 2%,%, 0.5% or 0.1% of the surface of the 3D object after the removal. Substantial removal can refer to removal of all the powder that was dispensed into the powder bed and remained as powder at the end of the 3D printing process (i.e. the remainder), except for at most about 10%, 3% , 1%, 0.3% or 0.1% by weight of the rest. Substantial removal can refer to removal of all the remainder except for a maximum of about 50%, 10%, 3%, 1%, 0.3% or 0.1% by weight of the 3D printed object. Unused dust can be removed to allow retrieval of the 3D object without digging through
395
ΙΡϊ ~) MEXICAN ν .---
UXDllSTglÁi,> u. <.
from the dust. For example, unused powder can be sucked out of the powder bed through one or more vacuum ports' constructed adjacent to the powder bed. After the unused powder is evacuated, the 3D object can be removed and the unused powder can be circulated back into a powder bin for use in future construction.
The 3D object can be generated on a mesh substrate. A solid platform (eg, base or substrate) can be arranged under the screen so that the powder remains confined in the powder bed and holes in the screen are blocked. Blocking the holes in the mesh may not allow a substantial amount of powder material to flow. The mesh can be moved (for example, vertically or diagonally) relative to the solid platform by pulling one or more posts connected the same to the mesh as to the solid platform (for example, to the single or more edges of the mesh or base) so that the mesh is unlocked. The single or more posts can be detached from the single or more edges by a threaded connection. The mesh substrate can be pulled out of the powder bed with the 3D object to retrieve the 3D object so that the mesh is unlocked. Alternatively, the solid platform can be tilted, moved horizontally so that the
396
<img file="MX355451B_D0165.tif" />
mesh is unlocked. When the mesh is unlocked, at least some of the powder flows from the mesh while the 3D object remains on the mesh.
The 3D object can be built on a construction comprising a first and a second mesh, so that in a first position the holes in the first mesh are completely obstructed by the solid parts of the second mesh so that no material can flow into dust through the two screens in the first position, since the holes in both screens are blocked. The first mesh, the second mesh, or both can be moved in a controlled manner (eg horizontally or at an angle) to a second position. In the second position, the holes in the first mesh and the holes in the second mesh are at least partially aligned so that the powder material disposed in the powder bed can flow to a position below the two meshes, and leave the Exposed 3D object.
In some cases, the cooling gas can be directed towards the hardened material (for example, the 3D object) to cool the hardened material during its recovery. The mesh can be sized so that unused powder will pass through the mesh when the 3D object is exposed from the powder bed. In some cases, the mesh may
397
<img file="MX355451B_D0166.tif" />
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '*
DE LA? R3? IS »AD V '-. '<sup>!</sup> be attached to a pulley or other mechanical devicei ^ S'b '<sup>Ta</sup>i5Fe rftáh'é-fa that the mesh can be removed (for example TTT ^ rSVcTTTTaY ^ e · ^<sup>7</sup> of the powder bed with the 3D part.
In some cases, the 3D object (that is, the 3D part) can be recovered within a maximum of about 12 hours (h), 6 h, 5 h, 4 h, 3 h, 2 h, 1 h, 30 minutes ( min), 20 min, min, 5 min, 1 min, 40 s, 20 s, 10 s, 9 s, 8 s, 7 s, 6 s, 5 s, 4 s, 3 s, 2 s or 1 s after cool a last layer of powder. The 3D object can be retrieved during a period of time between any of the mentioned time periods
<td>previously</td><td>(By e</td><td>example, about 12 h</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 1</td><td>s, about 12 h</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 30</td><td>min, about 1 h</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>1 s</td><td>or about 30 min</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>4 0 s).</td><td colspan="2">The generated 3D object may require</td>
little to no post-processing after retrieval. Post-processing may comprise trimming, as described in the present description. Post-processing may comprise grinding (eg sanding). For example, in some cases the generated 3D object can be retrieved and finished without removing the transformed dust or auxiliary elements. The 3D object can be recovered when the three-dimensional part, composed of the
398
Hee
OOTITUTE «ΚΖΚΛΝΟ 'hardened material (for example, solidifiedRSó ^ ¿g ^ gte -a, a suitable handling temperature, JK?.? I hi 1 ifar the removal of the 3D object from the powder bed without substantial deformation. Handling temperature can be a temperature that is suitable for packing the 3D object.Handling temperature can be maximum of about 120'C, 100'C, 80'C, 60'C, 40'C, 30'C, 25 ' C, 20'C, 10'C or 5'C. The handling temperature can be any value between the temperature values mentioned above (for example, from about 120'C to about 20'C, from about 40'C to about 5'C, or from about 40'C to about 10 'C).
The systems and methods described in the present disclosure can provide a process for generating a 3D object wherein the process maintains a bed of powder, comprising layers of the powder material, at a substantially uniform average temperature. The powder bed may include a partially or fully formed 3D object where the object
3D can be formed by repeated transforming and subsequent cooling operations of at least a portion of the powder. The fully or partially formed 3D object can be fully supported by the bed of
399 ! canq powder so that the formed object compl.etS<sup>iSI</sup>© Bt ^^ 'j ^^ lfpfe® ^^ floats or becomes suspended in the powder bed. The practically uniform temperature may be less than a melting temperature of the powdered material. For example, the practically uniform temperature can be at most approximately 15'C, 25'C, 30'C, 50'C, 75'C, 100'C, 150'C, 200'C, 300'C, 400 'C, 600' C or 1,000 'C. The practically uniform temperature can be between any of the mentioned temperature values
<td>previously</td><td>(for example</td><td>, from</td><td>i approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>'C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>1,000 'C,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>'C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>300 'C,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 200</td><td>'C</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>1,000 'C c</td><td>5 of</td><td>approximately</td><td> 100</td><td>'C</td><td>to</td>
about 500 'C).
A first layer of powder can be provided at an initial time (to). At least a portion of the first layer of powder can be heated or transformed. In some cases, a portion of the first layer of powder is not heated or transformed; The powder portion of the first layer can be heated directly (eg, by an energy source) or indirectly (eg, by heat transfer from the transformed portion (s) of the powder material). The dust can have a temperature
400
ΤΓ 'Α' ί. <
i,; ' ί i- *! ν · ->. /. ií- «4 ¡/ ¿SXICAWO '' c<sub>x</sub> '
V r »
X
INSTITUTE"
ΚΕ THE PROPERTY below the transformation temperature ^ TTeT<sup>-</sup> powder material. In cases where the powder is heated directly, the powder may be exposed to a source of energy (eg the supplemental source of energy). The energy source that heats the dust can provide energy per unit area (S<sub>2</sub>) to the powder portion.
The energy per unit area S<sub>2</sub> it can be within a maximum of approximately 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 15%, 10% or 5% of a first energy per unit area (Si).
At least a portion of the first layer of powder can be transformed with an energy beam, for example with an energy beam from the primary energy source. The maximum energy per unit area in the first layer of dust can be the first energy per unit area (Si). In some cases, a remainder of the first powder is not transformed. The remainder of the first layer of dust can be supplied with energy at a third energy per unit area S<sub>3</sub> which is less than or equal to approximately a factor Ksn times Si. The factor Ks can have a value of at least about 0.8, 0.9,
0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1, 0.07, 0.05, 0.03, or 0.01.
The KS13 factor can have a maximum value of approximately 0.01, 0.03, 0.05, 0.07, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8 or 0.9. The Ksi factor<sub>3</sub> can have any
401
e., - :. By η / Α. AA INSTITUTE l.iSXICANO value between the values of Ksi<sub>3</sub> mentioned example, Ks<sub>i3</sub> it can have a value of ap £ axjjaaíi ^ gieiit.e0..01 to about 0.9, from about 0.07 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 5 0.8, or from about 0.05 to about 0.2. The remainder of the first layer of dust can be supplied with energy at a third energy per unit area S3 which is less than or equal to about 0.1 times Si. At least a fraction of the energy used to transform the portion of the first powder layer can be extracted from the first powder layer, for example, through the use of the cooling member. An instant t<sub>2</sub> it can be a later instant that occurs after the initial instant ti. A second layer can be provided adjacent to the first layer at time t<sub>2</sub>.
In total, the energy per unit area that flows through a cross section below the first layer in the time interval of approximately ti at<sub>2</sub> may be less than approximately Ks<sub>i3</sub> times Yes. A cross section below the first layer can be a region parallel to the first layer. The cross section can be a flat (eg horizontal) cross section. In some cases, the cross section may be at least about 1 pm, 5 pm, 10 pm, 100 pm, 1mm, 5mm, 10mm,
402 mm, 20mm, 25mm, 50mm, 100mm,
500 mm below the first layer. The cross section can be between any of the values mentioned above. For example, the cross section may
<td colspan="4">be from about 1 pm to about 500 mm, from</td>
<td>about 100</td><td>pm at about 50</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 5</td><td>pm at about 15</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 10</td><td>mm to about 100</td><td>mm or</td><td>from</td>
<td>about 50mm</td><td>at about 500 mm.</td><td></td><td></td>
<td>The transference of</td><td>energy can be produced</td><td>since</td><td>a</td>
<td>first layer of powder</td><td colspan="2">to an adjacent dust layer</td><td>(for</td>
example, a second) in a time interval of t<sub>x</sub> at<sub>2</sub>- In some cases, the energy transfer may occur from the first powder layer in a direction facing away from the second powder layer (for example, in the direction of the cooling member and / or in the upward direction from the exposed surface of the powder bed). The transfer of energy from the first layer of dust can occur at an energy per unit of
<td>area</td><td>S<sub>2</sub>. The second energy</td><td>for</td><td>unit of</td><td>area S<sub>2</sub> can be</td>
<td>same</td><td>to a factor Ksi<sub>2</sub> times</td><td>Yes.</td><td>Ksi<sub>2</sub> can</td><td>have a value of</td>
<td colspan="2">at least about 0.</td><td> 1,</td><td> 0.15, 0.2,</td><td> 0.25, 0.3, 0.35,</td>
<td> 0.4,</td><td> 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0</td><td> . 65,</td><td> 0.7, 0.75,</td><td>0.8, 0.85 or 0.9.</td>
403
ΪΜΡΙΟα
KS12 can have a maximum value of a ^ & S! LitíS (^) Jgeá'te '· O.-9y t? «£ USTIUAl“ i /.-* ·
0.85, 0.8, 0.75, 0.7, 0.65, 0.6, 0.55, 0.5, 0.45, 0.4, 0.35, 0.3, 0.25, 0.2, 0.15, or 0.1. Ksi<sub>2</sub> can have a value between any of the Ksi values<sub>2</sub> mentioned above.
For example, Ks<sub>12</sub> can have a value from about 0.1 to about 0.9, from about 0.25 to about 0.9, from about 0.3 to about
0.8, from about 0.2 to about 0.6, or from about 0.15 to about 0.7. In some cases, the transfer of energy can occur by means of a cooling member (for example, the heat sink). The cooling member can be located above, below, or to the side of the powder layer. The cooling member may comprise an energy conducting material. The cooling member may comprise an active energy transfer or a passive energy transfer. The cooling member may comprise a cooling liquid (eg, aqueous or oil), a cooling gas, or a cooling solid. The cooling member can further be connected to a cooler or a thermostat. The gas or liquid comprising the cooling member can be stationary or circulating.
404
IMPIff Or Mexican institute, ·. ><sub>r</sub><
During the formation of the 3D object with the sigk ^ íté ^^ mé ^ Q ^ gs provided in the present description, at least ..... a portion of a layer of dust can be heated by an energy source to a temperature enough to transform at least a portion of the powder layer. In some cases, the time interval during which a portion of the powder is held at the transformation temperature may be small in relation to the total time required to form the 3D object so that the time-average temperature of the powder is below of the transformation temperature of the powder.
Figure 4 is an example of a graphical history of temperature over time for a described system. The graph in Figure 4 represents a temperature profile 401 as a function of time. The temperature profile can represent the temperature as a function of time of at least a portion of a single powder layer, a group of powder layers, or all powder layers in the powder bed (e.g., stacked in the bed dust). At an initial point in time (to) a layer of the powder material may be provided. The layer of the powder material can be provided in a chamber or in an enclosure. The powder can be provided at an initial temperature To.
Temperature
405
IMPI
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Di LA FROPIÍDAO
<img file="MX355451B_D0167.tif" />
initial T<sub>or</sub> it may be the minimum temperature of Sií'áH ^ ur of dust. The initial temperature T<sub>or</sub> can 'I know! lü 'average, medium or average of any layer of dust. The dust layer can be exposed to an energy source that can raise the temperature of at least a portion of the dust up to T<sub>2</sub>. In some cases, T<sub>2</sub> it can be a temperature greater than or equal to the transformation temperature of the powder material. The temperature T<sub>2</sub> it can be the maximum temperature in a layer of dust. The energy can be extracted from the dust layer, for example, by a cooling member (for example, the heat sink), so that the dust layer is cooled down to a temperature T<sub>3</sub>. The processes of providing a powder coating, heating a powder coating to temperature T<sub>2</sub> and cool the powder layer to a temperature T<sub>3</sub> they can be repeated n times, where n can be an integer greater than or equal to 1. Repeating these processes can generate a collection of adjacent powder layers (eg, the stacked powder layers) from one layer to the nth layer. The repetition of these processes n times can occur during a time interval from the initial instant t to a later instant t<sub>n</sub>. An additional powder layer, the n + 1 powder layer, can be provided adjacent to the nth powder layer (for
406
Τ Λ9 'Μ »_____ example, above). The n + 1 layer of powder.
INDUSTRIAL in the chamber. The n + 1 layer of powder can be provided at an initial temperature T<sub>or</sub>. The initial temperature T<sub>or</sub> This can be the minimum temperature of any dust layer in the dust layer collection from number one (i.e. the first dust layer) to n + 1. The n + 1 layer of powder can be exposed to the energy source that can raise the temperature of at least a portion of the number n + 1 powder layer to T<sub>2</sub>. In some cases, T<sub>2</sub>, it can be a temperature greater than or equal to the transformation temperature of the powder material.
The temperature T<sub>2</sub> It can be the maximum temperature in a dust layer in the collection of dust layers from the first layer to the n + 1 layer. Energy can be extracted from the n + 1 layer of dust, for example, by a heat sink, so that the n + 1 layer of dust is cooled down to a temperature T<sub>3</sub>. The energy extraction from the n + 1 layer of dust can be finished in an instant t<sub>n</sub>+ i. A time-average temperature of at least a portion of a single dust layer, a group of dust layers, or all dust layers in the collection (for example, layers one through n + 1) can be considered for the time interval of t<sub>n</sub> a tn + i. The temperature T<sub>2</sub> can be the maximum temperature in layer n + 1 in the time interval of t<sub>n</sub> at<sub>n +</sub>i. The
407
MEXICAN INSTITUTE VV--.
PE LA TKOPIEOAO Ctj _? 'temperature T<sub>or</sub> can be the minimum temperature of the layers in the time interval tteTn ..... 4 Τ? η + ίi'La- temperature T<sub>or</sub> can be the mean, average or median temperature of any of the layers in the time interval of t<sub>n</sub> at<sub>n</sub>+ i. The temperature Τχ can be the time-average temperature of any point or group of points in at least a subset of the layers in the time interval of t<sub>n</sub> at<sub>n</sub>+ i. In some cases, the temperature Ti can be higher than To by a factor K<sub>T2</sub>or times (T<sub>2</sub>-To). The K factor<sub>T2</sub>or it can have a value of at least about 0.01, 0.03,
0.05, 0.07, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, or 0.9. The K factor<sub>T20</sub> can have a maximum value of about 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, 0.1,
0.07, 0.05, 0.03, or 0.01. The K factor<sub>T2</sub>or it can have a value between any of the values mentioned above.
For example, K<sub>T20</sub> can have a value from about 0.01 to about 0.9, from about 0.1 to
0.5, from about 0.01 to
0.2 or about 0.1 to about 0.9. In some cases, the temperature Ti may be greater than To by no more than about 0.2 times (T<sub>2</sub>-T<sub>0</sub>). In some cases, the temperature Ti may be approximately greater than T<sub>or</sub> by no more than about 0.1 times (T<sub>2</sub>-T<sub>or</sub>). On
408
<img file="MX355451B_D0168.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0169.tif" />
MC Institute: In some cases, the temperature Ti may be higher than about 0.05 times (T<sub>2</sub>-T<sub>0</sub>). ξ.Ώ, ^ aj ^ gunos ^ nasos, the temperature Ti may be greater than T<sub>or</sub> in no more than about 0.01 times (T<sub>2</sub>-T<sub>0</sub>) .
In one example, at least one layer comprising the powdered material may be provided adjacent the base, the substrate, or the bottom of the enclosure (eg, on top). An additional layer of powder can be provided adjacent to at least the single layer (eg on top) in an instant ti. At least a portion of the additional layer can be transformed by supplying the energy to at least a portion of the additional layer. At least a fraction of the supplied energy can be extracted from the additional layer so that the extraction of the energy is completed in an instant t<sub>2</sub>. The instant t<sub>2</sub> it may be an instant greater than you (for example, later). In a time interval from ti to<sub>2 </sub>the maximum temperature in the additional layer can be the temperature (T<sub>2</sub>). The minimum temperature in any of the layers can be the temperature (T<sub>or</sub>). T<sub>2</sub> may be greater than
T<sub>or</sub>. The highest time-average temperature at any point in the layers can be the temperature (Ti).
In some cases, the temperature Τχ may be greater than T<sub>or</sub> on
K<sub>T2</sub>or times (T<sub>2</sub>-T<sub>0</sub>) .
409
The primary source of energy and the source'- co:
£ a. from.
Busrrruro ιξχμ »energy can provide energy to base,„ and / or .. to a layer of dust with a variable power per unit area.
Power per unit area can refer to the amount of energy delivered to an area (eg, power per unit area per time). In some cases, the primary source of energy can provide the energy with a first power per unit area (Pi). The supplemental power source can provide power with a
<td>second power by</td><td colspan="2">area unit</td><td colspan="3">(P<sub>2</sub>). The first power</td>
<td>per unit area</td><td>(Pi) can</td><td>to be</td><td>taller than</td><td>the</td><td>second</td>
<td>power per unit</td><td>area</td><td>(P<sub>2</sub>) ·</td><td>For example,</td><td>the</td><td>second</td>
power per unit area (P<sub>2</sub>) can have a value of at least 0.01 * P<sub>x</sub>, 0.02 * P<sub>x</sub>, 0.03 * P<sub>x</sub>, 0.04 * Pi, 0.05 * Pi, 0.06 * P<sub>x</sub>,
<td>0.07 * P<sub>x</sub>,</td><td>0.08 * Ρ<sub>1λ</sub></td><td>0.09 * Pi, 0.1 * Pi,</td><td>0.2 * Pi,</td><td>O.3 * P1, 0.4 * P<sub>lz</sub></td>
<td>0.5 * P<sub>X</sub>,</td><td>0.6 * Pi, 0.7</td><td>* Pi, 0.8 * Pi or 0.</td><td>9 * Pi. The</td><td>second power</td>
<td colspan="2">per unit area</td><td colspan="3">(P<sub>2</sub>) can have a maximum value of</td>
<td>0.01 * Pi,</td><td>0.02 * Pi, 0</td><td>.03 * Pi, 0.04 * Pi,</td><td>0.05 * Pi,</td><td>0.06 * Ρι, 0.07 * Ρ<sub>1λ</sub></td>
<td>0.08 * Pi,</td><td>0.09 * Pi,</td><td>0.1 * Pi, 0.2 * Pi,</td><td>0.3 * Pi,</td><td>0.4 * P !, 0.5 * Pi,</td>
<td>0.6 * P<sub>lz</sub></td><td>O.7 * P1, 0.8</td><td>* Ρι or 0.9 * Ρχ. On</td><td>Some</td><td>cases, the second</td>
Power per unit area (P2) can be between any of the listed values. For example, the second power per unit area (P<sub>2</sub>) can be about 0.01 * Ρχ to
410
<td>approximately</td><td>0.9 * P<sub>lz</sub></td><td>from</td><td>approximatemeítÁ '· * · tNSTlTUTO MEXICANO f -</td><td></td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.9 * Pi,</td><td>from</td><td>OF THE V INCUSTSIAL PECPITY about 0.01 * P<sub>x</sub></td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.4 * Pi or</td><td>from</td><td>approximately Ó.Í * P<sub>X</sub></td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td>0.8 * P<sub>x</sub>. The</td><td colspan="2">first power per unit</td><td>from</td>
<td>area (P<sub>x</sub>) can</td><td colspan="2">be selected from</td><td>way to serving</td><td>from</td>
the dust layer that is supplied with energy from the primary energy source is less than or equal to about 1%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% or 50% of the total surface area of the dust layer.
Power per unit area can be controlled by varying any combination of the area over which the power is delivered, the intensity of the power delivered, and the time for which the power is delivered. Providing the energy for a longer period of time will cause the energy to penetrate deeper into the dust bed which can result in an increase in temperature in deeper dust layers (i.e. dust layers deposited earlier) . The power per unit area of the primary energy source (P<sub>x</sub>) and the complementary source of energy (P<sub>2</sub>) can be varied so that the energy per unit area (for example, the amount of energy per unit area) supplied to the powder bed by the primary and supplementary energy sources is
411
<img file="MX355451B_D0170.tif" />
(ΕΚΓΠ'ΪΤΤ? * MSZJCV-íO '* £ · -substantially similar. Figure 5 represents volumes of the dust bed 501 that can be fixed ... · its temperature from the primary and complementary sources of energy. The primary source of energy It can deliver a high intensity energy beam to a relatively small area of the powder bed for a period of time on the order of about 1 ps or less. As a result, a small volume 502 (eg, area and depth) of the powder bed may experience a sufficient temperature rise to transform the portion of the powder bed that is exposed to the primary source of energy. Dust adjacent to the portion of the dust bed that is exposed to the primary source of energy may not be transformed. In contrast, the supplemental energy source can deliver an energy beam with a lower intensity than the primary energy beam to a relatively larger area for a relatively longer period of time. As a result, the area exposed to the supplemental energy beam may experience a lower increase in temperature than the area exposed to the primary energy beam. The area exposed to the complementary energy beam may experience an increase in temperature to a temperature below the transformation temperature so that the area exposed
412 and 33
The Mexican Bernvro to the complementary energy beam did not transfer the area exposed to the nuclear energy beam ... piwda ,, ...
experience a temperature rise deeper within the powder bed (eg, over a larger volume, 503).
In some cases, the powers per unit area of the primary source of energy and of the supplementary source of energy may be adjusted non-uniformly by the portion of the dust layer and by the rest of the dust layer respectively. The powers per unit area can be adjusted non-uniformly to lessen the influence of blemishes. For example, a region with better heat transfer, eg an edge of the powder bed may lose heat more rapidly than an area of the powder bed towards the center. To compensate for such imperfection the primary and / or supplementary energy source can provide slightly more power per unit area to the edges compared to the center of the powder bed. The temperature of the powder bed can be continuously monitored through the use of at least one temperature sensor and the power per unit area of the primary and / or supplementary energy source can
413
<img file="MX355451B_D0171.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0172.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO '* i V 1 Ι'ΤβΛΙ ^ ΑΡ<sup>1</sup>'J l
OF THE PROPERTY i. <sub>or</sub>._.· ·,,<?
modulated in real time to correct for g
INDUSTRIAL k-Tl— temperature gradients and / or non-uniformities.
Primary and supplemental energy sources can heat the dust layer at virtually the same time. The
Figure 6 represents an example of a timeline that can be implemented to form an object layer
3D. From an initial instant to the primary source of energy and the supplementary source of energy can begin to heat the powder bed. The primary source of energy can heat the surface of the powder for a finite period of time (for example, for a few microseconds
601). After the primary power source has finished heating the powder bed can be turned off. Concurrently the supplemental energy source can heat the remainder of the first layer and / or a side portion of the base 602. The supplemental power source can heat the remainder of the first layer and / or a side portion of the base for one second time period (for example, a time period of 10-60 milliseconds). Once the two primary and complementary sources of energy have finished heating the powder bed, the powder bed 603 can be cooled. Layer formation including heating and cooling of the powder layer can take up to approximately 30 seconds. . The
414 portion of the powder bed heated by pK & feííí ^ dí
INDUSTRIAL power and the portion of the powder bed heated by the supplemental power source can be cooled at virtually the same rate. Cooling both portions of the powder bed at the same rate can decrease thermal stresses so that the three-dimensional part formed by transforming (e.g. melting) and cooling the portion of the powder bed does not move or deform (e.g. , does not warp) during the cooling process. Cooling both portions of the powder bed at virtually the same speed can decrease or eliminate the need for auxiliary support elements that hold the 3D object in place during the printing process. The primary and / or complementary energy beams can have variable intensity and / or variable beam size and beam geometries.
At least a portion of the powder layer (eg, the first powder layer) can be heated by the primary source of energy. The portion of the powder layer can be heated to a temperature that is greater than or equal to a temperature where at least part of the powder material is transformed into a liquid state (referred to in the present description as the liquefaction temperature) at a pressure
415
IMPI
<img file="MX355451B_D0173.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO BE LA PROriíDA »dada. The liquefaction temperature can be iij'ÜPSH '^ at liquidus temperature where all matemai' éLTá "¿? Ϊ *" liquid state at a given pressure. The temperature of liquefaction of the powder material may be the temperature at which, or above which, at least part of the powder material passes from a solid to a liquid phase at a given pressure. The remainder of the dust layer can be heated by the supplemental power source. The remainder of the powder layer can be at a temperature that is lower than the liquefaction temperature. The maximum temperature of the transformed portion of the powder and the temperature of the rest of the powder may be different. The solidus temperature of the powder material can be a temperature where the powder material is in a solid state at a given pressure. After heating the portion of the first layer to a temperature that is greater than or equal to a liquefaction temperature of the powder material by the primary energy source, the portion of the first layer is cooled to allow the portion of the transformed powder to cool. harden (eg, solidify). Once the portion of the first layer is cured, a subsequent powder layer (eg, second) may be provided adjacent to the first powder layer (eg, on top). The portion of the first layer
416
IMPÍCB
MEXICAN INSTITUTE '- _ -<sup>1</sup>
DBLA * T.Of'SDAD i - · can harden during cooling both transformed and from the remaining powder of the pw ^ rmeTra ^ 'layer ^ in · -the' powder bed. In some cases, the liquefaction temperature can be at least about 100'C, 200'C, 300'C,
400 ”C or 500 C and the solidus temperature can be maximum 500 'C, 400' C, 300 'C, 200' C or 100 'C. For example, the liquefaction temperature is at least about 300 ° C and the solidus temperature is at most about
300 'C. As another example, the liquefaction temperature is at least about 400'C and the solidus temperature is at most about 400'C. The liquefaction temperature can be different from the solidus temperature.
In some cases, the temperature of the powdered material is kept above the solidus temperature of the material and below its liquefaction temperature. In some cases, the material of which the powdered material is composed has a supercooling temperature (or supercooling rate temperature). When the power source heats the powder material to cause at least part of the powder material to melt, the molten material will remain molten as long as the powder bed is maintained at or above the supercooling temperature of the material, but above below its melting point. When two or
417 "OR. -J- V Ji, .ik .Ju \ \
JEaSTlTUTO MKXíCAHG t, * - I
D £ THE PROPERTY. V.
industrial r. * more materials make up the powder bed in a specific ratio, the materials can form a eutectic material at the time of transforming (for example, fusing, sintering, melting, joining or connecting) the powder material. The temperature of liquefaction of the eutectic material formed can be the temperature at the eutectic point, near the eutectic point, or far from the eutectic point. Near the eutectic point a temperature that is different from the eutectic temperature (i.e. the temperature at the eutectic point) can be designated by at most about 0.1 ° C, 0.5 ° C, 1 ° C, 2 ° C, 4 ° C, 5 ° C, 6 ° C, 8 ° C, 10 ° C or 15 ° C. A temperature further from the eutectic point than the temperature near the eutectic point is referred to herein as a temperature away from the eutectic point. The process of transforming (eg liquefying) and hardening (eg solidifying) a portion of the first layer can be repeated until all the layers of a 3D object are formed. At the time of completion of the formation process, the generated 3D object can be removed from the powder bed. The remaining powder can be separated from the portion at the completion of the process. The 3D object can be solidified and removed from the container that houses the powder bed.
418
LF Jí - · -> /.
A 3D object can be formed from a lechowSer ^ uoi '^^ AlÉiU.' · Dust can comprise particles of a ΈΐϋLtír ± wt- ~ € tue,<sub>s</sub>.it is. ..the. material of the desired composition of the 3D object. The powder bed may comprise a mixture of materials which after transformation will comprise the material which is the material of the desired composition of the 3D object. A layer of the powder material may be provided adjacent to a base (or to a substrate, to the bottom of the enclosure or to the bottom of the container that houses the powder bed) or to another layer of the powder material. The powder can be confined in a container (referred to herein as a powder bed). In some cases, the powder bed can be isolated, actively cooled, actively heated, or kept at a constant temperature through the use of a temperature regulating unit (eg a heater or refrigerator). At least part of the temperature regulating unit can be incorporated into the walls of the powder bed. The 3D object can be formed by successively adding layers of the material in a predetermined pattern. A first layer can be formed by transforming a portion of a first powder layer without transforming a remainder of the first powder layer. Sometimes the first layer of dust deposited is left without
419
<img file="MX355451B_D0174.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0175.tif" />
transform and transformation occurs afterwards deposited powder. A primary source of energy can propagate (eg, by scanning) along the surface of at least a portion of the first powder layer in a predetermined pattern. The portion of the first layer of dust that interacts with (eg, swept away by) the primary energy source may experience an increase in temperature. Increasing the temperature can transform the material to create a transformed material that subsequently hardens (eg, solidifies) from at least a portion of the powder layer (eg, the first powder layer). The sweep speed of the primary power source can be at least about 0.01mm / s, 0.1mm / s, 1mm / s, 5mm / s,
10 mm / s, 15 mm / s, 20 mm / s, 25 mm / s or 50 mm / s. The sweep speed of the primary power source can be at most about 0.01mm / s, 0.1mm / s, 1mm / s, 5mm / s, 10mm / s, 15mm / s, 20mm / s , 25 mm / s or 50 mm / s. The sweep speed of the primary power source can be any value from the values mentioned above (for example, from about 0.01 mm / s to about 50 mm / s, from about 0.01 mm / s to
420
<img file="MX355451B_D0176.tif" />
about 20mm / s
INDUSTRIAL VY-river from about 15 mm / s to about 50 mm / s).
A supplemental power source can provide the power to heat a remnant of the first layer of powder. The remainder can be an area on the surface of the first dust layer that is adjacent to the portion of the first dust layer that is swept up by the primary source of energy.
The remainder can be heated to a temperature below the transformation temperature so that the remaining powder is not transformed (eg, it does not melt). The remaining powder can remain in a solid state throughout the formation of the 3D object. The microstructure and / or the grain structure of the remaining powder can remain practically unchanged throughout the formation of the object.
3D, compared to the deposited powder material.
"Virtually unchanged" refers to the absence of phase change and to a change in grain size or microstructure size of at most about 20%, 10%, 5%, 1% or less.
After applying the primary and supplemental sources of energy to the portion of the first powder layer and the remainder of the first powder layer, respectively, the first powder layer can be cooled. The transformed portion of the
421
<img file="MX355451B_D0177.tif" />
ηυτο ¿c V first layers of powder can harden solidify) while the first layer of powder cools.
The portion and the remaining powder can be cooled at practically the same speed. After cooling the powder layer, a subsequent powder layer (e.g. second) may be provided adjacent to the first powder layer (e.g. on top) and the process can be repeated until all layers (e.g. cross sections) of the 3D object are formed in such a way that the complete 3D object is generated. Figure 7 summarizes a printing process as described in the present description. A first layer of dust can be irradiated by a primary source of energy
701. The first layer can be irradiated by a complementary source of energy 702; the irradiation by the supplementary energy source may be before or after the irradiation by the primary energy source or simultaneously with it. In some cases, the supplemental energy source is not used to irradiate the first or subsequent layers. The first layer of powder can then be cooled 703. The first powder layer can be uniformly cooled so that the temperature gradients are smooth or substantially not present in the powder bed. In some cases, portions of the
422 bed of dust that was transformed by the fire »^ PR ^ S ^^ a ^ Ía ^ é ^<sub>F</sub>Energy may solidify during operation of • em i uu iHimMwMijiwi mnv. . <v. . '. t ·. , cooling 703. After cooling, a subsequent (eg, second) powder layer can be provided adjacent to the first layer 704. The process can be repeated with irradiation of the subsequent powder layer until the 3D object is formed.
The 3D object can be formed without one or more auxiliary elements and / or without touching a base. The single or more auxiliary elements (which may include a base support) can be used to support or confine the 3D object during formation. In some cases, the auxiliary elements can be used to fix or support a 3D object or a portion of a 3D object in a bed of powder. The one or more auxiliary elements can be specific to one part and can increase the time required to form the 3D object. The one or more auxiliary elements can be removed before use or distribution of the 3D object. The longest dimension of a cross section of an auxiliary element can be a maximum of about 50 nm, 100 nm, 200 nm, 300 nm,
400 nm, 500 nm, 600 nm, 700 nm, 800 nm, 900 nm or 1,000 nm, 1 μιη, 3 μπι, 10 μπι, 20 μπι, 30 μπι, 100 μπι, 200 μπι, 300 μπι, 400 μπι, 500 μπι, 700 μπι, 1mm, 3mm, 5mm, 10mm, 20mm, 30mm,
423
<img file="MX355451B_D0178.tif" />
mm, 100 mm or 300 mm.
cross section of a
INSTITUTE MKXIC YEAR J '' ·. '.' / ·
The longest dimension & t auxiliary element ptrede
<td>less than about 50 nm,</td><td> 100</td><td>nm,</td><td> 200</td><td>nm, 300 nm,</td><td> 400</td>
<td>nm, 500 nm, 600 nm, 700 nm, 800</td><td>nm,</td><td> 900</td><td>nm or</td><td>1,000 nm, 1</td><td>μπι,</td>
<td>3 μιη, 10 μιη, 20 μιη, 30 μιη, 100</td><td>μπι,</td><td> 200</td><td>μπι,</td><td>300 μπι, 4 00</td><td>μπι,</td>
<td>500 μπι, 700 μπι, 1 mm, 3 mm, 5</td><td>mm,</td><td colspan="3">10mm, 20mm, 30mm,</td><td> 50</td>
mm, 100 mm or 300 mm. The longest dimension of a cross section of an auxiliary element can be any value between the values mentioned above (for example, of
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>nm</td><td>to approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 5</td><td>μπι</td><td>to approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>mm,</td><td>from</td>
<td>approximately approximately</td><td>fifty 5 mm</td><td colspan="2">nm at approximately at about 300 mm)</td><td> 10</td><td>mm or</td><td>from</td>
Without wishing to be bound by theory, the rate of cooling of the powder bed surrounding the solidifying part can affect the thermal stresses within that solidifying part. In the methods and systems provided in the present disclosure, the powder bed is cooled at substantially the same rate so that the temperature gradients in the powder bed are substantially flat. The plane temperature gradients provided by the systems and methods herein
424
Λ r λ 7
INSTITUTO MEXICANO Vb - <í-—<sup>J</sup> FROM THE PROBAD description can they at least reduce (e.g. ^ eliminateTT ^ the thermal stresses on the part that is solidifying and thus can at least reduce the thermal stresses on the object?
3D formed. As a result of the reduction of thermal stresses on the 3D object during formation, the 3D object can be formed without auxiliary elements. Eliminating the need for ancillaries can decrease the time and cost associated with generating the three-dimensional part. In some examples, the 3D object can be formed with auxiliary elements. In some examples, the 3D object can be formed in contact with the container that houses the powder bed.
The methods and systems provided in the present description can result in the rapid and efficient formation of 3D objects. In some cases, the 3D object can be transported within a maximum of about 120 min,
100 min, 80 min, 60 min, 40 min, 30 min, 20 min, 10 min or 5 min after the last layer of the object has hardened (eg solidified). In some cases, the 3D object can be transported within at least about 120 min, 100 min, 80 min, 60 min, 40 min, 30 min, 20 min, 10 min, or 5 min after the last layer of the object has hardened. In some cases, the 3D object can be transported within any time between the values mentioned above (for
425 ix
0,0?
A xvl _.l xi i
INSTITUTO MEXICANO \ 7 --- example, from approximately 5 min to approximate ^ éfi $ éj ^ | $ g Í2 ^ ¿jníhi approximately 5 approximately 5 of approximately 5 min to approximate J3afirit ^ x. ^ Q_-Biici<sub>i</sub>^<sub>s</sub>p. from about 60 min to about 120 min). The object
3D can be transported once it cools down to a maximum temperature of approximately 100'C, 90'C, 80'C, 70'C, 60'C, 50'C, 40'C, 30'C, 25'C , 20 'C, 15' C, 'C or 5' C. The 3D object can be transported once it cools down to a temperature value between the temperature values mentioned above (for example, from 'C to about 100' C, from 'C to about 40' C, or from about 15 ' C at approximately 40 'C. Transporting the 3D object may comprise packing and / or labeling the object
3D. In some cases, the 3D object may be transported directly to a consumer, government entity, organization, business, hospital, doctor, engineer, retailer, or any other entity or individual interested in receiving the object.
The system may comprise a control mechanism (for example, a controller) comprising a computer processing unit (for example, a computer) coupled to the primary (first) energy source and optionally to a complementary (for example, the second).
426
<img file="MX355451B_D0179.tif" />
The computer can be operatively coupled with primary and optionally supplementary energy through a wired or wireless connection. In some cases, the computer may be on the board of a user device. A user device can be a laptop, desktop computer, tablet, smartphone, or other computing device. The controller can be in communication with a cloud computing system or with a server. The controller can be programmed to selectively direct a first power source to apply power to the portion of the dust layer at a power per unit area (Pi). The controller may be in communication with the scanner configured to articulate the first power source to apply power to the portion of the dust layer at a power per unit area (P<sub>x</sub>). The controller may further be programmed to selectively direct (for example, to articulate) the second power source to apply power to at least a portion of the remainder of the shell and / or the side portion of the base at a second power per unit area (P<sub>2</sub>) The controller can be operably connected to the scanner configured to articulate the first power source to apply
427
IMPI
<img file="MX355451B_D0180.tif" />
or
INSTITUTO MEXICANO energy to the portion of the dust layer ¿P<sup>AND</sup>hi ^ n $ £> t unit area (P<sub>2</sub>). The controladcu:. ^ Xpnry, ^^ e ^ mpJ-o.<sub>r</sub>«..-<sub>;</sub>The computer) can be programmed to direct the first power source and the second power source to apply power virtually simultaneously.
In some cases, the system may comprise a controller (eg computer) coupled to a power source. The controller can be programmed to transform or heat a portion of a powder layer with the power source so that the portion reaches a maximum temperature T<sub>2</sub>. The temperature T<sub>2</sub> may be higher than an initial powder layer temperature T<sub>or</sub>. The controller can also be configured to facilitate the cooling of the powder layer to the average temperature Ti in a period of time that is maximum approximately 1 day, hours, 6 hours, 3 hours, 2 hours, 1 hour, 30 minutes. , 15 minutes, 5 minutes, 240 second (s), 220 s, 200 s, 180 s,
160 s, 140 s, 120 s, 100 s, 80 s, 60 s, 40 s, 20 s, 10 s, 9 s, 8 s, 7 s, 6 s, 5 s, 4 s, 3 s, 2 s or 1 s, to form a hardened material that is at least a portion of the object
3D. In some cases, Ti is not greater than T<sub>or</sub> in about
0.2 times (T<sub>2</sub>-Ti). In some cases, Ti may not be greater than
T<sub>or</sub> at most about 0.1 times (T<sub>2</sub>- T<sub>or</sub>). In βχ «.« ¿¿«Aea,.<sub>Λ</sub>
428 ? ; T TT K. lvl H feí> Ty «Nfmvro MEXICANO '·.<sub>m</sub> , DS THE PROPERTY Vi. ·· '·' · 'some cases, T<sub>x</sub> may not be greater than T<sub>or</sub> c © ^ Tw »aj? sa & £ 2en about 0.2 times (T<sub>2</sub>- T<sub>or</sub>). Something? '' Bring us / “^ Ty ^ -may not be greater than T<sub>or</sub> at most about K<sub>T20</sub> times (T<sub>2</sub>- T<sub>or</sub>).
The scanner can be included in an optical system that is configured to direct the energy from the first energy source to a predetermined position in the powder layer. The controller can be programmed to control a path of the first and / or second power source with the help of the optical system. The control system can regulate the supply of the energy from the power source to a layer of dust to form a 3D object or a portion of it.
The controller (for example, the computer that has one or more compute processors) may be in network communication with a remote computer system that supplies instructions to the computer system to generate the object.
3D. The controller can be in network communication with the remote computer through a wired or wireless connection. The remote computer can be a laptop, desktop, smartphone, tablet, or other computing device. The remote computer may comprise a user interface through which
429 . · Mexican institute tkhí - ”'a user can enter the íhstriffc ^ JJgffiÉg® tAb JLbs design parameters for the 3Π-T object. The instructions can be a set of values or parameters that describe the dimensions and shape of the 3D object. Instructions can be provided through a file having a Standard Tessellation Language file format. In one example, the instructions can come from a 3D modeling program (e.g. AutoCAD, SolidWorks, Google
SketchUp or SolidEdge). In some cases, the model can be generated from a provided sketch, image, or 3D object. The remote computer system can supply the design instruction to the computer processor. The controller can direct the first and optionally the second power source in response to instructions received from the remote computer. The controller can be further programmed to optimize a path of travel (eg, a vector) of applied energy from the first and / or second energy source to a portion or remainder of the dust layer, respectively.
Optimizing the energy application path may include minimizing the time required to heat the powder, minimizing the time required to cool the powder, minimizing the time required to sweep the area that should be
430
Hee .1 Ai .i Λ '
...., .... , Mexican institute receive energy or minimize energy source (s) of energy. .
In some cases, the controller can be programmed to calculate the first power per unit area (Pi) and the second power per unit area (P<sub>2</sub>) necessary to be provided to the powder coat to achieve the desired result. The controller can be programmed to determine how long a power source must impinge on an area of a certain size to provide the required first or second power density. In some cases, the desired result may be to provide uniform energy per unit area within the powder bed. Additionally, the desired result may be to transform a portion of the layer of the powder bed with the primary source of energy in the first power per unit area (Pi) and not transform the rest of the layer with the complementary source of energy to the second power per unit area (P<sub>2</sub>). The controller can be programmed to optimize the energy application of the first and / or second energy sources. Optimizing the application of energy may include minimizing the time required to heat the powder, minimizing the time required to cool the powder, minimizing the energy emitted.
431 by the energy source (s)
<img file="MX355451B_D0181.tif" />
Ρ1Γ
LA FROFíi-DAD V? Ft- _ 'INDUSTRIAL -ft-' · combinations.
The system may further comprise a cooling member (eg, the heat sink) configured to cool, heat, or stabilize the temperature of the portion of the transformed powder layer and / or at least a portion of the remainder of the layer. of dust. The cooling member may be configured to cool, heat, or stabilize (eg, balance) the temperature of the portion of the powder layer and at least the only portion of the remainder of the powder layer at substantially the same rate.
The cooling member can cool, heat or stabilize the temperature of the portion of the powder layer and / or at least a portion of the remainder of the powder layer by initiating heat transfer from the powder to the cooling member. For example, the cooling member can be configured to extract energy at a rate greater than or equal to about Ρχ. The cooling member can be maintained at a temperature that is substantially lower than the temperature of the powder bed. Heat can be transferred from the powder material to the cooling member by any one or a combination of heat transfer modes that
432
<img file="MX355451B_D0182.tif" />
ΊΡ> ¡Λ _ —L * χΐ '. - - 'X'
-,. , </. . MEXICAN INSTITUTE. _r τ'- '; .i.
include conduction, natural convection, conv ^ s ^ g ^ g ^ c ^ íz-sdqj o 'radiation. The cooling member may comprise a material that efficiently conducts heat. For example, the cooling member can comprise a liquid (eg, water). The liquid can circulate in the cooling member within channels in or on the cooling member. The heat (thermal) conductivity of the cooling member can be at least about 20
<td>Watts</td><td>for</td><td>meters degrees Kelvin</td><td>(W / mK)</td><td> , 50</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 100</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 150</td>
<td>W / mK,</td><td> 200</td><td>W / mK, 205 W / mK, 300</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 350</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 400</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 450</td>
<td>W / mK,</td><td> 500</td><td>W / mK, 550 W / mK, 600</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 700</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 800</td><td>W / mK,</td><td> 900</td>
W / mK or 1,000 W / mK. The thermal conductivity of the cooling member can have any value between the aforementioned thermal conductivity values (for example, from about 20 W / mK to about 1,000 W / mK, from about 20 W / mK to about 500 W / mK or from about 500 W / mK to about 1,000 W / mK). The aforementioned thermal conductivity can be at a temperature greater than or equal to about 100 ° C, 200 ° C, 300 ° C, 400 ° C, 500 ° C, or 800 ° C. The cooling member can be separated from the powder bed or the powder layer by a separation. The gap can have a variable or adjustable distance. Alternatively, the member of
433
WICKED
<img file="MX355451B_D0183.tif" />
ΒίΓιΊΤΙΠΌ MEXICAN
J- · ·. J. Ί η 1., T BE THE COOLING PROPERTY can touch the powder bed OíNoiXaiALC powder. In some cases, the member of;
alternatively and sequentially, contact the dust layer. The gap can be filled with a gas. The gas can be selected to achieve a specific heat transfer property between the powder and the cooling member. For example, a gas with high thermal conductivity can be selected to increase the rate of thermal transfer by conduction from the powder to the plate. The gas between the plate and the dust layer can comprise argon, nitrogen, helium, neon, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, or oxygen.
The gas can be air. The gas can be any gas mentioned in the present description. In some cases, the system can be stored and operated in a vacuum chamber in which case there will be at most a thin layer (eg compared to the ambient atmosphere) between the plate and the dust layer. The distance between the cooling member and the powder layer can influence the heat transfer between the cooling member and the powder layer. The vertical separation distance from the exposed surface of the powder bed can be at least about 50 pm, 100 pm, 250 pm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3
434 <sup>1</sup> r 13 'AA
INSTITUTE MTXXAUO V <'.....
mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10.30mm, mm, 50mm, 60mm, 70mm, 80mm, 90mm or 100mm. The vertical separation distance from the exposed surface of the powder bed can be at most about pm, 100 pm, 250 pm, 0.5mm, 1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 4mm, 5mm, mm, 7mm, 8mm, 9mm, 10mm, 20mm, 30mm, 40mm, 50mm, 60mm, 70mm, 80mm, 90mm or 100mm. The vertical separation distance from the exposed surface of the powder bed can have any value between the values mentioned above (for example, from about 50 µm to about 100 mm, from about 50 µm to about 60 mm or from about 40 mm to about 100 mm). In some cases, there is no gap (that is, the gap is zero). In some cases, the gap can be adjusted. The cross section of the gap can be controlled by a control system (eg a computer). The gap can have a substantially uniform dimension throughout the cooling member * or throughout the powder bed. In some cases, the separation distance may vary throughout the powder bed. In some cases, the gap can be adjusted so that the plate is in contact with the powder bed (eg, the exposed surface of the powder bed).
- ·? * -V
435
<img file="MX355451B_D0184.tif" />
¿I. .'i (χ
Ββπτυτο Mexican <sup>7</sup>' /
A cooling mechanism can be used to move flexiblen? ÉHt ^ s $ ^ ifctjgmbj-p '' cooling in contact and out of pg-tg r-nn. 1 echp .., of powder. The mechanism can be controlled electronically or manually (eg by the controller). In one example, the mechanism can be a set of curved leaf springs, flexible needle springs, a set of laminating cylinders. The contact pressure between the cooling member (eg, the plate) and the powder bed can be adjusted electronically or manually.
In some cases, a gas bearing assisted cooling process can be used to increase the cooling rate of the powder. In this embodiment, a flat air bearing can be created by using a set of openings in the cooling plate that face the powder bed. The pressurized gas can be injected from one set of openings into the gap and can exit the gap through a second set of openings. The gas bearing can induce forced convection and thus increase the rate of heat transfer of heat from the powder bed. In another example, thermoacoustic heat extraction can be used to increase the cooling rate of the powder bed.
436 ivxrjn>
Mexican INSTITUTE V- ·· - OF PROPERTY
The cooling member may comprise, acloSd #, 'firte -' ^ or
- 'M • -j /
Γ <
more holes or openings. In some cases, at least 5%, 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, or 70% of the surface area of the cooling member may be an opening or hole. The holes or openings can be configured to allow access of the first and optional second power sources to the powder layer. In some cases, the cooling member can be substantially transparent. The cooling member can be adapted to be selectively located between the powder bed (or the container that houses the powder bed) and the first and optionally the second energy sources. In some cases, a scanner may relocate the cooling member so that the hole (s) are in a location such that the first and optionally second power sources can access the tailor-made powder layer. that sweep away the entire layer of dust. The scanner that controls the movement of the plate can be synchronized with at least the single scanner that allows the articulation of the first and second power sources. The cooling member can controllably track the energy applied to the portion of the powder layer from the first energy source. The movement of the cooling member can be controlled by
437
J jvf »j.¡-,. , ......, the control mechanism (for example,
CE THE PROPERTY <.
INDUSTRIAL controller (eg computer) can be programmed to control the movement of the cooling member. In some cases, the controller can be programmed to optimize energy extraction from the portion and / or remainder of the dust layer. Optimizing the extraction of energy from the portion and / or the remainder of the dust layer may include changing the length or width of the gap, moving the cooling member, initiating a system of convective forces (e.g. a fan) , adjust the gaseous composition or any other process that may influence the variables of time or efficiency. The controller can further be programmed to control (eg, regulate) a base temperature profile separate from a powder layer temperature profile. The controller (e.g. computer) can be further programmed to ensure that the surface regions of the powder bed are covered by solid portions and by open portions (holes) of the cooling member for equal time intervals to maintain the uniform heat transfer. If it is not possible to maintain uniform heat transfer by moving the plate, the supplemental heat source can provide
438 'Mexican institute <sup>F;</sup> ¿ 7-.·<sup>1</sup> / more or less energy to the area that will receive / · rjás “(under the respective cooling member iBABteAr»
One or more of the system components may be contained within the enclosure (eg, the chamber). The enclosure may include a suitable reaction space for introducing the precursor to form a 3D object, such as powdered material. The enclosure can contain the base. In some cases, the enclosure may be a vacuum chamber, a positive pressure chamber, or an ambient pressure chamber. The enclosure may comprise a gaseous atmosphere with controlled pressure, temperature and / or gaseous composition. The gaseous composition in the environment contained by the enclosure can comprise a practically oxygen-free environment. For example, the maximum gaseous composition may contain approximately 100,000 parts per million (ppm), 10,000 ppm,
<td>1,000 ppm,</td><td>500 ppm,</td><td> 400</td><td>ppm, 2 00</td><td>ppm, 100 ppm, 50</td><td>ppm, 10</td>
<td>ppm, 5 ppm,</td><td>, 1 ppm,</td><td> 100,</td><td>000 parts</td><td>per billion (ppb),</td><td> 10,000</td>
<td>ppb, 1,000</td><td>ppb, 500</td><td>PPb,</td><td>400 ppb,</td><td>200 ppb, 100 ppb,</td><td>50 ppb,</td>
<td>10 ppb, 5</td><td>ppb, 1</td><td>PPb,</td><td colspan="2">100,000 parts per trillion</td><td>(ppt),</td>
<td>10,000 ppt,</td><td colspan="3">1,000 ppt, 500 ppt, 400</td><td>ppt, 200 ppt, 100</td><td>ppt, 50</td>
ppt, 10 ppt, 5 ppt, or 1 ppt of oxygen. The gaseous composition in the environment contained within the enclosure can comprise an environment practically free of humidity (for example,
439 . x xH f '{Γ water). The gaseous atmosphere can comrw & eHÍEÍiaiEucAéomp * má ki'fno ¿DE LA PRCi'IÍTY INDUST'AIAL -.
approximately 100,000 ppm, 10,000 ppm, 1,000 ppm, 500 ppm, 400 ppm, 200 ppm, 100 ppm, 50 ppm, 10 ppm, 5 ppm, 1 ppm, 100,000 ppb, 10,000 ppb, 1,000 ppb, 500 ppb, 4 00 ppb, 200 ppb, 100 ppb, 50 ppb, 10 ppb, 5 ppb, 1 ppb, 100,000 ppt, 10,000 ppt, 1,000 ppt, 500 ppt, 400 ppt, 200 ppt, 100 ppt, 50 ppt, 10 ppt, 5 ppt, or 1 ppt of water. The gaseous atmosphere may comprise a gas selected from the group consisting of argon, nitrogen, helium, neon, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, and oxygen. The gaseous atmosphere can comprise air. The pressure in the chamber can be at least about 10<sup>-7</sup> Torr, 10<sup>6 </sup>Torr, IO<sup>-5</sup> Torr, 10<sup>5</sup> Torr, 10<sup>-3</sup> Torr, 10<sup>-2</sup> Torr, 10<sup>_1</sup> Torr, 1 Torr, 10 Torr, 100 Torr, 1 bar, 760 Torr, 1,000 Torr, 1,100
Torr, 2 bar, 3 bar, 4 bar, 5 bar or 10 bar. The pressure in the chamber can be of any value between the values of pressure in the chamber mentioned above (for example, approximately 10 "<sup>7</sup> Torr at about 10 bar, about 10 '<sup>7</sup> Torr to about 1 bar or from about 1 bar to about 10 bar). In some cases, the enclosure pressure may be normal atmospheric pressure.
440
<img file="MX355451B_D0185.tif" />
INSTITUTO MEXICANO p ·; ·.> ..,
Enclosure can be kept under vacuum or low <9<sup>AND</sup>'VOr ^ tm ^ sf siá1 inert, dry, non-reactive and / or with r. η nfa ni dq ,, pr¡ u q. i do, ... ele ..
oxygen (or otherwise controlled) (for example, a nitrogen atmosphere (N<sub>2</sub>), helium (He) or argon (Ar)). In some examples, the enclosure is under vacuum, such as at a pressure that is at most about 1 Torr, IO<sup>-3</sup> Torr, IO<sup>-6</sup> Torr or 10 '<sup>8</sup> Torr. The atmosphere can be provided by providing an inert, dry, non-reactive and / or oxygen-reduced gas (eg, Ar) in the chamber and / or by flowing the gas through it.
In some examples, a pressurized system is in continuous communication with the enclosure. The pressure system can be configured to regulate the pressure in the enclosure. In some examples, the pressure system includes one or more vacuum pumps selected from mechanical pumps, rotary vane pumps, turbomolecular pumps, ion pumps, cryopumps, and diffuser pumps. The single or more vacuum pumps may comprise Rotary Vane Pump, Diaphragm Pump, Liquid Seal Pump, Plunger Pump, Displacement Pump, Screw Pump, Wankel Pump, External Vane Pump, Roots Type Lobe Pump, pump type
Multi-stage roots, Toepler pump or
441 lobes. The only or more moment transfer pump pumps
<img file="MX355451B_D0186.tif" />
, regenerative pump, drag pump, Venturi type vacuum pump or steam ejector.
The pressurized system can include valves, such as throttle valves. The pressure system can include a pressure sensor to measure the chamber pressure and transmit the pressure to the controller, which can regulate the pressure with the aid of one or more vacuum pumps of the pressure system. The pressure sensor can be coupled to a control system. Pressure can be controlled electronically or manually.
In some examples, the pressure system includes one or more pumps. The one or more pumps may comprise a positive displacement pump. The positive displacement pump may comprise rotary positive displacement pump, reciprocating positive displacement pump, or linear positive displacement pump. The positive displacement pump can comprise rotary lobe pump, progressive cavity pump, rotary gear pump, plunger pump, diaphragm pump, screw pump, gear pump, hydraulic pump, rotary vane pump, regenerative pump (peripheral ), peristaltic pump, lift pump or flexible impeller. Rotary pump
442
ΪΜΡΙ ^> 5, positive displacement can comprise pump ^ '¿j ^ r ^ aj.es ,;' screw pump or rotary pump Hg — p ^ ia-t-ag. The reciprocating pump comprises piston pump, diaphragm pump, plunger pumps, displacement pumps or radial piston pump. The pump may comprise valveless pump, steam pump, gravity pump, ejector pump, mixed flow pump, bellows pump, axial flow pumps, radial flow pump, speed pump, hydraulic rod pump, pump Impulse, Impeller Pump, Compressed Air Driven Double Diaphragm Pump, Triple Style Plunger Pump, Piston Pump, Peristaltic Pump, Roots Type Pumps, Progressive Cavity Pump, Screw Pump, or Gear Pump.
The systems and methods presented in the present description can facilitate the formation of custom or serial 3D objects for a customer. A customer can be an individual, a corporation, an organization, a government organization, a non-profit organization, or another organization or entity. A customer can submit a request for 3D object formation. Customer can provide a
<td>article of</td><td>value in exchange</td><td>of</td><td>object</td><td>3D.</td><td>The</td><td>client</td><td>can</td>
<td>provide</td><td>a design for</td><td>the</td><td>object</td><td>3D.</td><td>The</td><td>client</td><td>can</td>
<td>provide</td><td>design</td><td>on</td><td>shape</td><td>from</td><td>a</td><td colspan="2">file of</td>
443 π <
1ι ν>
stereolithography (STL). Alternatively,<sup>I</sup>^ lKt<sup>r</sup>L¿FÍdi ^ 'jeK._pu<sub>;</sub>ed® ''<sup>1 </sup>provide a design where the design can define the dimensions and shape of the 3D object in any other numerical or physical form. In some cases, the customer may provide a three-dimensional model, sketch, or image as the design of an object to be generated. The design can be transformed into instructions usable by the printing system to additively generate the 3D object.
The customer can also provide a request to form the 3D object from a specific material or a group of materials. For example, the customer may specify that the 3D object must be made from one or more than one of the materials used for 3D printing described in the present description. The customer can request a specific material within that material group (for example, a specific simple metal, a specific alloy, a specific ceramic, or a specific allotropic variety of simple carbon). In some cases, the design does not contain auxiliary elements.
In response to the customer's request the 3D object can be formed or generated with the printing system as described in the present description. In some cases, the 3D object can be formed by an additive process of
444 pii
<img file="MX355451B_D0187.tif" />
3d print. Generating in a way comprising depositing and melting comprises one or more additive materials eT ^ oeEí & BS & S ¿jEj - '.' Püé'de β & υίϊΜΛΙ successively a powder that as specified by the
<td>client.</td><td>The</td><td>object</td><td>3D</td><td>can</td><td>surrender later</td><td>to the</td>
<td>client.</td><td>The</td><td>object</td><td>3D</td><td>can</td><td>be formed without generating or</td><td>without</td>
<td>stir</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">elements</td><td colspan="3">auxiliaries. Auxiliary elements</td>
they can be support elements that prevent a 3D object from shifting, warping, or shifting during training. The apparatus, system, and methods provided in the present description can eliminate the need for ancillary items. In some cases, the 3D object may
<td>be additively generated</td><td>in a</td><td>period</td><td>What</td><td>Maximum of</td>
<td>about 7 days,</td><td>6 days,</td><td>5 days, 3</td><td>days,</td><td>2 days, 1</td>
<td>day, 12 hours, 6 hours,</td><td>5 hours,</td><td>4 hours, 3</td><td>hours,</td><td>2 hours, 1</td>
hour, 30 min, 20 min, 10 min, 5 min, 1 min, 30 seconds or 10 seconds. In some cases, the 3D object may be additively generated in a period between any of the time periods mentioned above (for example, from about 10 seconds to about 7 days, from about 10 seconds to about 12 hours, from about 12 hours to about 7 days or about 12 hours to about 10 minutes).
445 / τ
Jl liVJi
The 3D object generates for average of (for example, the customer may have a material
IMt / USTxlAÍ deviation value the desired dimensions maximum of approximately 0.5 microns (pm), 1 pm, 3 pm, 10 pm, 30 pm, 100 pm, 300 pm or less. The deviation can be any value between the values mentioned above. The average deviation can be about 0.5 pm to
<td>approximately</td><td> 300</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 10</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 50</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 85</td><td>p.m,</td><td>from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 5</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 45</td><td>p.m</td><td>or from</td><td>approximately</td><td> 15</td><td>p.m</td><td>to</td>
<td>approximately</td><td> 35</td><td>p.m.</td><td colspan="2">The 3D object can</td><td colspan="2">to have</td><td>a</td>
<td>deviation from</td><td>the</td><td colspan="2">dimensions</td><td>desired in a</td><td colspan="3">direction</td>
specified, according to the formula Dv + L / K<sub>dv</sub>, where Dv is a value of the deviation, L is the length of the 3D object in a specified direction and K<sub>dv</sub> is a constant. Dv can have a maximum value of about 300 pm, 200 pm,
<td colspan="3">100 pm, 50 pm, 4 0 pm, 30 pm,</td>
<td>p.m.</td><td>Dv can have a</td><td>value</td>
<td>p.m,</td><td>1 pm, 3 pm, 5 pm,</td><td>10 pm,</td>
<td>p.m,</td><td>300 pm or less. Dv</td><td>can</td>
0 pm, 10 pm, 5 pm, 1 pm or 0.5 of at least approximately 0.5 pm, 30 pm, 50 pm, 70 pm, 100 have any value between the
446
INSTITUTO MEXICANO lA ^ TXrf ^ ,.
values mentioned above. Dv you can *<sup>w</sup>lf<sup>rip</sup>’’<sup>cnAr</sup>'' - which is from approximately 0.5 pm to approxÁaa <áaíae «fee - ^^ - ^ 0R7- * from * approximately 10 μιτι to approximately 50 μιη, from approximately 15 pm to approximately 85 pm, from approximately 5 pm to approximately 45 pm or from about 15 pm to about 35 pm. K<sub>dv</sub> can have a maximum value of approximately 3,000, 2,500, 2,000,
1,500, 1,000 or 500. K<sub>dv</sub> can have a value of at least previously.
approximately approximately approximately
3,000
1,000 to
500 to about 1,000 to about 1,000 to about 2,500.
roughly roughly
<td>0 or 3,000.</td><td>K<sub>dv</sub></td>
<td colspan="2">• s mentioned</td>
<td>What is it</td><td>from</td>
<td> 500,</td><td>from</td>
<td> 2,500,</td><td>from</td>
<td> 2,000,</td><td>from</td>
<td>3,000 or</td><td>from</td>
<td>start from</td><td>a</td>
<td>the value</td><td>from</td>
<td>training</td><td>without</td>
further processing or handling. Receiving the order for the object, forming the object and delivering the object to the customer may take a maximum of approximately 7 days, 6
447
<img file="MX355451B_D0188.tif" />
hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, 2 hours, 1 hour, 30 min, 20 min, 10 min, 5 min, 1 min, 30 seconds or 10 seconds. In some cases, the 3D object may be additively generated in a period between any of the time periods mentioned above (for example, from about 10 seconds to about 7 days, from about 10 seconds to about 12 hours, from about 12 hours to about 7 days or about 12 hours to about 10 minutes). The time may vary based on the physical characteristics of the object, including the size and / or complexity of the object. Generation of the 3D object can be done without iterative printing and / or without corrective printing. The 3D object may lack ancillary supports or an auxiliary support marking (eg, indicative of the presence or removal of the auxiliary support element).
The present description further provides controllers or control mechanisms (eg, comprising a computer system) that are programmed to implement the methods of the description. Figure 8 schematically represents a computer system 801 that is programmed or configured in any other way to facilitate object formation.
448
JL? Ί'vi AA <·· '<>
3D according to the methods
INDUSTRIAL 'present description. The computer system 801 can regulate various characteristics of the printing methods and systems of the present description, such as, for example, regulating the heating, cooling and / or maintenance of the temperature of a powder bed, the parameters of the process (for example, the pressure in the chamber), the sweep path of the energy source, and / or the application of the amount of energy emitted to a selected location of
<td>a bed</td><td>from</td><td>dust</td><td>by the source</td><td>from</td><td>Energy. The</td><td>system</td><td>from</td>
<td colspan="2">computation 801</td><td>can</td><td>be part of</td><td>a</td><td>system or</td><td>apparatus</td><td>from</td>
<td>Print</td><td>or</td><td colspan="2">be in communication</td><td>with</td><td>the same,</td><td>such as</td><td>a</td>
3D printing system or apparatus of the present disclosure.
The computer can be coupled to one or more sensors connected to various parts of the printing system or apparatus.
3D.
The computer system 801 may include a central processing unit (CPU, also referred to as a processor, computer, and computational processor as used herein) 805, which may be a single or multi-core processor or a plurality of processors for parallel processing. Alternatively or additionally, computer system 801 may include a
449
IMPIAS circuit, such as a specific integrated circuit (ASIC). Computer system 801 further includes memory or memory location 810 (eg, random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory), electronic storage unit 815 (eg, hard disk), communications interface 820 (eg, network adapter) to communicate with one or more other peripheral systems and devices 825, such as cache, other, data storage, and / or electronic display adapters. Memory 810, storage unit 815, interface 820, and peripheral devices 825 are in communication with CPU 805 via a communication bus (solid lines), such as a motherboard. Storage unit 815 may be a data storage unit (or data repository) for storing the data. The 801 computer system can be operatively coupled to a computer network (network)
830 with the help of the 820 communication interface. The network
830 it can be the Internet, an Internet and / or extranet or an intranet and / or extranet that is in communication with the Internet.
Network 830 in some cases is a telecommunications and / or data network. Network 830 may include one or more compute servers, which may enable distributed computing,
450
ΕΜΡΪΟ> »such as cloud computing. Network<sup>NfI</sup>BS®BROPi ^ 5 $ INDUSTRIAL cases with the help of the 801 computer system, you can implement a point-to-point network, which can enable the devices attached to the 801 computer system to behave as a client or a server.
The CPU 805 can execute a sequence of machine-readable instructions, which can be incorporated into a program or software. The instructions can be stored in a memory location, such as memory 810. The instructions can be directed to the CPU 805, and the CPU 805 can be programmed or otherwise configured to implement the methods of the present disclosure. Examples of operations performed by the CPU 805 may include searching, decoding, executing, and responding.
The CPU 805 can be part of a circuit, such as an integrated circuit. One or more other components of the 801 system can be included in the circuit. In some cases, the circuit is an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).
The storage unit 81 5 can store files, such as drivers, libraries, and saved programs.
Storage unit 815 can store data from the
451 ϊ M m · '··
.) ί_ _U_ <sub>r</sub>i_ \ · \\
MIXÍCANO INSTITUTE '
Cü LA H'.OÍIEDAL »\ 'user, for example, user preferences ^<sup>AND</sup>^<sup>T</sup>^ rogtamas of the user. The 801 computer system at aTgtófó'S '*' '' ciasóÉ 'may include one or more additional data storage units external to the 801 computer system, such as located on a remote server that is in communication with the 801 computer system. through an intranet or the Internet.
Computer system 801 may communicate with one or more remote computer systems over network 830. For example, computer system 801 may communicate with a remote computer system of a user (eg, operator). Examples of remote computer systems include personal computers (for example, notebook PCs), slate or tablet PCs (for example, Apple® iPad, Samsung® Galaxy tablet), phones, smartphones (for example, Apple® iPhone , Android-enabled device, Blackberry®) or personal digital assistants. The user can access the 801 computer system through the 830 network.
The methods as described in the present description may be practiced as executable code on machines (eg, a computer processor) stored in an electronic storage location of the computer system 801, such as, for example, in the memory
452 ϊ Λ · '-Λ
X 1 <· J. ν λ,
MEXICAN INSTITUTE <sub>(</sub> - · ι 'j
810 or in the electronic storage unit * EÍ «w & r 8 ^ 5 - ^ - 45-37 machine-readable or -perr * code<sup>-</sup>nráqtfi-nas · · -may be provided in the form of software. During use, the 805 processor can execute the code. In some cases, the code can be retrieved from storage unit 815 and stored in memory 810 for expedited access by processor 805. In some situations, electronic storage unit 815 can be bypassed and machine-executable instructions are stored in memory 810.
The code can be precompiled and configured for use with a machine that has a processor adapted to run the code, or it can be compiled at run time. The code can be supplied in a programming language that can be selected to enable the code to run precompiled or as compiled.
Aspects of the systems and methods provided in the present disclosure, such as the 801 computer system, can be incorporated into programming. Various aspects of technology can be considered as products or articles of manufacture, usually in the form of machine (or processor) executable code and / or associated data that is carried or incorporated into a type of machine-readable medium.
453 machines. The executable code on K ^ J ^^^ grapenapseJ machines. 'INDUSTRIAL' -'ilxdl- * · 'on an electronic storage unit, such as a memory (eg, read-only memory, random access memory, flash memory) or a hard disk. Storage-type media can include any or all of the tangible memories of computers, processors, or the like or the modules associated with them, such as the various semiconductor memories, tape drives, disk drives, and the like, that can provide non-transitory storage at any time for software programming. All software or portions of it can sometimes be communicated via
Internet or various other telecommunications networks.
Such communications, for example, may make it possible to load the software from one computer or processor to another, for example, from a management server or host computer on the computing platform of an application server. Thus, other types of media that can carry the software elements include optical, electrical and electromagnetic waves, such as those used through physical interfaces between local devices, through wired networks and terrestrial optical lines and over various links by air. . The physical elements that transport such
454
IMPI
INSTITI rro MEXICANO
OF THE PROPERTY
<img file="MX355451B_D0189.tif" />
waves, such as wired or wireless links<sup>h</sup>6E5 '^<sup>or</sup>Optical or similar links may also be used by carriers of the software. As used in this description, unless restricted to tangible non-transitory storage media, terms such as as computer or machine readable medium they refer to any medium that participates in providing instructions to a processor for its execution.
Thus, a machine-readable medium, such as computer executable code, can take many forms, including but not limited to a tangible storage medium, a carrier wave medium, or a physical transmission medium. Non-volatile storage media include, for example, optical or magnetic discs, such as any of the storage devices in any computer or the like, such as can be used to implement databases, etc. shown in the drawings. Volatile storage media includes dynamic memory, such as the main memory of such a computing platform. Tangible means of transmission include coaxial cables; wire (eg, copper wire) and optical fibers, which include the wires that comprise a bus within a computer system. The media
455 , <sub>sv</sub>«Β / ί Iva to ....,
INSTITUTO MEXICANO V ü¿ THE PROPERTY <sup>v</sup> hi '>
**
<img file="MX355451B_D0190.tif" />
carrier wave transmission can have ¥<sup>XJS1</sup>Kk<sup>L</sup> fcirfftff 'of electrical or electromagnetic signals or'<sup>and</sup>^ rS<sup>i £ I</sup>^ TTaa<sup>AND</sup>g<sup>and</sup>^ ctfS'trcas or luminous such as those generated during radio frequency (RF) and infrared (IR) data communications. Common forms of computer-readable media
<td>include,</td><td>for</td><td>therefore, for</td><td>example:</td><td>a floppy disk, a</td><td>disk</td>
<td>flexible,</td><td colspan="2">hard drive, tape</td><td>magnetic,</td><td>any other</td><td>half</td>
<td>magnetic,</td><td>a</td><td>CD-ROM, DVD or</td><td>DVD-ROM,</td><td>any other</td><td>half</td>
optical, punch card paper tape, any other physical storage media with hole patterns, a
RAM, a ROM, a PROM and EPROM, a FLASH-EPROM, any other memory chip or cartridge, a carrier wave that carries data or instructions, cables or links that carry such a carrier wave, or any other medium from which a computer can read programming code and / or data. Many of these forms of computer-readable media can be involved in transporting one or more sequences of one or more instructions to a processor for execution.
The computer system 801 may include an electronic display, or be in communication with one, comprising a user interface (UI) to provide, for example, a model design or graphical representation of an object.
456
IΜ Ρ ΐ f
3D to be printed. The examples
INDUÍf.¿AL '' -xxZLT Limitation, a graphical user interface (GUI) and a web-based user interface. The computer system can monitor and / or control various aspects of the 3D printing system. The control can be manual or programmed. Control may depend on feedback mechanisms that have been pre-programmed. Feedback mechanisms may depend on input from sensors (described in the present description) that are connected to the control unit (ie, the control system or control mechanism, eg, the computer). The computer system can store the historical data related to various aspects of the 3D printing system operation. Historical data can be retrieved at predetermined times or at arbitrarily determined times.
Historical data can be accessed by an operator or a user. Historical and / or operational data can be displayed on a display unit. The display unit (eg, the monitor) can display various parameters of the 3D printing system (as described in the present description) in real time or with a time delay. The display unit can display the current 3D printed object, the ordered 3D printed object, or both. The unit of
457
<img file="MX355451B_D0191.tif" />
<img file="MX355451B_D0192.tif" />
i
INSTITUTO MEXICANA V '
OF THE PROPERTY £ t- -Wi screen can display the progress of the * íwp? «SréteJcteif 3D printed object. The display unit can be ..... νi · 5ustü «a ^ -<sub>F</sub>at least one of the total time, the remaining time and the elapsed time in printing the 3D object. The display unit can display the status of the sensors, their readings and / or the time for their calibration or maintenance.
The display unit can display the type of powder material used and various characteristics of the material such as temperature and flowability of the powder. The display unit can display the amount of oxygen, water and pressure in the printing chamber (i.e. the chamber where the 3D object is printed). The computer can generate a report comprising various parameters of the 3D printing system at predetermined times, when it receives a request (for example, from an operator) or at arbitrarily determined times.
The methods and systems of the present disclosure can be implemented in the manner of one or more algorithms. An algorithm can be implemented as software by running it by one or more computer processors.
EXAMPLES
458 i- * - ¿Λ
The following are illustrative examples oyrig »OK2liHa.1 ^ ntes<sup>:</sup> from
INDUS72ÍAL '' xííCr * the methods of the present description.
Example 1
In a 25 cm by 25 cm by 30 cm container at room temperature and pressure, 1.56 kg of 316L stainless steel powder with an average particle size of 35 μιη is deposited in the container that houses a bed of powder. The container is arranged in an enclosure. The chamber is purged with argon gas for 5 min. A layer of an average height of 2 mm was placed in the container. Two nearly flat surfaces were fabricated with a 1060nm fiber laser beam.
200 W by using the method of melting with the selected laser. The two nearly flat surfaces were connected to the base by means of auxiliary supports to serve as reference points (as shown in Fig.
Figures 21A, 2103 and 2104). Two additional flat surfaces were fabricated without auxiliary supports using a method described in the present description (as shown in Figure 21A, 2101 and 2102). All four surfaces were fabricated so that they lay practically in the same plane. Subsequently, a layer of the powder material having an average height of 75 μιη was deposited on top of the planes by using a powder dispenser described in
459 the present description. The dust is
TPT <
k A './- i Jl Jí'
INSTITUTO MEXICANO 'DS IA PROPERTY
INDUSTIUAI.
leveled to pm by use of a leveling member described in the present description. The surfaces were subsequently developed by means of a gentle blow of air from a direction substantially perpendicular to the exposed surface of the powder bed. Images were obtained by a 2 megapixel charge coupled device (CCD) camera and analyzed by means of an image processing program to determine the degree of movement of the plane. Figures 21A-221B show examples of the experimental results, with Figure 21A showing the planes before leveling by the leveling member and Figure 21B showing the planes after leveling by the leveling member (Figure 21B shows the two anchored reference planes 2113 and 2114 and the two suspended planes 2111 and 2112).
While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown and described in the present description, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that such embodiments are provided by way of example only. The invention is not intended to be limited by the specific examples provided within the description. Although the invention has been described with reference to the description
460
<img file="MX355451B_D0193.tif" />
<sup>1M</sup> PJ mentioned above, it is intended that industrial illustrations of the modalities in the present description are not considered in a limiting sense,
Numerous variations, changes and substitutions will now come to the mind of those skilled in the art without departing from the invention.
Furthermore, it should be understood that all aspects of the invention are not limited to the specific representations, configurations or relative proportions set forth in the present description which depend on a variety of conditions and variables. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described in the present description can be used to practice the invention. Therefore, it is contemplated that the invention will also cover any such alternatives, modifications, variations, or equivalents. The following claims are intended to define the scope of the invention and thereby cover the methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents.
Contents97
221 sheets
Sheet 1 Sheet 2 Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Sheet 5 Sheet 6 Sheet 7 Sheet 8 Sheet 9 Sheet 10 Sheet 11 Sheet 12 Sheet 13 Sheet 14 Sheet 15 Sheet 16 Sheet 17 Sheet 18 Sheet 19 Sheet 20 Sheet 21 Sheet 22 Sheet 23 Sheet 24 Sheet 25 Sheet 26 Sheet 27 Sheet 28 Sheet 29 Sheet 30 Sheet 31 Sheet 32 Sheet 33 Sheet 34 Sheet 35 Sheet 36 Sheet 37 Sheet 38 Sheet 39 Sheet 40 Sheet 41 Sheet 42 Sheet 43 Sheet 44 Sheet 45 Sheet 46 Sheet 47 Sheet 48 Sheet 49 Sheet 50 Sheet 51 Sheet 52 Sheet 53 Sheet 54 Sheet 55 Sheet 56 Sheet 57 Sheet 58 Sheet 59 Sheet 60 Sheet 61 Sheet 62 Sheet 63 Sheet 64 Sheet 65 Sheet 66 Sheet 67 Sheet 68 Sheet 69 Sheet 70 Sheet 71 Sheet 72 Sheet 73 Sheet 74 Sheet 75 Sheet 76 Sheet 77 Sheet 78 Sheet 79 Sheet 80 Sheet 81 Sheet 82 Sheet 83 Sheet 84 Sheet 85 Sheet 86 Sheet 87 Sheet 88 Sheet 89 Sheet 90 Sheet 91 Sheet 92 Sheet 93 Sheet 94 Sheet 95 Sheet 96 Sheet 97 Sheet 98 Sheet 99 Sheet 100 Sheet 101 Sheet 102 Sheet 103 Sheet 104 Sheet 105 Sheet 106 Sheet 107 Sheet 108 Sheet 109 Sheet 110 Sheet 111 Sheet 112 Sheet 113 Sheet 114 Sheet 115 Sheet 116 Sheet 117 Sheet 118 Sheet 119 Sheet 120 Sheet 121 Sheet 122 Sheet 123 Sheet 124 Sheet 125 Sheet 126 Sheet 127 Sheet 128 Sheet 129 Sheet 130 Sheet 131 Sheet 132 Sheet 133 Sheet 134 Sheet 135 Sheet 136 Sheet 137 Sheet 138 Sheet 139 Sheet 140 Sheet 141 Sheet 142 Sheet 143 Sheet 144 Sheet 145 Sheet 146 Sheet 147 Sheet 148 Sheet 149 Sheet 150 Sheet 151 Sheet 152 Sheet 153 Sheet 154 Sheet 155 Sheet 156 Sheet 157 Sheet 158 Sheet 159 Sheet 160 Sheet 161 Sheet 162 Sheet 163 Sheet 164 Sheet 165 Sheet 166 Sheet 167 Sheet 168 Sheet 169 Sheet 170 Sheet 171 Sheet 172 Sheet 173 Sheet 174 Sheet 175 Sheet 176 Sheet 177 Sheet 178 Sheet 179 Sheet 180 Sheet 181 Sheet 182 Sheet 183 Sheet 184 Sheet 185 Sheet 186 Sheet 187 Sheet 188 Sheet 189 Sheet 190 Sheet 191 Sheet 192 Sheet 193 Sheet 194 Sheet 195 Sheet 196 Sheet 197 Sheet 198 Sheet 199 Sheet 200 Sheet 201 Sheet 202 Sheet 203 Sheet 204 Sheet 205 Sheet 206 Sheet 207 Sheet 208 Sheet 209 Sheet 210 Sheet 211 Sheet 212 Sheet 213 Sheet 214 Sheet 215 Sheet 216 Sheet 217 Sheet 218 Sheet 219 Sheet 220 Sheet 221
51 members in 9 offices
Members51
| Document | Office | Kind | |
|---|---|---|---|
| GB201511565D0 | United Kingdom | D0 | |
| CA2952633A1 | Canada | A1 | |
| WO2015196149A1 | World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) | A1 | |
| US2015367415A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367416A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367417A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367418A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367419A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367446A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367447A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2015367448A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9254535B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| GB2531625A | United Kingdom | A | |
| US2016121399A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9346127B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2016207109A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9399256B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US9403235B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2016297006A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2016297007A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9486878B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2017021420A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US9573193B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US9573225B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| KR20170021839A | Republic of Korea | A | |
| US9586290B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| CN106488819A | China | A | |
| GB201703560D0 | United Kingdom | D0 | |
| EP3157696A1 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A1 | |
| US2017144254A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| MX2016016670A | Mexico | A | |
| GB2546016A | United Kingdom | A | |
| US2017189963A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| JP2017532433A | Japan | A | |
| US9821411B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2017334024A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| KR101795994B1 | Republic of Korea | B1 | |
| CA2952633C | Canada | C | |
| MX355451BThis record | Mexico | B | |
| JP6316991B2 | Japan | B2 | |
| CN106488819B | China | B | |
| GB2531625B | United Kingdom | B | |
| CN108436082A | China | A | |
| EP3157696A4 | European Patent Office (EPO) | A4 | |
| JP2018150624A | Japan | A | |
| GB2546016B | United Kingdom | B | |
| US10195693B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US10493564B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US10507549B2 | United States of America | B2 | |
| US2022297186A1 | United States of America | A1 | |
| US2023040341A1 | United States of America | A1 |
1 legal event, as the office reported them to INPADOC
Events
| Event | Code | |
|---|---|---|
| Grant or registrationFG | FG |
Numbers
- Publication
- 355451
- Application
- 16670
Titles2
- Spanish
- APARATOS, SISTEMAS Y METODOS PARA IMPRESION TRIDIMENSIONAL.
- English
- APPARATUS, SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR THREE-DIMENSIONAL PRINTING.
Classification
- CPC, 90
- C22C38/00
- B33Y10/00
- B29C64/153
- C04B35/522
- C04B35/5626
- C04B35/565
- C04B2235/6026
- B22F2999/00
- B29C64/214
- B28B1/001
- B33Y30/00
- B22F2998/10
- B33Y50/02
- C22C38/02
- C22C38/44
- C22C38/58
- B29C64/245
- B29C64/268
- B29C64/35
- B29C64/393
- B22F10/47
- B22F10/18
- B22F10/28
- B22F10/50
- B22F12/90
- B22F10/73
- B22F10/12
- B22F10/32
- B22F12/52
- B22F10/25
- B22F12/60
- B22F12/57
- B33Y70/00
- B33Y40/20
- B33Y40/00
- Y02P10/25
- B22F10/36
- B22F10/368
- B22F12/20
- B22F12/41
- B22F12/45
- B22F12/49
- B29C64/386
- B29C64/282
- B22F7/02
- B22F10/00
- B33Y80/00
- B22F2003/248
- B23K2103/50
- B23K2103/52
- Y02P10/20
- B22F10/20
- B22F10/30
- B28B17/0072
- B28B17/0081
- B23K26/123
- B22F3/105
- B22F7/00
- C04B35/64
- B23K26/346
- B23K26/144
- B23K26/342
- B23K26/70
- B23K10/027
- B23K15/0086
- B23K15/0093
- B23K26/16
- B23K26/32
- B23K26/22
- B29K2105/251
- B23K26/702
- B22F3/24
- B23K15/002
- B23K15/02
- B23K26/0853
- B22F3/003
- B22F3/004
- B22F2003/1054
- B23K10/006
- B23K15/0026
- H05B6/68
- H05B6/80
- B29C64/264
- B29C64/255
- B29C64/165
- B23K26/1224
- B29C64/194
- B29C64/171
- B29C64/188
- B29C64/40
- IPC, 4
- B22F3 105
- B22F7 02
- B33Y30 00
- B33Y80 00